Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing with April Beach (Episode 323)

    Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing

     

    Are you sitting on valuable content and wondering how you can monetize it through licensing? This episode is tailor-made for coaches, consultants, and other subject matter experts who possess content that’s just waiting to be shared with a wider audience. We’re going to clarify what content is licensable, how companies are hungry for it, and why knowing this is critical for taking your business operations to new levels of growth and efficiency. If your content is collecting dust, listen up – this is not the show for you if you’re not yet clear on what content licensing is. I suggest first catching up on our previous episode about the basics of content licensing before diving into this one.
     
    In this chat, we unpack three lucrative types of licensable content—each with varying income potential, represented by one, two, or three dollar signs. From leveraging distribution channels with compact pieces like articles and videos, to enhancing other programs with your trainings or workshops, and even offering complete processes that other companies can use independently. I even share a personal story about how I repurposed my own courses, and how that could be a game changer for you, too. We break down these strategies into real-world applications to help you visualize the incredible potential of licensing the valuable content you already have.
     
    End Results:
    • Recognize short, impactful content that can be used to fill a company’s distribution channels.
    • Identify how your smaller training modules can augment existing programs to create added value.
    • Understand the goldmine that is complete programs and courses, ready for you to license.
    • Get clarity on whether your content fits better as internal training for teams or as client-facing solutions.
    • Realize the potential profitability of licensing and how it contributes to a scalable business model.
     
     
    Resources:
    • For all your licensing resources, free tools, and business strategies, visit sweetlifeco.com.
    • To tap into a complimentary licensing 101 video, check out licensingtools.com.
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    323

     

    Hey guys, welcome back to the show. We are talking about should you license your trainings and courses to April?

    [00:00:52] Other coaches and your competition. As a matter of fact, in this episode, in this video, we’re unpacking the strategy about how to actually turn your competition into your clients. It’s a game changer. And I’m so glad that you are here. If you’re watching us on YouTube, Please subscribe and like this video.

    [00:01:10] And if you are listening to this episode, I’m so glad that you’re here. It is episode number 323. Let me validate this with my notes. Yep. We’re at 323, you guys, and I just appreciate you listening here on the Suite Life Entrepreneurial Podcast for the last seven years, we’ve been cranking out proven business and trainings, proven business strategies and trainings that you guys can take to the bank in this series.

    [00:01:36] That we’ve been doing is all about content licensing. First of all, if you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode number 320. These are short power packed episodes that are highly valuable delivered to you in a short period of time where you’re going to walk away with your mind absolutely blown about how you can scale your consulting business, coaching, speaking, writing business through content licensing.

    [00:01:59] So today, First of all, I’m going to share a tool. If you want to learn more about content licensing for free, you can cruise over to licensing tools. com and you can watch a free video about all about content licensing, even case studies about how I’ve licensed my content and how our clients license their content so you can get your wheels spinning.

    [00:02:21] So. Definitely go tap into that as well. So I want to talk about how to turn in your competition into your clients. This seems like really catchy when I do a, an Instagram or a LinkedIn post about this. I just get so many clicks because like, Ooh, that sounds so great. It does sound great, right? But let’s talk about the strategy of this and who this is for.

    [00:02:44] So this is for those of you guys who are established consultants, coaches, Subject matter experts, speakers or authors, and you have the trainings, you have programs, you have content, systems, methods, or frameworks that are your intellectual property. You own them and these, this content has gotten your client’s results in the past.

    [00:03:08] So you’re good at what you do. Last week’s episode, we talked about who is actually qualified to license. So if you’re wondering that, go back and listen to the previous episode here. You have this content and you’re thinking about delivering it in a licensing format, meaning you’re going to allow other companies to distribute your content or include your content in their trainings or their programs.

    [00:03:34] And the strategy here, really the question that I want to help you address is should you actually license? To your competition. So to answer that, I want to take you through a scenario here and then I’m going to share with you a story about how I did this in the past to help you even think more about it.

    [00:03:54] So the first question you need to ask yourself is, do I want to sell this myself still? And it doesn’t even have to be no. We’ll talk about that in a minute. But the first thing is with this, we’ll call it a course for the sake of this strategy here. With this course, do I want to keep selling this through my own business as you know, that one of our programs, one of our products.

    [00:04:22] If you do, that’s great. We’ll talk about that pathway in a second. If you don’t, let’s say it’s a training that you’re not even using anymore. You guys are probably sitting on so many trainings, courses, and programs here. They’re not marketing. It’s not part of your future growth of your business. They’re collecting dust on shelves, even if they aren’t even built out yet.

    [00:04:42] Like how many notebooks full of training programs, uh, have you created? So if you don’t want to sell it anymore, your business is moving in a new direction. Then this is like slam dunk. Imagine what allowing other consultants or coaches in your space would look like to actually to actually deliver your program and include your program in what they deliver to their clients.

    [00:05:10] Imagine what that would do for you. If you are no longer selling it, it doesn’t matter anymore. It’s not the future of your business. It’s not what you want to be known for anymore. One of the fastest ways to grow your network, to build amazing, mutually beneficial relationships, frankly, to build an entire network.

    [00:05:31] Which I’ll share with you about how I did this years ago of coaches and consultants in the exact same niche in the exact same space where you’re the head of that group. That’s what we’re talking about here. Imagine what that could do for your business and how you could actually scale your business by allowing your competition to license your trainings, courses, processes, systems, or methods.

    [00:05:59] If that sounds good to you, sounds good to me. I did it. Sounds good to a lot of our clients. They’re doing it. So let me tell you a story about that and then we’ll go to the other side of it for those of you guys that still want to sell it and we’ll workshop how to do that. So how I did this, let’s flashback years ago, almost 20 years ago, I feel like I’m aging myself here, especially in the, in the coaching and consulting space.

    [00:06:24] I’m like, I ran darn Nash forever. I am. One of the creators of the parent coaching industry. Okay. You guys would never know that. I know we could do a whole nother show on how we keep building and reinventing ourselves. So back in the day I helped create the baby planning, maternity concierge industry, wrote the scope of practice for it and all this stuff.

    [00:06:48] However, prior to that, I was a business strategist and coach. So I was a business coach for years, all the way back into the nineties. And then I had this, then I had what usually happens to us. Then I had three babies and I realized there needed to be a coach for new parents and that everybody was just giving me their opinion and not giving me just facts and made me mad.

    [00:07:07] So I created an entire industry called the baby planning industry. And in the process, I opened up The first fully comprehensive maternity consulting firm in the world. And it was great, you know, I was making money. I was coaching new parents, but I’ll be real honest with you guys. You know, I developed courses and trainings and programs.

    [00:07:30] I. I’m not a parent coach. It’s like the way I parent. If you guys follow me on Instagram, it’s usually totally rogue compared to the way most people parent. And I actually hated coaching other parents. I’m a business strategist. I’m a business coach. So I had this short stint and instantly I realized, Oh my gosh, I’ve done this.

    [00:07:49] This is, this is so great, but I have all these trainings and programs and courses and I don’t want to do this anymore. And of course, other parent coaches because then the industry was growing. I mean, we have Baby planters and parent coaches like all over the world now, they were coming to me for business coaching and that’s what I wanted to do because frankly, that’s what I’m good at and I wanted to consult them from a business strategy to help them build their business like I had created my first company.

    [00:08:16] Anyway, long story short, I realized that they would have been my competition, but instead what was right for me was I wanted to turn them into my clients. And so I licensed them everything, you guys. I licensed them all of my courses, all of my processes, all of my worksheets. It was an entire business in a box.

    [00:08:39] They had a parent coaching business in a box. And imagine what that did for my sales. Okay, so instead of me delivering courses and services to parents, which I really didn’t want to do, I was, you know, been there, done that. That was not who I’m made to be. Yes, I was very proud of, of the foundation of that industry and literally creating an entire coaching industry from scratch.

    [00:09:04] Very proud of that. But that had nothing to do with our parents. That was business strategy. That was my jam. And I wanted to get out of there as quickly as possible. And at the time, because the industry was so new, I really wasn’t making a ton of money coaching parents, but my company was very well known.

    [00:09:20] Right? So the money was in the going B to B, not B to C. And I knew that. And so I turned. Those people who think heavens are coming to me for help, but I turned what would have been my competition into my clients by literally licensing them all of the processes in the content that I had so that they could grow their business faster, serve their clients better and make more money and in the process.

    [00:09:46] What did I get to do? Made more money, increased my free time, went back to business strategy and consulting. As a matter of fact, what I did is I actually made so much money doing this that I was able, and I’m just going to share this because I want you guys to be thinking about the potential of what you can do.

    [00:10:05] I was able to form a non profit. I’m also an environmental non profit founder. Which again, you probably would never know unless you’re listening to this show, but I share that with you because it made me so much money that I was able to work a little bit in business strategy, license all my stuff and go f k myself.

    [00:10:22] Form a nonprofit and work with, you know, companies like the environmental working group and surf writer foundation and all these like cool environmental ocean saving groups that, you know, I totally geeked out on. I got to work with people like Mark Ruffalo, Mark Ruffalo, the actor wrote an article on me and the work that we were doing in our nonprofit.

    [00:10:43] And our nonprofit was founded by Patagonia, right? Like, or was funded by Patagonia. I share this with you because this is the power of what licensing can do. And all I did was create great content and I turned my competition into my clients and I gave them everything that I had and it was the best thing I ever did, not only for me, but for them too.

    [00:11:09] And frankly, I was really interested in growing the Parent coaching industry and I knew my services processes systems and content could also help do that on a global scale And so that’s what I’m talking about I’m talking about taking things you’ve already done if you don’t want to do them anymore It can be just one course or you can license out your whole business like I did And grow your reach exponential, exponentially, make more money and free up your time.

    [00:11:42] So that’s bucket number one. That’s if you don’t want to do it anymore. That’s a slam dunk. If that is you, I would love to help you do what I did, what I help many of our clients do. Hit me up over at SweetLife Co. com. I will help you do exactly what I did. So now let’s talk about the other side of it.

    [00:11:59] Let’s say you either still want to sell it or you’re not really sure. You know, you’re not really sure if you want to give it away yet. You don’t want to make that final decision. Totally fine. Here’s what I want you to think about. If you are going to still sell it yourself. Don’t license it to your direct competition, instead, license it to other companies that have the same end user as you.

    [00:12:23] So if you are a public speaking coach, you’re not going to license your training to another public speaking coach, but you could license it to, let’s say, a publishing house who needs their authors to know how to be confident public speakers. You could license it to a PR firm that needs their, their people, their representatives to show up confident.

    [00:12:45] So if you want to license your content confidently on TV, think about who else, what other businesses serve the same clients that can benefit that your content can actually augment their current content and elevate their current content, license it to them, not your direct competition. And if you do want to license it, so I’m going to give you just a part three.

    [00:13:05] And by the way, many of our clients do this, they kind of sit in this space for a couple of years while they’re ready to actually, you know, kind of retire some of their own content and fully, fully allow other companies to distribute it. And then number three is if you do want to keep it yourself and you want to license it directly to your competition, don’t give them the exact same thing.

    [00:13:25] I want you to keep the gold standard for yourself because I want you to be that end all be all. You’re going to charge more for it because I mean, let’s, let’s be honest, like even with licensing, nobody can replace you. You know, we’re trying to duplicate you as best as we can. We’re taking your IP, your genius, your processes, allowing other companies to distribute it, but nobody’s you.

    [00:13:49] They’re the best. You came up with it. It’s you’re a genius. So if you want to license it to competition, but keep it yourself, make sure you’re charging more, make sure you keep the best of the best of the content, and then maybe you take some pieces of it. And allow other companies that are your competition to actually take pieces of it, not the whole shebang.

    [00:14:12] So let’s recap what we talked about here. We’re talking about how to turn your competition into your clients through licensing. Number one, and I shared with you the story about how I did this way back in 2008 where I took my entire business, all my trainings and programs and allowed other coaches to utilize it.

    [00:14:34] You don’t have to give them all that you can give them just one whole course. I don’t care It doesn’t have to be the whole thing. I mean, I really hated parent coaching you guys. It just was not me Okay, so like I knew I wanted to get rid of the whole thing, right? I couldn’t wait to get back to business strategy and consulting So yeah, you have to really know if you’re gonna give away and license your whole business, right?

    [00:14:57] So whether it’s just one course or a couple of processes or a couple of trainings, you know, if you’re not going to use it anymore, awesome. That’s way number one that I’m so excited for those of you who are ready for that yet, but if you’re not ready for that, it’s totally cool. We can get you started here at way number two, where you’d license out your trainings, your processes, not to your direct competition, but to other businesses that serve the same clients.

    [00:15:22] That’s option number two. And then option number three, if you do want to keep it yourself, we’re not going to give them all of it. We can give them pieces of it. Parts of it to include in their offers your direct competition in their offers. Am I the only one like excited about this? When I talk about this, I feel like sometimes I’m sitting here in my office recording, my boys are in their rooms and my dogs are out back and I’m sitting here like so excited all by myself.

    [00:15:50] Because I know what this can do for you guys. My goal is to open up the world of content licensing for you so that you can get to do what I got to do, that you can actually choose your own adventure of your life because you’re making money of content you’ve already created. That’s what I want you to be able to do.

    [00:16:13] And that’s what we coach our clients to do. If you would like strategy consulting, if you would like to access our entire licensing project plan, every single thing from, even if you don’t have an idea of what you want to license yet, even if you’re not sure, by the way, That’s a big part of what we help our clients figure out is your strategy.

    [00:16:33] Don’t wait to ask for help for your strategy. My job is to help you navigate all the options and pick the best strategy. That’s what we do with our clients. Don’t wait for the strategy. I’ll be doing another episode on the problems of waiting for a strategy, and you can certainly subscribe and tap into those other episodes.

    [00:16:52] But please don’t, because that’s a mistake, and you can move forward and make a mistake that you can’t take back. All right. It’s been a pleasure connecting with you here today. Again, if you’re watching this on youtube, let me just be honest We’re really trying to grow our youtube channel I haven’t really tried hard before but we are now so if you could please subscribe to this I would really appreciate it and even share this episode Uh with your friends and if you’re listening on apple or spotify, thank you so much for being a listener of this show We really appreciate it All of our licensing resources can be found by visiting SweetLife Co.

    [00:17:27] com, including kickstart trainings and free videos that I would love for you to dive into. All right. It’s been fun hanging out. I will talk to you guys on the next episode. Bye for now.

     
     

     

     

    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies? with April Beach (Episode 322)

    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies?

     

    Course Creators: License Your Way to Growth. In this episode, we’re diving into the major question that’s on many of your minds: Can I license my course, training, or content? If you’re a coach, consultant, author or speaker with valuable trainings and content looking to license to other companies, you’ve come to the right place. We’re peeling back the curtain on the prerequisites for licensing to help you gauge if your content is ready for the next step. This isn’t for newbies still finding their footing – we’re looking at established business owners who are already good at what they do. If you’re wondering how to leverage your expertise and extend your influence, then this is for you.
     
    We cover the key ingredients that make your content license-ready. You might be surprised to learn that your program doesn’t need to be fully built before licensing— in fact, it’s better if it’s not. Save yourself time and adopt a strategic mindset to turn your proven methods into licensing gold. I share insights on positioning your business for the future and discuss how important it is to think about how licensing will shape your brand in the long term. Plus, you’ll hear an inspiring case study about a client who licensed her yet-to-be-created course for a whopping seven-figure sum!
     
    End Results:
    • You’ll be positioned to start considering if licensing is a suitable growth strategy for your business.
    • Understand the necessity to provide predictable, transformational, measurable results through your content.
    • Gain insight into the strategic foresight required for long-term thought leadership and brand positioning.
    • Discover the potential to turn your expertise into a licensed program, even if it’s not fully developed.
    • Learn from real-life success stories to inspire your own journey in content licensing.
    • Resources Mentioned:
    • Free licensing business growth tools: visit sweetlifeco.com
    • Licensing 101 Video: licensing-tools.com
    • Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass: For those who need guidance in curating their curriculum for licensing.
     
     
    Resources Section:
    – Access free licensing business growth tools, strategies, and worksheets at: https://www.sweetlifeco.com
    – For a Licensing 101 video and immediate resources, head to: https://licensing-tools.com
    – Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass for curating your curriculum: Learn more through our resources at sweetlifeco.com. 
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    322

    [00:00:46] Hey there. Welcome back to the show. Today we are answering the question. Can I license my course? Yes. Training for content. And so if that’s what you’re looking for, you are in the right place. I’m April Beach host here at the Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast and CEO of the SweetLife Company. And I’ve been teaching experts, coaches, and consultants to license our content for over a decade.

    [00:01:09] And I want to unpack who this episode is actually for. So if you are a subject matter expert, we’re Coach consultant, you may be an author or a speaker and you have trainings and content that you’re interested in licensing to other companies. I want to unpack some prerequisites for licensing here to help you identify whether or not your content is ready.

    [00:01:32] So if that’s what you’re looking for, this is episode number 322. You can find all of the resources and tap into our free licensing, business growth, business tools, videos, strategies, worksheets by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. All right. So this is for those of you guys who are established business owners. So.

    [00:01:54] Let’s take a little hint from that. The idea here is that you need to be good at what you do. So prerequisite number one, you need to be able to deliver results. If you are a brand new coach, a brand new consultant, welcome to the world of coaching and consulting. It is growing rapidly. It has been growing rapidly, especially over the last decade.

    [00:02:16] And we want to make sure that before you give another company permission to actually utilize it, that you have a proven record of getting people results. So prerequisite number one is, do you have a system, process, curriculum, an outline, a methodology, a framework? Do you have a way of taking people from one place to another place?

    [00:02:45] Or businesses from one place to another place. We’ve talked about this on shows over the years. We actually teach this when we teach million dollar offer engineering. But the key phrase I want you to ask yourself is, does my program, content curriculum, whatever it is, deliver predictable, transformational, measurable results?

    [00:03:10] Are you capable of doing that? Now, one of the things I do want to say is number two is you actually don’t even have to have a thriving, established coaching and consulting business. And I’m going to share with you a case study of one of our clients who was very good at what she did, but she didn’t even have her consulting business launched.

    [00:03:29] She wasn’t even in her own independent business space. She was just very good at what she did based on her professional background. So I don’t want you to think, Oh my gosh, I don’t have a business. I don’t have all these followers, by the way, followers do not equal the value of what you deliver. Those are vanity metrics.

    [00:03:47] We don’t even look at those. The reality is, is can you deliver companies or individuals reason results and, and have you done that in the past? That is the most important thing. Now, number two, and this is probably going to surprise you and I’m going to save you time. I’m hoping to save you time. Your program does not have to be built all the way out.

    [00:04:09] As a matter of fact, and I will be doing more podcast episodes about this, so make sure you’re subscribed and we can hang out together. I can keep pouring into you. As a matter of fact, taking the time to build your program out could greatly hurt you, which I will be unpacking why that is in other episodes.

    [00:04:26] It doesn’t have to be built into a place. As a matter of fact, when we talk to new clients that are considering working with us to help them build out their licensing packages and in pricing and sell them, oftentimes I hear, well, I just keep need to work on it. I need to build it first. That is absolutely not the case.

    [00:04:46] So if you do not have a course built or a training built yet, I But you still have a proven method for getting people results. You can totally move into licensing and I actually don’t want you to wait. You know, there are so many different strategies when we talk about scaling, coaching and consulting businesses.

    [00:05:05] There’s so many different strategies about selling something before you build it. I have to say that I am usually not an advocate of that. In that coaching and consulting space, I at least want us to be frameworked out to have a built in an LMS to understand the user experience and in the client experience and the transformational benchmarks.

    [00:05:27] If we were just talking about building and growing your coaching and consulting business on the B to C side. Normally, I’m not a huge advocate about totally winging it, pulling something out of the air. Actually, I’m never an advocate of just pulling something out of the air. And selling it. But a lot of coaches say to do that on that side of the business, and I’m sure they have their reasoning and strategies.

    [00:05:49] Normally, I’m not that person, guys. Okay? I’m just going to be honest. But, now we go over and we talk about content licensing and whether or not you are able to release your content. Now we’re talking about the fact of selling a proven method, curriculum, strategy or process that can be built out later, according to who you license it to.

    [00:06:13] So number one, you have to be really good at what you do. Number two, you don’t have to have it built yet. As a matter of fact, please don’t take the time to build it, because time is money. Is money, especially when we’re talking about content licensing. If you’re thinking about doing this, you’re thinking about getting into it and you’re like, Oh, well, I don’t really have the time and I don’t, you know, I’m not really ready to start in it.

    [00:06:35] You are absolutely losing money. Thousands and thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. Okay. So just be mindful of that. And you know, the other thing, and this is number three, I’m going to share with you here on this particular show, I told you these are going to be high value short time, so you can binge them and move on to the next one.

    [00:06:54] The other one is something that I really want you, if you can take away anything from today’s show, please take away this in order to license your content. We need to know what you want your next five to 10 years of your business and life to look like. And oftentimes that seems like so big, especially if you are new into an industry like licensing, like most people are, because it’s still this best kept secret.

    [00:07:23] It’s one of those things that with licensing, We can’t take it back, okay? So let me expand on that a little bit. If you were to launch a course, or a training program, or a retreat, or a mastermind, and you do it, and you go through the process, and maybe you liked it a couple times, and you got burned out on it, and you just, you can stop.

    [00:07:45] You can stop selling it. When you license, And you give permission to another company to distribute your content. It’s for the term of a license agreement. And so once you put it out there, you can’t take it back. And so let me tell you why this is important for the context of, of what we’re saying here today.

    [00:08:02] And, and I don’t want to scare you away from this, but I want to be fully honest with you. Because a lot of coaches, consultants, and experts come to me for help licensing something that they did not get coaching on before, and they made a lot of mistakes and they can’t take them back. And that’s one of the reasons why I decided to do this podcast series, because I want to save you from these mistakes.

    [00:08:27] Okay? And so here’s what I want you to take away from this show. I want you to ask yourself, what do I want to be known for in regards to this training or content for the next five to 10 years? If you’re in a place like frankly, many of our clients are, let me give you a little bit of behind the scenes here where you’ve been in business and you’re looking for your next level business model, you’re looking to free up your time and increase your profit and truly scale, then licensing is a great opportunity for you.

    [00:09:02] But here’s the question. What you license, or I should say, what will you license? Because what you license. We don’t get to take back and I want you to be thinking about how well known you want to be for that content Are you okay with the thought of another business? Distributing your training and content if this is the mountain you’re gonna die on and you want to become the thought leader And you want to be the end all be all company to directly deliver that particular training B2C then who you license it to Matters We’re not going to license it to your competition.

    [00:09:44] And so those are just some of the things that I want you to be thinking about. When clients come in to work with us for licensing, the very, very first thing, phase one of our licensing plan is positioning. And that’s what I’m sharing with you here today on this show. I want you to understand the importance of how you want to position yourself in the next three steps.

    [00:10:04] Five, 10, 15, 20 years. How do you want your thought leadership to be positioned? How do we want your brand to be positioned? We can do it any way you want. I’m not saying you’re going to lose it all. As a matter of fact, we build thought leaders through licensing. Let me say that again. We build thought leaders through licensing.

    [00:10:25] I want you to sit with that, but what we give away, what you’re thinking about extending out to others will be affected based on your personal professional goals in your company goals. And so those are the three things I wanted to unpack on this show. Who can license their content, right? So number one, you have to be good at what you do.

    [00:10:49] You have to have a methodology, content, framework, training, course, or process. Whether it’s built or not, that gets people, remember these three words, predictable, transformational, measurable results. If you don’t have that yet, even if it’s not built out, but if you don’t have your content, your method, your process, your curriculum built out, cruise over.

    [00:11:16] We are happy to help you. We have our million dollar licensing offer masterclass where we actually teach you how to curate your curriculum to build your licensing offers. It’s called offer engineer. That’s where you should be. And that’s where you are. Awesome. We are here to help you. But if you already have that, you’ve had that for years, you’re an expert in your space, then great.

    [00:11:38] Well, you know, skip to step number two, don’t worry about guessing where it needs to be built out. You just take what you have, whatever the structure of that looks like. And then we get to take it into step number three, which understanding how you want to position yourself as a thought leader in the future, that’s going to help you package up your material to license it.

    [00:11:57] And so those are the three steps I want you to be processing, and I can’t overestimate how important your understanding of your strategy is in, in this whole process. If you want to be known for your work, thinking about that, and we can make you as known as known can be, or we can make you a ghost and still make hundreds of thousands of dollars through licensing your content.

    [00:12:22] But it’s up to you. And the point I’m making to you is once you decide that, we can’t. Really take it back. And so those are the things I want you to be thinking about. And that’s why I am recording this show in this video for you. If you are finding us on YouTube, our new YouTube channel, I’m so stoked that you’re here.

    [00:12:39] Please subscribe to this. We would love to continue to pour into you. Now, let me tell you. Go ahead and share with you a case study like I promised I would about one of our clients who didn’t have a consulting business and didn’t even have a course built. As a matter of fact, her case study, um, she just closed.

    [00:12:59] Two of our first licensing deals in this past week of recording this show, but I did do a whole 30 minute interview with her where she shares her process. She went through that also can be found cruise over to our YouTube channel as well, where you can really hear behind the scenes and the details. But I just want to share this story with you so that you are aware.

    [00:13:18] So this particular client was a professor. Okay. So she did have an established area of expertise. She’s been a teacher. She has her doctorate. You know, she has been in the corporate world for a very long time. So she’s worked with companies. She’s developed plans and processes in curriculum within companies.

    [00:13:39] So she, she was great at it. And she just licensed her course, That’s based on her intellectual property, but it’s not yet built anywhere to multiple universities. And her first check is 142, 000. Her licensing deal for one university is over a million dollars for one course that she hasn’t even built yet that’s based on her expertise.

    [00:14:07] And if you want to tap into her case study, and she’s not the only one. I mean, it seems ridiculous. As a matter of fact, I was saying this in one of our live streams where I was like, I can’t even share this case study. People are going to think this is absolute bullshit. Like this is crazy to take a course that isn’t even built, but from established IP and license it for over a million dollars.

    [00:14:28] She’s a single mom. She’s a professional. She’s awesome. And frankly, she’s just like you. And so those are the things that can happen with licensing. You don’t have to have it built yet. You just have to have content that is proven, even if it’s from your own brain and your own teaching and your own workshops and your own expertise, maybe it’s from your book.

    [00:14:49] Many of our clients, we turn their books into a license program. We turn their signature talks into a license program. Maybe it’s from one of those places, but you don’t have to have a built out yet. And that’s what I want you to walk away with. That is the mind blowing that I want you to gather when we’re talking about content licensing.

    [00:15:10] So if you want to know more about content licensing, cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com where you will find tools and resources to get started with content licensing totally free. You can also cruise over to licensing co. com. Tools dot com. And it’s going to take you immediately to a licensing 101 video.

    [00:15:33] You can put me on fast forward where I’m going to go through case studies to get your wheels spinning even more about different ways that you can take your content, whether or not you’re even selling it could be content you’re selling or contents collecting dust, and we can license it to other companies and expand your reach.

    [00:15:51] And I’m not going to be the police here on who’s ready to license our content and who isn’t. I want to be, I’ll be honest with you. We’ve seen, this is a, this is a little raw April beach here. If you’ve been following this podcast, you know that I’ve just kind of say what’s on my mind in the history of the coaching and consulting space, especially as it’s grown online.

    [00:16:09] We have seen a lot of coaches that frankly are not good at what they do. Uh, we’ve even seen some opportunities where people are releasing something called the master resale license, where they’re teaching people how to do their thing. And then giving them like a business in a box. And these people are in most cases, not very qualified to do that.

    [00:16:26] You know, you’ve probably seen some of these things coming around. That’s not what we do. That’s not what we as a company do with content licensing. We work with established experts to license their content out to other companies, nonprofits, corporations, other coaches and consultants, universities, and not all here in the United States, across the world.

    [00:16:47] And that’s what we can do for you too. So please subscribe to this YouTube channel and follow us on Instagram and DM me on LinkedIn. I am always available to answer your questions because I geek out on this stuff because I know it can do for you and your business. Thank you so much for tuning in here to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast.

    [00:17:07] This is episode number 322, and we’re going to be continuing our series where I’m answering the most common questions I receive about how to license your content to scale your business. All right. Bye bye for now.

     
     
     

     

     

    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale? with April Beach (Episode 321)

    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale?

     

    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit 

     

    Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? If you’ve been establishing your expertise in your domain and possess a trove of valuable content that other businesses could benefit from, this episode of the SweetLife® Podcast is curated with your needs in mind. What we’re talking about today isn’t just an opportunity to broaden your business horizons—it’s a transformative approach that can substantially enhance your profit margins and free up your time. I share insights that are particularly important for subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, authors, and leaders who are looking to upscale the dissemination of their knowledge without increasing their workload.

    In this podcast, we unpack specific strategies that fundamentally change the traditional growth model. From sharing firsthand how I licensed a single course and exponentially multiplied its reach, to discussing the potential of licensing your content to other companies who can then market your intellectual property. We cover the successes of content licensing, the practical steps in the process, and how I have helped clients in the past decade, utilize these strategies to reduce their effort while massively scaling up their businesses. My experience and the case studies we dive into serve as a testament to the substantial impact that wisely implemented content licensing can bring to your enterprise.

    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:

    • Get to grips with the actual mechanics of content licensing and how it can act as a catalyst for rapid business scaling.
    • Hear inspiring stories and case studies that demonstrate the successful implementation of content licensing from my clients and me.
    • Discern specific strategies for using content licensing to multiply your reach without proportionally increasing your effort, time, or costs.
    • Discover who is best suited for content licensing — it’s aimed at established professionals armed with content ready for wider distribution.
    • Learn how one course or training can be licensed in various ways, from individual trainers to large organizations, for broad-reaching impact. 
    • Content licensing isn’t just a buzzword; it’s a robust business model that can augment the reach and profitability of your content. We’re talking about a strategic movement that could revolutionize the way you think about and engage with the growth of your business.

    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit  https://www.sweetlifeco.com/email-capture-501e66ad-8462-482e-96b3-f755e65c0f9d

     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    321

    [00:00:28]  Hey there. In this episode, number 321, we are answering the question. Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I’m excited to dive in with you. First of all, who is this show for? It’s for established subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, and authors. You guys are really good at what you do.

    [00:01:07] You have trainings and programs and processes and models and content that can be useful for other businesses. And we’re diving into why is content licensing such a magical, fast, scalable. Business opportunity. If you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode 320 where I unpack the actual definition of content licensing for you.

    [00:01:32] So in this show, we’re going to unpack here. Why is content licensing a fast scalable option and who it’s for? I’m also going to share with you stories. I promise you guys in this entire series we’re doing on content licensing that I want you to hear stories from my clients and And for me about how we have licensed their content, because there is no cookie cutter way.

    [00:01:55] And the purpose of sharing you stories with you short stories and case studies is that I want you to be able to think in your own mind, Oh my gosh, this could work for me. Or what about a variation of this? And that’s how it could work for me as well. And so. Everything that I want to pour into you here is all strategy and it’s proven regarding my experience over the last decade, consulting subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants about how to scale your business through content licensing.

    [00:02:25] So now let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, what is scaly, right? So I have other podcast episodes on the dish on the difference between growth and scale, and I feel like it’s important to actually do a basic definition of that here. So. Growing is where we increase our investments. We usually increase our costs, but also we’re increasing our profit.

    [00:02:46] So we’re investing more, whether it’s more time or more money or more teams or more ad spend in order to actually grow the profit. Scaling is where we are not increasing our costs. We are not increasing our time. Scaling is where that is staying the same. And we’re going to talk about the magic of content licensing, because that actually goes down while we’re increasing our profits.

    [00:03:09] So in order to truly scale, I know that word is thrown around a lot in the coaching and consulting space, but in order to truly scale, this actually means thinking about what is this strategy where I can increase my profit, actually decrease my workload while increasing my free time and the It doesn’t require me to spend a whole lot more time and money to do that.

    [00:03:32] So, If that’s what you’re looking for, stay with me here. So let’s talk a little bit about the history of the coaching and consulting space I’ve been coaching coaches for 27 years with an area of expertise and specialty to online coaches and consultants since 2006 so really low time. I don’t even know how long that is.

    [00:03:51] It’s 2024 right now. So With that being said, initially, like the really big buzz around scaling was going from one on one to one on group, and that is a very important way to scale. We work with our clients all the time to actually model and grow their consulting programs in that way, right? But I just, I want to define what we know about scaling as far as the majority of the knowledge of the coaching and consulting space so far.

    [00:04:18] So we know that going one on one to one on group is a really great and powerful way to scale. We also know that doing things like pre recording trainings and putting them on demand. So evergreen online courses is another really great way to scale. So basically you’re, you’re teaching the same content, but too many people at a time.

    [00:04:38] That is a very powerful way to grow your business. So let’s kind of leave that sitting here on this beautiful platter because that is scaling, coaching and consulting businesses. Now I want to elevate a different dining room table, if you will, and I want to open up the opportunity for something that will blow your mind when terms of scaling from that first platter.

    [00:05:07] If you have an established course. Training, content, process, methodology that you have been teaching to people, whether it’s one on one, you don’t even have to have scaled it on that side of the business. Imagine now allowing for other companies to teach it for you. Imagine allowing other companies to actually distribute that content and training for you.

    [00:05:40] Imagine what that would do because even in a traditional scaling model, you’re still the one doing it, or if you did advance to the point that you have somebody on your team doing it, that’s awesome, but it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Okay, so it’s still coming from the effort that is put into the service, the consulting, the product, whether it’s on demand or it’s live being delivered from you or your team or your company.

    [00:06:10] And let’s just be really honest with all the marketing in the world, you’re only going to affect so many people. What are you going to have, like 8 billion students in your online course, right? That’s just. That’s a silly thing to say, right? It’s totally impossible. So there is only so much you can do, even with all the ad spend and all the marketing and all the reach and all the partners and all the Instagram followers and all the YouTube subscribers.

    [00:06:37] There’s only so much you can do because it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Whereas with content licensing, now imagine, so you’re selling it here. Let me go back to the other side first. You still have to sell it to each one of the individuals. Who’s going to be in there, whether they’re one on one or one on group.

    [00:06:54] It’s still your sales process. Now imagine selling it one time to another company and they turn around and either sell it or distribute it to all of their people. You only have to sell it or license it once and they get to flood your intellectual property All of their people. They’re the ones that do the effort to sell it to enroll people into it.

    [00:07:24] That is the power of content licensing. Imagine taking that same course that you have been teaching in whatever format that was or that same training or that same live workshop that you’ve been going into organizations and delivering this workshop. Maybe that same process that you’ve been taking other teams through and rather than you doing it, imagine another company enrolling people into it, selling it, getting the buy in and delivering your processes and trainings and programs on your behalf.

    [00:08:00] We can go sell one to one and fill up a training program with 100 people in it. Imagine what selling one to one company would do when you are going to reap the benefits of 100, 500, 1000, or 10, 000 people receiving that training. That is the ultimate exponential scalability. That’s what we’re talking about here with content licensing and it’s so big sometimes like the potential of the reach is so huge that you might feel like, Oh my gosh, I just, you know, I’m not ready for this and I’m going to be sharing other podcast episodes with you on who’s ready, who’s qualified to do this, but just here in this space with me today.

    [00:08:46] Just give yourself a minute to absorb that instead of enrolling students, clients, people into your training one on one, even if it’s scaled, even if you’re teaching in a group format, imagine selling it to one business business, one company, whether it’s a huge organization or a coach, just like you who enrolls their students into it.

    [00:09:08] And that is the power of content licensing, and that’s why I want to share with you. It is truly one of the fastest ways to scale because we have all these other strategies that work well. Again, I’ve been teaching clients how to do it for years and years, but this, this is the one way where we know that we can duplicate you faster while reducing your time and in the end of it, extending the reach of your work because that’s what people want.

    [00:09:35] That’s what everybody wants. And so, I promised you that I would share stories and case studies about my own experiences with licensing and our clients experiences with licensing. So, here’s your story of the day. Alright, so, in the last episode, I shared a story about how I licensed one training program.

    [00:09:55] And I licensed that one training program to one brick and mortar and then a group of brick and mortar businesses. Now, I’m going to tell you what happened next, which is so cool. I took that same course. Listen to this and I licensed it to 10 other coaches just like me all around the United States and then it gets even better.

    [00:10:20] And then I charged for sponsorships of that course to product manufacturers. I kept the money for that. And then the course was promoted with huge media outlets, like at the time, um, Whole Foods Market, not a media outlet, but Whole Foods Market sponsored the class. Um, the Bunk, the Bunk. com magazine sponsored the class.

    [00:10:43] The Environmental Working Group sponsored the class. I had huge sponsors where my company was able to keep the sponsorship money. And I was able to profit by licensing the opportunity to be able to teach my course across the country by other coaches. They paid me for that. Imagine what that can do for your business.

    [00:11:03] You guys, this is from one course. One course that was well engineered, that was a sought after training, I was able to license it to other consultants, let me say that again, and sell sponsorships into that class. I did nothing. I did nothing but sell the sponsorships, release the content, release the content license agreement, and away they went.

    [00:11:27] And I, at the time when I did this, I had three baby boys. I was working from home like I still do, and my boys were at the time probably six, four and three years old. You can imagine what my house was like, how crazy it was. I was literally sitting in my office on the other side of the wall. They were like building Legos and.

    [00:11:50] Probably throwing each other down the stairs. It didn’t require me to be some strategic licensing expert. It was so much easier than you think. And I just want to open up the world of licensing to you. Imagine that because before I had done that. Again, I had been teaching my trainings and courses one on one to clients and yes, I did have online courses at the time.

    [00:12:13] Yes, we had online courses back in 2007 and 2008. Imagine what this could do for your business. Imagine what that life would look like for you. And that’s what I want to share with you on today’s podcast, taking one course, one training and imagine what you can do with it. And that’s the power of content licensing.

    [00:12:34] And that’s exactly what we teach our clients to do so that you can do the same thing that I did and many of our clients did. So if you’re interested in learning more about scaling through licensing and you want to work with us, you can cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com. Certainly subscribe to our YouTube channel.

    [00:12:53] I’m always releasing content and strategies that are proven that you can take to the bank. And if you want to tap in, we have an actual free licensing 101 video where I actually break out the four different case studies about how I got started in licensing. This is one of four other ways that are going to blow your mind, not because I’m great, because it’s going to blow your own mind about your own ability and your own potential to do this yourself.

    [00:13:20] And I’m so excited for you to experience this and just to be able to open up the world of licensing to you and certainly to be able to hold your hand and guide you through it. So if you want to tap into that video, cruise over to licensing dash tools. com. And there’s a free licensing one on one video where I unpack case studies that will blow your own mind for yourself.

    [00:13:41] That’s what we want for you. This is episode 321 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach. If we’ve never met before, shoot me a message on LinkedIn. I’d love to connect with you. You can also follow us on Instagram. We are always here to answer your questions. Thanks so much for listening to the show and I will talk to you in the new episode.

     
     
     
     

     

     

    What is Content Licensing? with April Beach (Episode 320)

    What is Content Licensing?
    Episode Bonus: Video on HOW TO LICENSE YOUR CONTENT TO SCALE YOUR BUSINESS & INCREASE PROFIT.  To watch visit https://licensing-tools.com/
     
     
    We’re starting a new series focused on the transformative power of content licensing – a strategy to scale your business, increase profits, and gain more free time. If you’re an established business owner adept in your field and curious about content licensing, this episode is specifically curated for you. However, if you’re new to the business world, I suggest revisiting our past episodes to build your foundational knowledge first.
     
    In this episode, we dive into the nitty-gritty of content licensing. What is it, exactly? How can it be a pivotal part of your business growth? I’m here to unpack these questions, offering clear insights and strategies. Content licensing isn’t just a concept; it’s a viable option for expanding your business reach. We’re going to discuss how leveraging the courses, trainings, and content you’ve already developed can open doors to new opportunities. Through real-life examples and case studies, you’ll see how content licensing has been a game-changer for many, including myself and my clients.
     
    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:
    1. Deep Dive into Content Licensing: Get a comprehensive understanding of what content licensing involves and how it can be a turning point for your business’s growth.
    2. Real Business Cases: Learn from stories and case studies that illustrate the successful application of content licensing in various businesses.
    3. Strategies for Scaling Up: Discover specific strategies for using content licensing to not only enhance profits but also to assert your expertise and thought leadership in your niche.
    4. For Whom It’s Meant: This episode is tailored for those looking to significantly upgrade their business operations. If you’re not yet at this stage, our previous content will be more suited to your current needs.
    5. Exclusive Insights and Tips: Benefit from the direct experiences and advice I share, grounded in proven success and practical application.
    In this episode, we’re talking about leveraging what you’ve already created to add value to other businesses and, in turn, to your own. It’s about understanding the strategic importance of content licensing and how it can radically change the way you do business. So, let’s get started on this exciting journey to unlocking the full potential of your content!
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    320

    [00:00:50] Hey, you guys. Today we are starting a whole new series. series that we’re going to be diving into regarding the power of content licensing. That is how to license your courses, contents, trainings to scale your business, increase your profits, and actually also increase your free time. I’m so glad that you’re here.

    [00:01:06] If you are not an established business owner, this whole new series moving forward is based Probably a little bit too far ahead, a little bit too far advanced for you. Please pause and go back and binge all of our seven years of suite life entrepreneur podcast episodes. You can actually sort all of our episodes by topic on our website found at suite life code.

    [00:01:25] com to get what you need. Today we are diving into what is content licensing. So this is specifically for those of you who you’re very good at what you do and you want to scale your business and you’re wondering how or if content licensing is an option for you moving forward. So I’m going to unpack exactly what content licensing is for you so that you know if you want to keep moving forward with us.

    [00:01:49] In our strategy, in our show, in our content, and possibly in our consulting, if we can help you move in this direction at the end of this, you are going to be able to spin your wheels and say, wow, yes, I want to learn more. This is a really cool opportunity for me because content licensing is one of those things that is shh.

    [00:02:08] Nobody knows a lot about, and so I’m going to unpack actually what it is, and I’m going to share with you stories and case studies from myself and my clients over the course of podcast episodes in videos with you. So you can not only hear the strategy and understand the strategy, but see how the model of content licensing can work for your business.

    [00:02:30] These are all very short, compact videos and episodes that you can dive into and binge. And so let’s go ahead and dive right in. First of all, little disclaimer, I am not an attorney. And so you should definitely seek legal advice from an attorney for all of your legal contracting needs. The consulting and advice that I’m giving you here is for general educational purposes for you to use.

    [00:02:54] And I’m going to be sharing with you stories that you can apply to your business. Now with that being said, the things I’m sharing with you are absolutely strategic and they are proven and they work from a business strategy standpoint. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, What actually is content licensing?

    [00:03:12] Content licensing is giving another company the ability to use or distribute your content. So it’s not selling it to them. You’re not giving them ownership of it. It’s like renting your content to another organization. And what does that actually look like for you? So if you are sitting on courses, trainings, content, content that you’ve created, Systems, methods, processes, frameworks, then you are in a prime position to allow other businesses to utilize it.

    [00:03:43] So picture this. How long did it take you to develop those processes and trainings and programs? How many years did you put into the development of your course? And how many thousands of hours did you put into establishing yourself potentially as an expert in your space? Other businesses, they don’t have the time or capacity.

    [00:04:05] And frankly, they’re smart enough to know that they don’t want to start from scratch. They don’t want to create something that you already have the solution to. So other companies are constantly looking for different opportunities to bring your trainings in to either. their employees, their staff, their users, and even to include in their own trainings and programs externally to their own clients is actually selling it as a separate product or selling it as a product suite.

    [00:04:35] So you’re probably familiar with music licensing and imagery licensing. You probably use pictures or you’ve licensed stock photography before, you know, here, It in the intro to our suite life entrepreneur podcast, there’s some music that we had to license to be able to use. That is pretty common. Most people are familiar with that, but what we do at the suite life company is totally different.

    [00:05:00] We help our clients actually license your intellectual property, the content in the processes and the trainings that you’ve created. And so that’s what content licensing is. And so this is a power packed episode just to open up the world of licensing to you. So when our clients hear about licensing, it usually comes across their plate in a few different ways.

    [00:05:23] Either a company approaches them and says, wow, you know, that was a really great talk or really great training or an individual, um, CEO of another company says, Oh my gosh, I want your training and our program for our clients. Those are usually the ways that people actually come into the world of licensing because it isn’t so widely known that most subject matter experts don’t go out there and go, Hmm, I think I’m going to just start licensing my stuff that I would say about 80 percent of our clients have actually entered the world of licensing because they’re so good at what they do and they have such great trainings that they have an audience that is asking for their content.

    [00:06:03] If you’ve ever been in a place. Where let’s say you have a partner, it’s another coach or another consultant, maybe somebody that runs masterminds or as somebody of a CEO of another company that says, wow, how much would it cost me to bring your training in, to use it for our clients? So most people in the coaching and consulting space consider that, Oh, well, it’s just a bonus to their training or, you know, I’m just gonna, I’m just going to add it in there and, and maybe generate leads from it.

    [00:06:32] But the technical term for that is licensing. That means you are giving them permission to actually rent and replay your content, to distribute your content within another program. And. Most businesses don’t have the right agreements in place for that because it’s like a spit in a handshake. And sure, I’ll give you a training to, to use as to use in your program.

    [00:06:51] And sometimes that’s totally fine. Especially if it’s just a one time thing, no big deal. But what I’m talking about here with content licensing is where we take your whole program or your whole course or a significant part of your course and actually allow other companies to add it and augment their current programs with it or to sell it as one of their own trainings And that’s when licensing really becomes a game changer.

    [00:07:18] Yes, you can absolutely do what a lot of my friends call embedded partnerships, where you just add a little piece of content into their training program, or you can take it to the next level and you can develop a licensing business model that you’re not just doing that with one business or one buddy and their program.

    [00:07:35] You are actually inserting your program into multiple training programs across the world. And that is the power of content licensing. And so my goal here in this podcast is just to open up the potential for you. First of all, so do you know the difference between licensing and selling? We are not selling.

    [00:07:57] You’re only giving somebody permission to rent and distribute your content per the terms of the agreement that you set forward. And then secondly, it is usually for a term that you can continue to offer renewals. And frankly, the goal of this is to expand the reach of your work. There’s no way, and we’re going to be talking about this in, in future episodes.

    [00:08:22] I’m asked, I’m answering all of your licensing questions here on the Suite Life Entrepreneur Podcast and on LinkedIn and YouTube. There’s no way you can actually expand the reach of your work to the point. With your marketing it yourself with your own teams. I don’t care how much money you have to put into ads, how many partners you have.

    [00:08:43] Expanding the reach of your work through content licensing gives you exponential results. And if you are like, frankly, most of our clients, one of the most important things to you is actually expanding the reach of your work and helping more people and helping more businesses and being significant in making the deep, true impact for other companies.

    [00:09:03] And they’re individual users. That’s what we’re talking about with content licensing. And it’s absolutely my joy to open up the world of content licensing for you. I have a free video that you guys, if you’re watching this and you want to dive in more and hear case studies and really start your wheel spinning, cruise over to licensing tools.

    [00:09:24] com. com that’s licensing tools. com and you can binge our licensing 101 getting started video totally free. It is going to blow your mind. So let me share with you a story about one of the ways I got started with content licensing. I had this amazing course. And it was a course that I had developed to work one on one with my clients and I shared it with them virtually.

    [00:09:51] This is back in 2007, you guys, long time ago, and I was selling it as an on demand online course as well. And so I had that set up and I was using it with my own business and it within my own tools. And I had a friend who had a brick and mortar retail store and she said to me, wow, April, I would love to have your course for my staff members to teach.

    [00:10:15] In person to increase foot traffic into our brick and mortar store. So she identified that I had a course. It was just one course, you guys, and it was valuable in that having my course or permission to teach my course in her brick and mortar store here in Denver, Colorado was a big deal. A great way for them to start marketing more, increasing foot traffic.

    [00:10:38] And so one of my first licensing endeavors was giving that brick and mortar store permission to teach my class. It seems very simple, right? But think about the beauty of this. It was a class I’d already created. Number one, number two, this particular business was not in competition with me. So then teaching my class was really beneficial for them and it wasn’t hurting my business whatsoever.

    [00:11:02] We had the same audience, but different businesses and different business purposes. And I was able to make money off somebody else teaching my course without ever having to show up and do it myself. On top of that, I also got the credit. Everybody knew it was a course by me. So when these people went to the course, they recognized me and my company as a thought leader in this space.

    [00:11:29] It was a win win for everybody. So let me recap this. I had a course that I was still using in my business to consulting business, both with clients one on one and selling it on demand for clients. As an online course. Number two, another company asked if they could use it. Absolutely. Yes. Number three, it was in no competition with me whatsoever.

    [00:11:51] And it was a benefit to this brick and mortar store as well as a benefit to their end users, as well as a benefit to me. So I ended up making money by licensing my course. to this brick and mortar store. And let me tell you what happened after this. After this, I went on to license my course, this particular, this one course to brick and mortar boutique retailers all over the country.

    [00:12:19] As a matter of fact, I had one chain that had 15 stores that licensed my course in all of their stores. So that is one of many licensing stories I want to share with you so that you can start thinking about, Hey, would this work for my business? Is this something that would be really a great opportunity for me to scale my reach and increase my profits while, like I said, increasing my free time and increasing your thought leadership through licensing?

    [00:12:49] That is one of the ways that content licensing can benefit you. And over the course of the next couple of weeks and months here on this show and all of the resources that our company is actually focusing on for you is all around content licensing. We are your go to strategists and consultants to understand how to package in price in model up your licensing offers to sell them to other small businesses just like you.

    [00:13:18] All the way up to universities, the government, corporations, and nonprofits. Those are all of the places that our clients license their content and their curriculum into. So thank you so much for listening to this show. I promised you power packed episodes. I want you to leave listening to this super excited about the potential that licensing can play for your business future and having resources that you can start rolling with.

    [00:13:42] Of course, please subscribe to this show on YouTube and And on all of your podcasts, listening devices, you can visit us. If you already know you need help immediately, you can go to suite life co. com and you can apply to work with us or join one of our licensing courses. We are always here for you and I can’t wait to help you see the future with this.

    [00:14:02] It is an absolute game changer. All right. This is episode number 320. You can visit that in the show notes as well. Take care guys. Talk to you soon.

     
     
     
     

     

     

    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks with April Beach (Episode 319)

    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks
    Episode Bonus:
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
     
    Summary:
     
    This episode is a treasure trove for established coaches, consultants, subject matter experts, and service-based entrepreneurs who’ve been serving clients and are ready to take things up a notch. We’re delving into 10 innovative strategies to boost your revenue by $50,000 in the next six weeks. It’s all about actionable advice, proven systems, and strategies that April Beach has refined over 27 years as a business coach. However, if you’re just starting out, this might not be the episode for you just yet. Remember, this is about matching your dedication with the right strategies to build a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity.
     
    In this episode we’re diving deep into specifics. Expect to learn about personalized mentorship and the unique advantages it offers, like connecting deeply with your clients and sharing your hard-earned wisdom. VIP days, another gem, provide an intensive, focused experience that can significantly uplift your business. And let’s not forget about course licensing “quick sales” – an ingenious method to extend your reach and earnings without the heavy lifting of delivery. We’re also unpacking 7 more powerful ways you can bring in extra money like planning retreats, launching new programs, and effective cost-cutting, and more. All are designed to elevate your business swiftly and effectively.
     
    Takeaways: 
    1. Enhanced Revenue Strategies: Learn techniques to significantly increase your income in a short time frame, specifically designed for established professionals in coaching and consulting.
    2. Business Growth Insights: Gain insights into unique and practical strategies, such as personalized mentorship, VIP days, and licensing your content, to expand your business reach and enhance client engagement – plus 7 more options to choose from. 
    3. Operational Efficiency: Discover ways to optimize your business operations, including revisiting past programs and smart cost management, to maximize profit fast. 
     
     
    Bonus: 
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
     
    Additional Resources: 
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    319 

    And welcome to episode number 319. Today, we are digging into 10 different ways.

    [00:00:53] Okay. To help you make 50, 000 in your coaching business in the next six weeks. So let’s talk about who is this episode for and exactly what you can expect. And let’s make sure that you are in the right place. First of all, you’re listening to the suite life entrepreneur podcast. As the intro said, thank you so much for being here.

    [00:01:11] My name’s April beach. I’ve been a business coach for 27 years and every single one of the trainings that we deliver to you here on this show are proven. This isn’t a fly by night show. As a matter of fact, the purpose of this show is to deliver proven systems, strategy, coaching and trainings that other business coaches and strategists will charge you thousands of dollars for.

    [00:01:33] This has been our mission for the last seven years to make sure that these proven trusted trainings get in the hands of all the entrepreneurs that are out there that are really dedicated to building a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity. So if that’s what you want, yeah. You are in the right place.

    [00:01:48] Again, this is episode number 319. And if you’re a new listener to the show, let me share with you the structure of how these shows actually work in the very beginning here. I’m going to tell you exactly who this episode is for, and I’m going to share exactly who it’s not for, because I don’t want this to be a shiny object and I don’t want it to be a waste of your time.

    [00:02:06] So at the beginning of every single one of our episodes, this is what you’re going to expect, who it’s for, who it’s not for. If this show, isn’t for you. Awesome, right? I believe time is more valuable than money. You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com and you can actually search our shows by topics and actually level a business to find the shows that are right for you.

    [00:02:26] So, in today’s show, How to increase 50, 000, make 50, 000 in the next six weeks. This is for established coaches and consultants. If you are a new coach to the space, if you are here and you’re trying to launch a business and make 50 grand in six weeks, this show is not going to help you do that. So if you’re brand new to the coaching and consulting space, please don’t listen to this episode and think that you’re going to be able to get results from it.

    [00:02:52] This is for established coaches, consultants, subject matter, experts, service based entrepreneurs that have already been delivering amazing results and services that are already making money and have already been serving clients. So I just want to be really upfront. On who this episode is for. And all of our show notes can be found by visiting suite life co.

    [00:03:13] com. Simply clicking on the podcast. And this is episode number 319. And there are two bonuses I’m going to give to you upfront so that you have these, you can go navigate to these, to grab these, and then we’re going to break down these 10 different ways. The two bonuses are totally free. And the first one is our licensing launchpad.

    [00:03:32] This is actually a training that we sell normally with this episode. I’m giving you complete access to our licensing launchpad training totally for free cruise over to our website and you can use the coupon code. Podcast to get into that free. And then the other one, the other bonus, if you’re not really ready for licensing yet, and you’re just growing a consulting or coaching business, I also want you to get access to our ultimate guide to online offers and business models.

    [00:03:59] It’s a 19 page guide that breaks down all these different products and offers that you can create and sell. And actually who it’s for, who it matches, what lifestyle and basically helps you save 10 years building the wrong kind of offer and the wrong kind of business. You can also grab that by going to the show notes, cruise over to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:18] com, simply click on the podcast and both of those bonuses will be found in the show notes for you. So today 10 different ways that you can make 50, 000 and increase it in your business. We’re also going to dive into. Why are we even needing to have this conversation? So before I dive in and give you the 10, we’re going to certainly seriously, seriously have a conversation about why do we need to make 50 grand?

    [00:04:43] What are some things in our businesses that might not be going right where we’re struggling right now and saying, Oh my gosh, I’ll shoot. I need to bring in 50 grand. So we’re going to talk about this, certainly the solutions and the strategy, but also avoiding this. So you’re not in a place where you’re struggling to increase profit in a short period of time.

    [00:04:58] We want you to build profitable. Predictable businesses past seven figures here. And so let’s go ahead and dive into this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco. com. I am so glad you’re here. Let’s dive in. All right. Diving into what we’re talking about here today. First of all, let’s have a conversation about, you know, what could be going wrong in your business before us to need to have a conversation about how to increase business.

    [00:05:22] 50, 000 dollars or, or maybe what could be going right? And you just want to make 50 grand. So one of the things I want to talk about and why this episode is important is because right now we’re recording this here in the spring of 2024 right now, it’s really important time to be selling your coaching and consulting services.

    [00:05:39] Businesses just like yours are looking to grow. People are still looking to grow. They still have that beginning of the year, a ramp up, and they wanted to improve whatever that is, their life, their health, their wealth, their business. And so now is a really important time to be bringing money into your business.

    [00:05:57] As a matter of fact, if you have been tapping in with me and we’ve been hanging out together for years and decades, you know that how we actually plan the profit of our business here at the Suite Life company is we bring a lot of our sales in, in the springtime because me and my team, we travel. And we vacation almost all summer long.

    [00:06:18] So what that means is when we are in a time of the year where we need to have sales come in, it’s planned that way in advance. So if you find yourself here that you need to increase sales now, cause you travel like I do awesome. Or you may find yourself in this place where you’re listening to me and you’re thinking, oh my gosh, I really need to bring in sales right now.

    [00:06:38] So whether you’re listening to this in the spring or at Christmas time, whenever it is, it’s going to be an important episode for you to listen to. But the number one tip is understanding when is the right time to sell based on your industry. So if you’re in the coaching and consulting space, the right time to sell is now.

    [00:06:53] And so that’s why this episode is very timely for you. And one of the things I want to say before we get into giving you the actual 10 different ways that you can increase your sales by 50 K is that the rule here. Is it? I don’t want you to overthink it. One of the things with sales and building up to sell and increase your profit is way too much happening in your head from wondering how the wording and the messaging should go out to all these different things that we really do want to have a strategy for.

    [00:07:24] But in the case of what we’re talking about on today’s show, You just need to take action. Okay. So the rule here is don’t overthink it and definitely take action. Rule number three is taking action and making those sales calls, following up with old leads, connecting with people that you haven’t talked to in a while.

    [00:07:45] You do have to do the work. So yes, I’m going to give you the strategies to increase your sales by 50 K, but if you don’t go out there and actually do the work. It’s not going to work for you. And so that’s one of the things I wanted to be really upfront about before we dive in here. I do not believe there is magic bullets to business.

    [00:08:02] I believe that when the strategy is right, it flows right. And you make money, right? But sometimes we do have to, you know, dive in and get you a high profit in a short period of time. And so. That’s what we’re talking about here on the show. So let’s go ahead and dive in. I’m going to cover each one of these 50 different ways where you can increase sales in the next six weeks.

    [00:08:22] And as you’re going through, certainly you can go back and listen to the show notes, but be thinking about which one or two of these would work for you in some of these. Yes, you can just do one of these ways. And when we execute it correctly, Can increase your sales by much more than 50k, but you may feel like there’s two or three of them.

    [00:08:45] As a matter of fact, you may listen to this and feel like, wow, I can do nine of the 10. Don’t be that person. At least just pick one. If the most of them pick two, because we do want to execute these one or two things very, very well. Promise. Scouts honor, whatever that is. Okay, there you go. Alright, so, let’s dive in.

    [00:09:03] Number one, you’re a coach, consultant, subject matter expert. The number one way, well, I can’t even say these are in order of operation. Number one of the ten is to sell, Personalized mentorship. Now let’s talk about why this is, you know, uh, a gold arrow for you. We have with scaling, scaling, coaching and consulting businesses, everything scales, everything’s a group program.

    [00:09:30] Everything is even things that are customized or cookie cutter to a certain extent, and there is a system and a process and a method which you always need to have, but it, the system is systematized. With mentorship, let’s talk about the difference between actually what mentorship is. And I have other podcast episodes that totally geek out on this if you’re interested in those, but there’s a difference between a coach, a consultant, and a, and a mentor.

    [00:09:55] And this is. True mentorship, where you can bring in coaching and consulting and strategy. But the people that want this, they want to have a relationship with you. The people that will pay for mentorship wants to connect with you, wants to mentor with you. And that is what they’re, that’s what they want to experience.

    [00:10:15] They want to learn from your wins and your mistakes. So selling one on one mentorship, you only can sell a couple of them. All right. So it’s really important that you price it correctly according to your credibility, your level of area of expertise, you know, how long you’ve been doing it, your value of what you deliver, but what they’re really paying for is, is a personal relationship with you.

    [00:10:35] And so private mentorship. In a lot of cases for our clients starts at no less than 10, 000. Many of our clients have private mentorship offers over 50, 000. So you can, if you’re structuring it correctly and you are willing to offer private mentorship to just a couple of people, we can. easily get you to that 50 K in the next six weeks because of the nature of why this offer is so powerful.

    [00:11:05] Again, it’s not a group program. It’s completely customized to them and you’re not only teaching them what you know, you’re not only consulting or coaching them, you’re sharing the ins and outs and your personal experiences and your personal thoughts and you’re dealing with mindset issues and emotional issues and you are.

    [00:11:23] In it with them, rolling up your sleeves with them. There’s frankly nothing like private mentorship. And that’s why I wanted to lead with that. So if you’re, you’re listening to this still because you’re established in your coaching and consulting space, if you’ve never sold private mentorship before, this would be one I really want you to lean in on and consider doing, you know, we’re not in this episode going to talk about the length of time and how often you meet.

    [00:11:47] That is something that we cover in part two. Our other episodes, obviously we build that out with our clients. If you’re interested in working with us for the sake of this episode, I don’t care. Pick it yourself, meet with the person and listen to them, create it perfectly for them. We’re talking about bringing in extra money for you in order to do it.

    [00:12:05] We need to create and deliver offers that people really want to pay for. So number one is private mentorship. Huge advocate of this. Um, I only I do private mentorship for clients. It’s quite expensive because here’s the thing. And here’s a little warning about that. With my clients that I mentor, I’m like thinking about him when I’m in Costco and when I’m on the side of my kids across field and talking to my husband about them at dinner, you know, Clients that you mentor, they, they consume you.

    [00:12:32] They become part of your life. So the, the only thing I’ll say, and then I’ll be quiet about this is just make sure you really like the people and that you love them and their business, actually, that you’re willing to do mentorship with. All right. So number one. One on one mentorship. Number two are VIP days.

    [00:12:47] We talk about VIP days all the time. My friend Amy Yamada has been on the show. We’ve talked about VIP days before, just actually a couple episodes ago, we talked about how to structure VIP days. I love VIP days. You probably love VIP days. These can be online days or they can be in person days. VIP days are days where usually the morning time is structured for Understanding and listening to what somebody needs in the afternoon is structured to actually give them the strategy and the outcomes they’re looking for.

    [00:13:15] People love high value, short time. And so for VIP days, I recommend you don’t sell any VIP day for under 10, 000 and they can fly in, you serve them lunch, you meet at a hotel or a beautiful destination place, or you can do an online virtual, uh, VIP day. If you are going to do the online version, And I want you to remember, I said, minimum 10 K for VIP day.

    [00:13:40] I would love for you charging, you know, 000 for VIP days. Then if it’s online, let’s make sure that you curate something really amazing so that you have lunch delivered to their house or their office. Um, you know, you send them a coffee mug, you know, with, with coffee in a freaking coffee grinder that they can grind to, to get through the day.

    [00:14:01] whatever that is, um, fermented mushrooms. I’m a big fan of fermented mushrooms. I think they’re like a game changer, not the psychedelic mushrooms, fermented mushrooms. Although there are arguments, great arguments for the psychedelics too. I just don’t send my, my clients psychedelics, but anyway, whatever that is for you, just figure it out and make it so good that they really feel like that very important person.

    [00:14:23] And they have a hundred percent of your attention VIP days. Number two, I want a list for increasing your sales in the next six weeks. The third one is licensing. We talk about licensing a lot on this show. I’m a licensing strategist. Basically, if you don’t know what licensing is, what it is, it’s taking your courses and your programs and your trainings and allowing other companies to distribute them, whether it’s within their own courses or trainings or allowing them to actually sell to their audience.

    [00:14:52] So basically we’re taking the same product that you’ve built and we’re allowing other people to sell it or distribute it. Licensing is. For sure, the way to skyrocket your business, especially those of you guys who have established trainings. And so let me share with you how with licensing, because some licensing deals actually take a long time to close.

    [00:15:09] So the bigger the deal, the longer it’s going to take to close. So here, for the sake of this show, I’m not talking about the licensing deals that some of my clients have that are closing for three. 300, 000 a half a million or even over a million dollars. I have some clients with pending agreements on the table for one course for over a million dollars.

    [00:15:29] That’s not what I’m talking about here. I’m talking about what’s called a licensing quick sell. That is a training program that you already have. We know it’s fantastic and you can sell it to another coach or consultants. We need to make sure your agreements are right. This isn’t like just giving them a bonus training to add to their training because we’re increasing your profit.

    [00:15:50] Not just giving somebody away. Something nice. This is actually where we take your established training program and we actually license it to another consultant or coach or another business that’s similar to yours, or at least a totally different business that serves the same audience licensing.

    [00:16:05] Quicksales are a really. Great way to increase your profit fast. The reason why I actually love this one is unlike mentorship and unlike VIP days, licensing quick sales, you just need to sell it and then you get to walk away. You don’t have to do anything. You don’t have to deliver it. You get to actually release your training and the company is responsible for delivering it.

    [00:16:25] So third way is a licensing quick sell. One of the bonuses that I mentioned in the beginning of this is free access to our licensing launchpad. It’s like this little teeny mini launchpad. 43 minute training with like five different videos on who you can sell your stuff to and how to get started. It’s a great training.

    [00:16:42] You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com forward slash licensing launchpad and use the coupon code podcast to get into that for free. So if you want to know more about that, go grab that over there. Number four is opening old programs. So And we’re going to talk, this kind of goes through like the, the, this one, number four and five kind of fit into the same thing.

    [00:17:05] So opening an old program. So if you have an audience that used to be fans of programs you used to sell that you aren’t even using them anymore, maybe they aren’t even part of your marketing strategy. You can open up old programs like the Disney vault. Okay. How many of you guys have kids that are my age now they’re like in their teens and early twenties.

    [00:17:27] And do you remember when. They had the, we had the Disney DVDs and you only could go buy these DVDs is brilliant for Disney. Like you only could go buy these DVDs and access them when the Disney vault opened, right? So like when the Disney vault opened up like the old school Cinderella and whatever, we would all go buy it because like we didn’t have Disney plus and we didn’t have things on demand.

    [00:17:51] So it’s taking that same concept. It’s opening the vault of old trainings. I don’t care how big they are. And you can open up one training from your old vault and just say, Hey, listen, it’s open right now. You know, I want you to go ahead and grab into it. If you missed it in the past, here’s access to it.

    [00:18:09] Now that has been really, I mean, obviously it’s proven Disney did it. They make millions of bucks, but it’s been proven to help businesses where your audience might have changed. So if you’re serving a different audience or maybe your audience is You know, in a bunch of different places or a bunch of different levels, opening your vault of old trainings can serve a certain sector of your audience that maybe you’re just not currently marketing to, or maybe isn’t something that might be part of the future of your business.

    [00:18:38] But they’re still hanging out and they still love you and they want access to your stuff. So opening up your vault of old trainings is is one really really great way and that’s like a one time open Close. All right, and then number five is we’re going to take that same vault concept But this is going to be different now I want you to think about opening up your vault of not just one training But opening up your vault of all of your old trainings now Let’s, let’s, let me say the word old in a different way.

    [00:19:08] They can’t be out of date. They can’t be crappy, right? They have to be really great, but maybe you just don’t sell them anymore. It’s not part of your marketing strategy. Maybe you’re sitting on a bunch of trains that we never really got into a launch plan. And so it was a great idea and you wanted to build it, but it just turned out that it wasn’t the right timing or whatever.

    [00:19:29] Those are the trainings I’m talking about. So I want you to think of if you have a collection of trainings, opening up your vault of trainings, and then turning it into a membership. Okay? So people can get into your vault of trainings, and they can access all All of your gold and all of the assets that you’ve previously sold that are amazing.

    [00:19:54] And they can be part of a membership program. Now the deal with the 50 K in the six weeks is that this is going to be something that you can generate the sale of 50 K to be collected over like a 12 month period of time. Usually these vaults of older trainings don’t sell for like as much as your mentorship is going to sell for.

    [00:20:12] But we can invoice out and we can project sales for 50 K for a period of time for over, you know, six months or a year. So yes, we can generate 50 K in sales, but it’s a difference between like projected income and collectible income. You’re going to be collecting that over a period of time. Okay. Want to make sure we’re honest about that.

    [00:20:31] But again, this was great for those of you guys that have an established fan base. Maybe you’re not actually selling to them actively in the future, but you can take instead of just one training and opening it up, you can take up a vault of trainings. And if you really want to sweeten the deal, And really get people, cause we want people to register for it over the next six weeks.

    [00:20:52] Okay. The rule of that is those registrations total up 50 K in that period of what, if it’s a 12 month membership or a, or a six month membership, however you want to do it, I would do 12 months. So we need an, we need to do the math to say how many people at, let’s say a monthly membership of a hundred bucks.

    [00:21:10] Do I need to get to register for this over the next six weeks so that I have projected. You know, future income. So make sure you’re doing your math correctly in with that. You are going to have to sweeten the pot, right? We might think about running some ads to it, to get some paid traffic as well. And just using those conversions.

    [00:21:28] But what can you do as far as extra bonuses, live support that you could add on to them for that vault of trainings that. You’re just sitting on waiting to make money on. So let me recap where we are so far. So we talked about one on one mentorship VIP days Licensing we talked about opening one old program that used to be like if you have like an old gold standard program Everybody loved you became known for that.

    [00:21:54] You can open up that for a very short period of time You can release it on demand or live. The number five is opening up your vault of all of your resources All of your assets. If you’re like me, literally you have decades of assets that you’ve created for people that frankly, you can’t even fit it all into your marketing.

    [00:22:11] You’re just not enough time in the year to even sell all that you’ve created. That’s what I’m talking about. That’s really valuable. And then let’s kind of switch gears a second here. Number six was totally different. Number six is literally planning a retreat. And taking deposits for that retreat. So if you’ve been thinking about planning a retreat and you want to increase sales in a short period of time, now’s a great time to do that.

    [00:22:36] People are booking retreats for the middle and even the end of the year. I, by the way, literally put my deposit down for another surfing retreat in Costa Rica. You guys are totally going to laugh at me. But you won’t laugh at me if you’ve been listening to this show, you know, this is totally me. I booked two retreats for myself already for 2025.

    [00:22:55] Number one, I’m going back. It’s not even a retreat. It’s just a trip, but still I had to pay my deposit. I’ll be surfing in Costa Rica again, next February, 2025, and I’ll be surfing in Barbados in October of 2025. Those are two things I already paid for you guys. I already paid my deposit for a year and a half away.

    [00:23:15] So there are crazy people like me. They even, if you can’t have the retreat this year, if your retreat is so good, it’s so amazing, it’s exactly what they’re looking for. They will pay you a deposit like me because we’re planners and we like knowing, I like knowing I get to surf. Okay. So those are some of the things.

    [00:23:33] If you want to increase sales and you want to have retreats, yes, you have to choose the dates and get all the details, but you can book a retreat. You can go ahead and start selling to that and you can take deposits right now for a retreat that. You don’t even have to host for, like, it’s, I don’t even know how far away October of 2025 is.

    [00:23:51] It’s over a year and a half away, you guys, I paid for a retreat. Okay. Uh, number seven is launching a new program with deposits to hold the date. Okay. So obviously you can make 50k. I’m not going to sit here. You’re listening to show and be like, well, do a launch. That’s not what this is about. Right? And if you’re like me, you hate live launches anyway.

    [00:24:11] So it doesn’t fit what you want to do. What I’m talking about here is. Telling everybody that you’re building a new program or you’re launching something could be even later in the fall and taking deposits for that right now. So let me give you an example. We have another 30 day licensing accelerator coming up in September.

    [00:24:32] I already know we have it. We have the dates and there’s a bunch of people that couldn’t get into our accelerator that we’re hosting this month in March. And so we have already sent out emails saying, Hey, listen, if you want to be part of it. For next fall. And you want to lock in the dates for the one you missed right now.

    [00:24:48] You can pay for it now and you can be part of it in the fall. So launching a program, but taking the money now to either lock in a current rate or lock in a future rate, or maybe it’s just a deposit. So that’s number seven. And I wanted to make sure I was explaining that in the context of what we do for our business, because I know that helps people understand.

    [00:25:08] Number eight affiliates. We talk about affiliates a lot. I love partners and affiliates and. We have many podcasts on how to build your business and how to increase sales with affiliates. And I really believe that affiliates and collaborations are the way of the future. And it’s one of the best ways to bring in sales.

    [00:25:30] So if you haven’t either created affiliate yet or whatever that looks like for you, please go and create affiliate partnerships. So reach out to other people. Other businesses that serve your same clients and ask them to, you know, sell your program for you, give a percentage of sales to these people. One of the best ways and the fastest way is my friend, Kathy Hahn used to say this, that, you know, we grow your business is, you know, by borrowing somebody else’s audience.

    [00:26:00] And so that is partners and affiliates. So don’t ever look affiliate launches. Don’t ever look affiliate partnerships. And, but I also don’t want you to overthink this. I, you promised me that you would be here listening to this show. If a member of where I was like, you can’t ever think it, you just got to do it.

    [00:26:15] So I’m not talking about some big, huge affiliate structured program right now. We just need to bring in 50 K for you in the next six weeks. So literally. Send people emails or pick up the phone and be like, Hey, can we set up a time to have coffee? Literally do it. Old school grassroots reaching out to people.

    [00:26:32] It doesn’t have to be this big, huge affiliate launch with all this stuff. I don’t even care in this case if you have an affiliate software. If you have 10 affiliates and we set up how people register for your program correctly, We can track where, where people come from. You know, there’s other ways to track that.

    [00:26:51] So please don’t overthink the affiliate thing. Reach out to people that you know. Reach out to people that you might not know and you wanna know, and give them a percentage of sales for selling into your program. So number eight is affiliates. Number nine. I love this one. Number nine is outside of the box.

    [00:27:11] I should do a whole episode in this and we don’t talk about this enough. It’s building collaborative offers with friends. So you could, so that same affiliate person we’re talking about, what if the two of you guys get together and do like a short term, super special, Oh, what? And there’s another word we could think about for it.

    [00:27:32] Like super special, limited time, you know, behind the scenes access, exclusive blah, blah, blah thing that you do. And it’s not just your audience. You pick one amazing partner and the two of you together build a collaborative offer that you launch in the next six weeks. It’s only for this short period of time.

    [00:27:54] Like if you don’t buy it now, we’re never doing this again. And you build a collaborative offer with somebody else, you pool both of your audiences, you pool the collective genius of collaboration, and that is just a really, really great way that you can increase sales in a short period of time. And so let me kind of catch you up on what we’ve talked about so far.

    [00:28:16] We talked about number one is mentorship. Number two is VIP days. Number three is licensing quick sales. Four is opening an old program. Five is opening a vault of old programs. Six is planning a retreat and taking deposits. Seven is launching a new program, but you don’t have to actually launch it yet.

    [00:28:37] You’re just having deposits to hold the date of, you know, when it’s coming in the future. Seven, I don’t even know if I have my numbers, right? Uh, no. Eight is affiliates in actually having this affiliate sell your programs for you. I’m looking at my notes while I’m talking to you. Nine is building a collaborative offer with a friend.

    [00:28:57] And then the last one, I know it’s like super not sexy, but we have to be honest here. The last one is just cutting your costs. How many things have you invested in that you are not using that are shiny objects that you spend a ton of money on? How many different programs have you purchased? How many different subscriptions do you have?

    [00:29:18] You can probably cut a significant amount of costs on crap that you had just bought that you thought was. Important for you to buy at the time. Maybe it was maybe maybe it was a great purchase. Maybe you needed that. Extra whatever 10 K and software, you know, maybe you needed to join a different program.

    [00:29:41] Now, granted, do not ever default on a program. That’s a terrible thing to do. Don’t be that person. If you promise to pay for something, obviously we need to pay for what we promise to pay for whether or not you’re using it. We’re all adults here. That’s a choice that we make when we go into somebody else’s mentorship or business program, right?

    [00:29:57] So I’m not advocating for you to, you know, yeah. Be a bad person and not pay for things, but what have you paid for that? You’re still paying for that. Maybe you don’t need, do you have teams that are doing activities, but maybe you aren’t delegating well, maybe you need to put them on a little bit of a hiatus because maybe they aren’t doing that much work and it’s something that.

    [00:30:20] Um, you know, we want to, uh, save that and help increase sales so that you can pay them again. Whatever that looks like to you, but really when was the last time you looked at your operational costs? Um, I tried to do this. I have a money day on my calendar and honestly my money day is on my calendar every single month.

    [00:30:38] It’s the last Wednesday of every single month and it literally says money day and there’s a little bag of money emoji next to it. What the money day is is that’s my day. To say, okay, where are we with our finances? Did we reach our financial goals this month? What are we spending money on? Is that still a good use of our money?

    [00:30:56] And, you know, basically like, where are we at with our numbers? You can save thousands of dollars. I mean, frankly, even just going through the subscriptions on your, your Apple. Subscriptions that come through every single month and save literally hundreds of dollars might not be 50 grand, but how much are you paying for that?

    [00:31:17] You really shouldn’t be paying for. I think if we’re at this place where we’re having this conversation and we want you to increase and bring in 50, 000 in the next six weeks. We need to be really serious about what that looks like. And regardless of what you do, please look at the money you’re spending and where you’re bleeding out anyway.

    [00:31:37] That’s one of the first things that we want to do. And then go back and pick one or two. I’ll give you a pass that the saving money and cutting on subscriptions can be like a third one. Then pick two other ways that may work for you and your business. And the beautiful thing about this is it doesn’t have to be forever.

    [00:31:55] You know, this is only for a short period of time. And you may find that some, this strategy of, you know, selling a little bit in this period is selling a lot in this little short period of time is something that you actually love and it works really well for you and your audience. And you may totally love that.

    [00:32:12] You may find that, Hey, we’re going to, we’re going to do this type of a, a launch strategy here a couple of times a year, but right now I want to help you increase sales because you’re listening to this podcast because you seriously need to increase sales for some reason. And, uh, I want to help you do that.

    [00:32:27] And there’s my children calling me right now from their places of being, and because they always interrupt me in my podcast. So welcome to behind the scenes here of our life. If you guys don’t know me, if we’ve never met, um, you know, my husband and I own five companies. I travel seven months a year and I own two international consulting firms.

    [00:32:47] One of the things that’s very real here on the podcast is I have like dogs barking outside. And my kids are calling because they have an emergency breakthrough and their, their phone always rings to mine. It never goes silent. Um, so welcome to our world, but my commitment to you is that every single thing that you get here from us on this suite life entrepreneur podcast, and in our business coaching and services is totally designed to help you be more successful in what you have chosen to do at your contribution to the world, whether it’s to individuals or to businesses, that’s our commitment to you.

    [00:33:19] So I’m so glad that you’re here. Thank you for joining me. Please share this episode. I deny advertisers because I hate advertising listening to it on podcast episodes. So I refuse advertisers. So we totally rely on you sharing this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.

    [00:33:34] com. Simply click on the podcast. This is episode number 319. So you can search and find this episode, all the show notes, that bonus to get into the licensing training, the ultimate guide, everything we have there is designed to help you be successful. No strings attached. All right. Have a great day. Thanks for being here.

    [00:33:54] I’ll talk to you guys on the next episode.

     

     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively with April Beach (Episode 318)

    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively

    This episode is tailored specifically for you if you’re an established subject matter expert, coach, consultant, strategist, service provider, or if you’re deeply entrenched in the B2C model but feel the pull towards transitioning to B2B. April Beach, a seasoned business strategist with over 27 years of experience, guides you through this critical juncture in your career. This episode is crucial because it addresses a common yet challenging pivot point: shifting your business model while leveraging your expertise and maintaining a balanced life.
     
     
    April Beach delves into the intricacies of transitioning from a B2C to a B2B business model. You will learn about:
    • Recognizing when you’re ready for this shift and how to initiate the move.
    • Strategic questioning to align your future business goals with personal aspirations.
    • Techniques to repurpose your existing B2C offerings for a B2B audience, such as through licensing and embedded partnerships.
    • Exploring high-level strategic consulting for B2B, to understand and cater to the new audience’s needs.
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    This episode is a deep dive into how you can redefine your business model while keeping true to your expertise and creating a work-life harmony.
     
    1. Self-Reflection is Key: Understand the importance of your legacy and how you want to be known in your industry. This will influence how you transition and what parts of your business you carry forward.
    2. Designing Your Future Work-Life: Consider who your new clients will be in a B2B context and how this will change your work dynamics, from daily interactions to the nature of your engagements.
    3. Leveraging Existing Assets: Explore how your current B2C offerings can be transformed into B2B solutions, such as through licensing or partnerships, allowing for a smoother transition.
    4. Embracing Strategic Relationships: Engage in high-level consulting in your new B2B sphere to build relationships and gain clarity on what these clients need and value.
    5. Simplicity and Impact: Learn how transitioning to B2B can often simplify business processes and amplify your impact, potentially leading to more significant results with less direct effort.
     
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a clearer vision of how to navigate the shift from B2C to B2B, making strategic decisions that align with your long-term goals and lifestyle aspirations. Tune in to uncover insights and strategies that will empower your journey into a new realm of business.
     
     
    Resources: 
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    318

    [00:00:46] Hi guys. This is episode number 318 and together. Today, we are going to talk about that point in your business where you feel like it’s time to transition from a B2C audience to a B2B audience. So this episode is for you. If you are an established subject matter expert, consultant, strategist, service provider, or a coach, and you’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a really long time, you’re probably very, very good at it.

    [00:01:14] And you’re wondering. What is next? You might be feeling like you’re a little tired of continuing to consult or deliver the programs you’ve been delivering. And you’re just sitting here at this place in your business season and in your life where you’re thinking, guy, how do I actually transition? Out of this business model, what comes next, especially if you are a coach or a consultant and you are so immersed in that space, sometimes you aren’t even aware of what’s possible or even how to move into that next level.

    [00:01:45] And so in this episode, I’m going to unpack for you considerations to think about knowing when you’re ready for this and actually how to get started moving in that direction. If that is a direction that you feel like the timing is right, so if that is you, you are definitely in the right place. This is number 318, so episode number three 18, and I’m April Beach.

    [00:02:08] If we don’t know each other yet, I have been a business strategist and a consultant to people just like you for over 27 years, and here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. We deliver coaching and trainings and strategies for you to think about that are going to move the marker for your business.

    [00:02:24] And frankly, for your personal life as well, because you are probably like me and you know, that business and life should be designed in harmony, all of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about here can be found by visiting sweet life. co. Dot com, simply clicking on the podcast and it’s so great to meet you.

    [00:02:45] Thank you so much for tuning in. Let’s go ahead and dive into this week’s show. All right, so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Today I am talking to you. If you are an established coach or a consultant and you’ve been doing the work, you have been delivering the strategy, you have been leading the teams, you have been leading the students and the clients.

    [00:03:04] You are the product. It’s your genius. Even if you’ve put them into programs, systematize them, basically you are the one, you are the program, you are the product and your business is doing really well. You have delivered amazing results and you’ve helped other people or other companies get results in whatever your area of expertise is that that you consult or coach on.

    [00:03:28] Now, you then may reach a time in your business where you want the way you work to look different, but you might not know what that could be. Like what comes after the launches? What comes after the masterminds? What comes after the VIP days? What comes after I relaunched my new program and I have all my partners and my affiliates?

    [00:03:53] What else? Does your life look like in terms of your way of working? And so I’m really excited to record this episode because this is one of the primary areas that we help coaches and consultants transition from Is from that b2c over to a b2b business model and so I wanted to record this episode To help you think about what their transition could look like, and just to help open up the world of could come next for you to start understanding and to start considering your options.

    [00:04:23] So right before I recorded this episode, I actually had a phone call with a friend of mine and she’s been a very well established coach in her space for over a decade. She has her things she does. She has her programs that she launches and she’s just feeling She’s kind of done with that. She’s done always being the one delivering the coaching.

    [00:04:46] Now that doesn’t mean she doesn’t absolutely love it. It doesn’t mean it doesn’t fire her up every time she leaves a strategy session with a group of clients. She absolutely loves what she does. But here’s the difference. She’s ready for a different way of working. She’s ready to do more in her mind.

    [00:05:11] What she thinks is something next, something higher level, uh, more strategic. And she’s kind of done And I want to, I don’t want to say getting tired, but maybe you are getting tired with it. So this relates to you with her current way of working and she has made a lot of money. She’s a seven figure entrepreneur.

    [00:05:32] She’s made a lot of money and she’s just wondering what is next and. I have this conversation with our clients all the time. So I want to have this conversation with you. And that’s what we’re talking about here on the show. What is next? What does that next level of business look like for you? What could it look like for you?

    [00:05:52] And I, I’m going to unpack some suggestions here, or maybe not even suggestions because I can’t give you specific suggestions. We’re not actually in a personal conversation here, but I’m going to unpack some options based on what our clients do. And to help open up the doors for you just to be thinking about, but first, I want to start out with some very, very important strategic questions for you to ask yourself.

    [00:06:15] And this is the one thing I think that either stops you from moving forward, either not taking time to answer these questions, or it may direct you to move forward in the wrong way. So the reality is, is when you are to this point in your business and you are ready to build this next level business model, you want to be doing business different.

    [00:06:39] You want to be reaching more people. You want to be making more money, but you really don’t want to be working as much as you probably have in the past. So there are some important things. That we want to think about because this next level of business is very strategic and it needs to be right for you.

    [00:06:57] You’ve put in the time, you’ve put in the effort, you’ve put in the marketing, you’ve put in the content creation. So as we’re moving forward, I really want for you to make sure that this is going to be the right. Next level business design. And so here’s some strategic questions that I want you to think about.

    [00:07:16] And the answers to these questions are going to help you to identify what are those next level opportunities that you could walk into. Basically, what are you going to do next? What does this work life look like next? So the first thing I want you to ask yourself is how important is it to you That you are known for your area of expertise and the answer to that, there isn’t a right way.

    [00:07:43] There isn’t a wrong way. I was just coaching a group of clients in our licensing accelerator this morning about this same question, meaning that it is totally okay if you want to be known as the end all be all as a creator of these things that you have been doing in the past. That’s important. It’s important to identify that you want to be known for that in order to clearly build the next level of what you’re doing.

    [00:08:07] If you don’t need or want to be known for that, and you want to go in a different direction, that’s great for us to know as well. So, question number one is just for you to be thinking about, you know, what, how important is it to me that everything I’ve done in the past is well documented and it’s a legacy and I’m going to bring this with me into the next level.

    [00:08:28] We can still leave that there. All your footprint, all of what you’ve been known for, we can even continue to help that B2C side of your business continue to make money without you. But when we’re talking about this B2B transition or this next level business transition, basically how much of that is coming with you?

    [00:08:47] Does it just simply need to be repackaged in a different type of a way? Or do we leave that in an established business? And are we building maybe a next level brand or a next level business? It’s absolutely based on how you want your life to function five and 10 years from now. So question number one was, how important is it for you to be known for the work that you’ve done already?

    [00:09:09] Is it important for you to bring the awareness of your creation of that IP with you? Or are we building something totally separate? The answer to that will determine what you do with your established offers and how you move forward in your next level of business design. The next question I want you to think about is what do you want your cadence and your work to look like in five and seven and 10 years?

    [00:09:34] Basically, who do you want to be working with? Who do you want to be talking to? Do you want to be talking to these people on a daily basis, a weekly basis, a monthly basis? Do you want those conversations to happen in person? Do you want them to happen virtually? Where are you sitting when those conversations happen?

    [00:09:52] Are you on the beach at a resort in the Bahamas? Are you at home in your home office? Are you in a structured office space with a team? Ask yourself, what is going to light you up in the way that you work? This is all about the way that you want to work because the way that you want to work, we can build any business model around that, but it starts with identifying and giving yourself permission to think about.

    [00:10:22] How do you want to work? What is the way that you want to work? What do you want to be doing? Who do you want to be doing it with? Where do you want to be doing it? All of those things are very, very important for you processing this transition into a B to B side of your business. So again, what do you want to be known for?

    [00:10:42] What is the way that you want to work in the future? And that’s going to help you gain clarity in your business model. And don’t worry, I’m going to give you some tips and different things that our clients build out. As they move into this transition. But then the last thing I want you to be thinking about is, who now are your clients?

    [00:10:59] So let me just say that again. Who now are your clients? In the past, in a B to C side of the business model, your clients are the end users of your products. You have always sold to the one that is utilizing your tools and your trainings and your systems within their own business or their own life. So in the past, the audience, your audience was the actual end user.

    [00:11:25] Now as you move to B2B and consulting businesses in a different level, who is your audience? Is your audience the actual end user still? And if so, what does that business model look like? In fact, usually when we transition businesses out of B2C, you’re letting go of courses, trainings, workshops you’ve taught in the past, or at least we’re restructuring how they’re done without you involved.

    [00:11:56] And we’re moving you over to speak on more stages, write a book, consult at a different level. You are having a different audience for a different reason. You might be teaching your thought processes rather than your step by step SOP end result solutions. What part of what you want to be known for are you bringing in and actually teaching and delivering to that new B2B audience?

    [00:12:25] These are choices you get to make and as you go through and you give yourself permission and that’s the purpose of this episode and you can actually be thinking about, wow, you know, these thoughts that have already been, I already know this, by the way, if you are here and you’re thinking about transitioning to B2B, I already know that at least some of these thoughts have been floating around in your mind, probably with zero structure, just kind of popping into your mind and you have been already processing some of these.

    [00:12:51] And we already know that because you are smart, you are an established business. And so then therefore these are the smart next questions that you are automatically processing and thinking about. What are you going to sell? What are you going to do? Who are you going to do it for? Why is it going to be important to them?

    [00:13:07] So again, think about what does it actually look like and what are you wanting to deliver to that B2B audience? Because they’re no longer the actual, or they probably are no longer the actual end users of the, the training or the strategy or whatever it is you’re delivering, because then you’d still be in B2C, but instead we’re designing a next level business model for you.

    [00:13:33] And you’re going to be doing probably. Speaking on the same exact area of expertise, but how you’re going to do it, like how we’re delivering it is going to be different for different people for probably a different, higher level, higher in more strategic purpose. And so those are just some foundational strategies before I even give you some suggestions on how you can move forward in this and different things that you can create in a B2B business model.

    [00:14:06] I just want you to give yourself permission to process those. Many more conversations need to be had around those processing them here with me on the podcast. This is like. A little drop in the bucket. And here is why your strategy moving forward. We want to make sure it’s right. And I already alluded to that in the beginning of this.

    [00:14:24] We, if we’re building and we’re designing the next level of your business, we need to make sure we’re doing it strategically, right. Based on what you want, based on your future business goals and strategies. It’s very, very important. I don’t want you to have to be in a position where you’re rethinking this.

    [00:14:40] And where you might want to, you know, totally scratch it and start over again. Let’s do it right the first time because time is our most valuable asset that we have. And I hope to give you as much time freedom as possible with the strategies that we deliver here on the podcast. I know we do that for our clients at the Suite Life Company.

    [00:15:00] That’s what I want you to get out of this. So now let me give you some suggestions about different things that you can do. you can move into this B2B side of your business. So the first thing is, look at those offers that you’ve been selling B2C, those trainings, programs, even workshops that you’ve been doing on the B2C side.

    [00:15:26] Can you, or are you interested in still continuing to do them? Are you still going to keep that B2C side of your business? Frankly, most of our clients say yes. There is this tipping point. We have to tip the scales. So before we can move all the way into this next level of business model, there’s a transitionary period.

    [00:15:46] And so let’s say you’re like most of our clients. Yes. You’re going to be working through the B2C sides of your businesses, and you’re going to be continuing to profit on the B2C side of your businesses. And we can keep scaling that. That’s awesome. But then ask yourself, are there pieces of those trainings and programs that I can actually now, instead of delivering them myself directly, that I can actually allow other companies to deliver them.

    [00:16:12] That you can allow other companies to distribute them. So here is an example. If you have one sort of training or solution or workshop that you teach that you have sold, maybe you’ve done a launch around, whether it’s a PLF or running ads to it and webinars and whatever that is, can we actually allow for other companies to embed that into their current programs?

    [00:16:37] That is the easiest way, the smoothest and the most entry level way that we help our clients transition into that B2B business model by taking the current trainings and programs that you’re used to delivering yourself and allowing for other companies to deliver them within their programs. That is also a term that people throw around called like an embedded partnership.

    [00:16:59] Really the, the true term for that is called licensing. We talk about licensing a lot here on this podcast. It’s not just like a spit in a handshake. There are some parameters around that that need to be done correctly to protect your IP and to make sure that it’s a win win situation for everybody. But just talking about the model of it, do you want to take trainings that you are used to delivering yourself and now you can sell them and license them and release them to other companies to include in their programs?

    [00:17:30] Immediately, we can take you out of being the one to deliver them and we can benefit other businesses and their end users by allowing them to utilize and share your content. It’s a really powerful thing and it’s a very simple transition. So we’re taking the same product, but we’re just releasing it to a different audience.

    [00:17:55] We can take your same. Trainings and programs, but instead of you selling them to the end user, we sell them to the person who has access to all of the end users. Today in our profitable licensing accelerator, when I, when I was talking about this and I was helping our clients unpack what their CAD that we were going through their assets and all of the potential of all of the different trainings that they could put into these licensed embedded partnerships.

    [00:18:25] And we were going through these and, you know, one of the, one of my clients asked, they said, gosh, you know what, if I really was a comment, she said, I gosh, if, you know, if, if I realized that I could actually touch so many more people by selling it in this way to the person that already had access to my whole office audience, then by trying to find my audience myself, I would have done this years ago.

    [00:18:49] So it’s not only a great business model for when you are ready to phase out of that B to C in actually doing the work, it is a very smart, profitable business model because by doing this, you can actually reach more people with your work with actually less work for you. So that’s the first thing. That’s one of the primary areas that we work with.

    [00:19:12] Our clients on at the Suite Life company is creating those sort of partnerships and licensing their content. But there is another area that I want to share with you that maybe if you aren’t ready for that and you’re just kind of tipping the scales or playing with the B to B to B to C side of business and you’re not really sure how to go through this transition, then I want to let you know that you can actually go back to some high level strategic consulting for B2B.

    [00:19:40] So if you’re trying to figure it, you’re not really sure what you want to do yet. You’re not really sure how you want to spend your time. You can very simply start doing some consulting with what would be your new audience and you literally win. Build relationships with them, you pour into them, you take your expertise and what you’ve been doing for years and you start building trusted relationships with that new audience, whether it is going in and meeting with them one on one or meeting with them virtually or providing insight in the purpose of this is to Twofold number one is to build trusted relationships.

    [00:20:18] Like I said, with that new audience, but number two, it helps you to gain confidence and it helps you to get clarity on the different types of programs that you may want to start creating on a B to B business level. So when you’re looking to actually transition and stop selling directly to your end user, but serve other businesses who then serve your end user, they have different needs and you probably have amazing solutions to their different needs that are only a few degrees away from your actual assets and your products.

    [00:20:52] I want to encourage you that. Moving into those relationships and just having conversations with these companies is also a really great way to gain clarity on what you’re going to be happy doing in the next level. And frankly, what this new audience might need and want from you, you’ll find it as you move into this B2C space, that’s, it’s actually really, really simple.

    [00:21:16] Whereas in B2C we have complicated funnels, even the guy that emails me all the time in my inbox saying, get rid of the complicated funnels, buy my short funnel, whatever it is, right? It’s still a funnel. It’s still a marketing strategy. When you move into B2B in a way that you’re flowing in your zone of genius, you’re in flow state, you’re utilizing the assets and the resources that you have absolutely already created.

    [00:21:42] You have developed results for other people. And you’re moving forward in a way that is a different type of relationship to work with and partner with these other businesses in a way that helps their end users and makes both of your companies more money, then that is going to be the right direction for you as long as it aligns with your zone of genius, it opens up your time in your life the way that you want it.

    [00:22:05] And you’re literally building a different cadence of work, how you work, the re the assets you release is different. So you can start just by taking the current programs you you’re selling B2C and now allowing other businesses to sell them. Or you can can start by meeting with and networking, consulting those other businesses first, and then creating new level packages and programs that are appropriate for them.

    [00:22:29] When you do this. What all of our clients have found is that opens up a massive amount of time for them to fill in other passion projects. And let me just end with a story. This is A mind blowing story and I can’t say that i’ve ever been able to share this case study Because I have literally never had a client come to me and tell me these results before so i’ll end this podcast with this Last friday.

    [00:22:57] I had a conversation with a client named cheryl And we helped her move from teaching workshops into licensing and it was, she was very successful at it because she has amazing programs. And so when you have a great program, it’s easy to move from B to C and to be into B to B. But she literally said to me on the, on the phone call, she’s like, It, I can’t believe how easy this is to sell and I have so much time on my hands in such a short period of time.

    [00:23:28] So fast. I have so much time on my hands that I’m just not really sure what to do with it. I have never ever in 27 years of business coaching had a client call me to tell me I’m making so much money and I have so much time. I’m not exactly sure what to do. So I tell you that story because frankly, I mean, to be really honest, it blew my mind to have somebody call and tell me that.

    [00:23:51] It’s an incredible case study. It’s definitely not the norm. Not everybody gets into this business model and all of a sudden, three months later has so much money in time that they just are at a loss for what to do. Um, so I’m glad it worked. It has worked out that way. Certainly not the, not the average result.

    [00:24:10] It does take more time to transition into this B2B business model for the rest, the rather 99 percent of our clients. And I, but I just want to share with you that when it’s right, when you give yourself permission to figure out what you want that to look like, when designing this next level of your business is done intentionally.

    [00:24:32] And you have the ability to work through the strategy. It actually is that simple might not happen that fast, but it is that simple because this next level of business that we’re sitting here talking about in this podcast episode is your next level of life. It’s your next season of life. And you’re here listening to this episode because you need it to be simple.

    [00:24:54] Because you want it to be simple because you’re tired of the complicated this in the constant working in the constant coaching and the constant doing in the constant hands in the mess. And so I want you to ask yourself, what does that simple look like to me? What do I want to be doing with my time?

    [00:25:12] What do I want to be doing with my work cadence? What do I want my profit to look like in the next 357 to 10 years? Thanks. And that is what I wanted to talk to you about on this show. How do you actually transition out of that B2C into the B2B? And I want to make sure you know that these are the things that I want you to be thinking about as you move into those decisions.

    [00:25:38] Because these strategic decisions, first of all, you have earned the opportunity to be here to be having this conversation. You would not still be here 23, four or five minutes later into this podcast listening to me if you didn’t know you were ready for this. So congratulations. for being to a point in your business of doing great work where you get to be thinking about this for yourself.

    [00:26:00] I’m really, really excited for you. And I can tell you this next level of business will open up so much time for you as long as you do it right. And as long as you give yourself permission to think about what you want it to look like, because as I always say, the We can build any business model to achieve any time and lifestyle goal that you want, but it starts with you deciding what you want.

    [00:26:25] All right. Well, that is a wrap. I hope that you found this show, this particular episode beneficial. Certainly if you need help strategizing your B2C over to B2B transition, you’re wondering what to build, what programs to sell, how to move into B2B, we would love to support you in doing that. You can visit us at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:26:46] com. You can also find me on LinkedIn at SweetLifeCo. April beach. And I’m happy to answer any questions for you. All of the show notes, the transcription for this and all of the resources and assets we have available to you can be also found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. We appreciate you being here, listening to this show, and I will talk to you guys next week.

    [00:27:06] Thanks so much.

     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course with April Beach (Episode 317)

    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course

    Bonus: 
     
    Who This Show is For and Why It’s Important
    You’re in the perfect spot if you’re a subject matter expert, coach, consultant, speaker, author, or leader contemplating or already developing a Train the Trainer program. Whether you’re looking to license your content to other companies or elevate your existing certification program, this episode is a goldmine for you. April Beach, the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company, brings her expertise directly to your journey of expanding the reach and impact of your work. With a focus on strategic content structuring, this episode is not just about creating a program but ensuring it is profitable and impactful.
     
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
    In this episode, April Beach delves deep into the intricacies of building an effective Train the Trainer program. You’ll learn how to structure your content strategically to facilitate success for other trainers. This includes providing the necessary materials, such as outlines, speaking topics, benchmarks, training agendas, and the core content like PDFs, slides, and workbooks. More importantly, you will understand how to infuse your unique thinking and genius into these materials, elevating the trainers to deliver the content as effectively as you would.
     
    April doesn’t stop at just content delivery; she also explores the importance of communication skills, the creation of a learning roadmap, user management, and internal marketing techniques. These insights will help trainers not only present the material effectively but also engage and inspire their audience, leading to a more impactful learning experience.
     
    Key Takeaways
    1. Content Foundation: Understand how to break down your program into manageable parts, focusing on both the core materials and the high-level strategic thinking behind each segment.
    2. Communication and Facilitation Skills: Equip your trainers with the necessary skills to handle sensitive topics and foster engaging, productive discussions.
    3. Visual Learning Roadmaps: Create visual aids to help trainers and learners track progress and understand the journey through the program.
    4. User Management Strategies: Learn to manage and track attendees effectively, ensuring a streamlined and accountable learning experience.
    5. Internal Marketing for Buy-In: Develop materials to help trainers advocate for your program, ensuring engagement and enthusiasm from participants, particularly in scenarios where they don’t have a choice in their participation.
    This episode is more than just a guide; it’s an empowerment tool for you to elevate your program, making a profound impact while freeing you up to pursue your passions. Tune in to transform your Train the Trainer program into a dynamic, effective, and profitable venture.
     
     
    Resources: 
    Join our elite business consulting programs for support building your Train the Trainer program, licensing courses, or creating a certification https://www.sweetlifeco.com/amplifyphase
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    317

    April Beach (00:01.258)
    Hey there, this is episode number 317. And in this show, we are breaking down how to actually structure the content for a Train the Trainer program. So if you’re a coach or a consultant, you are a subject matter expert or service provider, and you are building an actual Train the Trainer program, you’re wondering what actually goes into that, what are some of the things that I could think about? We are gonna break all of that down for you in this particular podcast episode.
     
    My name is April Beach, if you and I don’t know each other yet. And I am the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company and host here on the show for the last seven years. Thank you so much for listening to this show. We’re super glad that you’re here and we are known for delivering business trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. If you are in a place where you are building your certification program or a train the trainer program.
     
    or if you’re ready to start licensing your content, your trainings, your courses, and your curriculum to other companies, you are in the right place. Visit us at SuiteLifeCo.com and you can apply for our Amplify licensing accelerator, or you can immediately get into our entry-level but powerful licensing launch pad training by visiting lice
     
    April Beach (01:20.55)
    In that training, I even break down for you exactly what the top 10 industries are looking for when they are out there hunting down programs just like yours to bring into their organization. So in this show, we’re talking about how to actually build the components and just different ways that I recommend you think about strategically delivering your content in the train, the trainer capacity.
     
    If you have any questions about this show, when it drops live, I will be off grid surfing for 10 days in Costa Rica, but you can always email my team at hello at sweetlifeco.com. If you find yourself in an urgent situation with a licensing opportunity, or if you would like to learn more about our upcoming 30 day licensing accelerator, it’s kicking off in March. I am so excited about it. It’s a first ever thing.
     
    then visit us at sweetlifeco.com and we will save you a seat in there. So for this particular show, as promised, you are gonna walk away understanding some of the different assets that you can deliver in a Train the Trainer program and the pros and the cons of each. We’re gonna unpack this for you. I’m gonna do a 360 degree view of all of the different.
     
    Content that you may want to deliver in a train the trainer program and also some of the reasons and considerations for each one Now your program is going to be completely unique here on the podcast I’m not able to hear what you have to say and actually personally pour into you like I am able with our clients So this is going to be a little bit more of a strategic high-level overview, but
     
    I know it will be powerful. I get questions about this all the time. And so stick with us here and we’re gonna dive in and I’m gonna share with you all of the nuances of how to build a Train the Trainer program successfully. That’s gonna be profitable for you and valuable for the people you’re delivering it to. All right, here we go.
     
     
    April Beach (00:01.142)
    All right, so congratulations, first of all, because you have a program that is so great, now you’re leveling up to the next stop and you are bringing other professionals in to understand how to deliver your unique intellectual property, your unique content, your program. And so we need to create a way to help others facilitate your work. And we do that by creating what can be considered as a train the trainer program. Now, depending on what you’re specifically working on,
     
    What we’re talking about today is not gonna fit into a perfect box probably for you, but I want you to walk away with really good considerations of how you can package up that Train the Trainer program and what actually makes sense to include for you based on the relationship that you have with the trainers. Now, if you have a huge organization you’re working with and they have elected a few people to become trained on your materials,
     
    because perhaps we are licensing your training into that organization, or maybe you’re just bringing it in as a workshop, then you aren’t gonna actually be able to pick who those people are. So if you’re in a position where you don’t get to pick who the trainers are, that really helps us to understand what more are we gonna wanna give to this individual or this group of individuals in a way that’s gonna make you feel really, really good about these people being the projectors and the facilitators of expanding the reach of your work.
     
    Or if you’re in a place where you can choose who will be the facilitators of your material, then that is awesome as well. So let’s go ahead and start with foundationally, what do you need to deliver to these people to set them up for success? The first is the actual content itself, okay? This isn’t rocket science, but you need to deliver the actual materials of your content.
     
    whether it is a program or a course or a curriculum or a step-by-step process or a workshop that they need to facilitate the delivery of, you need to give them the materials that they need. So think about how you created this training yourself when you were delivering this B2C. When you first started delivering this on your own, which is how most of you guys started in this place, which is great,
     
    April Beach (02:19.566)
    because we hashed out all the issues and now we know we can really level it up, right? And it’s ready to go. How did you deliver that? You had slides. You probably had an outline of the training. And so first of all, identify what did I need when I was teaching this directly myself? And then the next step to the foundational materials is, what is somebody else going to need to be able to deliver this well? And here are examples of some of what we recommend our clients.
     
    building when we’re building a train their trainer program. So the first one is an actual outline in speaking topics for every single benchmark in the program. Of course, you’re gonna ask now, what is a benchmark? A benchmark is a word that I use to define a different section or part of the program. It may not be a module. A benchmark could be a section of time in a whole workshop.
     
    A benchmark is a focused area of work that is being taught on that is usually delivered as somebody else would consider it could be a module or it could be a training topic. So those are your benchmarks. So for every single benchmark, you need to outline the agenda for that benchmark. You also need to make sure the trainer fully understands the ideal outcome. Like what is the goal that we’re going for here within this benchmark? What is the
     
    end result of understanding that we want people to have, not within the whole program, within this benchmark. So step number one is not only outlining the content, saying here’s an outline of the content, I mean, that’s pretty basic, shoot, chat GPT can do that for you, but what isn’t basic, what is your uniqueness, what makes your program powerful is the way you think, it’s who you are, it’s where the content came from, which is your own genius.
     
    And so you need to think about infusing, how are you gonna level up that trainer to be able to understand your way of thinking to the best way possible? And so I want you to think about unpacking for them parts of things that they could be thinking about within each benchmark of your program. And as in what needs to be the end result goal of this particular benchmark. And so you’re gonna have a collection.
     
    April Beach (04:32.386)
    of actual thought processes that you want these trainers to be thinking about. Now I know that may seem like a ton of work and this might not be the right thing for you. It’s not necessarily the right thing for everybody. You don’t have to go to all of this work, but depending on the content of what you teach, depending on how in depth your material is, and depending on how important mindset and psychology is, which frankly it is to a lot of.
     
    even the basic business strategies out there, that’s certainly something for you to consider. Also, of course, the basics, workbooks, slides, training materials, outlines, agendas, and you can even have what we call teacher guide. In our programs, when we deliver our classes to other coaches to deliver, our coaches get a trainer guide. And a trainer guide is a breakout of every single slide and questions and things that they can bring up for every single slide.
     
    So the trainer and the actual person delivering it can actually facilitate it as if it was their own. And so we’re really leveling up that trainer to look like this just incredible, amazing badass, basically. So that’s the depth that we go. Those are just some things for you to consider. So part one is the actual content itself. Of course, you’re gonna wanna deliver the basic content, the PDFs, the slides, the workbooks, the worksheets, right? You need to give them all the materials in order to facilitate the program.
     
    Then that gold standard, where I really encourage all of our clients that we work with, we always ask, what can we do more? How can we serve more? How can we equip more? It doesn’t always mean more content. It just may be more strategic thinking. And those are those other key benchmarks and considerations within the content of the program. So that’s part one. We’ll call that the core content. But then there are other things that are important.
     
    to take into consideration that you may want to include in a train the trainer program. And in this episode today, we are not gonna be able to get into the model of how you deliver your train the trainer program, you know, meetings, face to face, Zoom groups, benchmarks, all of those things we work with our clients, and we help our clients strategize all those. We would love for you to apply to become a client, visit sweetlifeco.com, and we’ll have a conversation about if that’s a right step for you.
     
    April Beach (06:56.438)
    But I want to talk about the content itself and some things that you may not be thinking of. And here’s the reason why. Sometimes we have been doing what we’ve been doing for a really long time, and we kind of take for granted the things we already know, or things that may just be obvious to us in our own communication strengths and skills. It’s not always the case. And so in your Train the Trainer program, here are just some examples of other things that…
     
    you may want to consider adding in. The first one are communication tips. Like how to be a thoughtful teacher or how to be a good listener or some communication 101. You could even bring a communication expert in to work with the people that you’re certifying if communication isn’t your particular area of expertise. But how do you actually help them be a better teacher, a better listener, a better leader, a better facilitator? How?
     
    If based on your content, are they going to maybe experience some communication issues? So is your content something that could bring up some touchy topics within a workspace or deal with some topics that are not really well communicated within a work, you know, within a group of people? If that’s the case, don’t throw them to the wolves.
     
    equip them and think of what you can do to help these trainers really facilitate these tough conversations based on your work. So those are some other things to be thinking about. Some other tactical things that I want you to think about is what about a roadmap? Can you give your trainers a success mark benchmark roadmap? And this is something it’s a quick visual, it’s a graphic where you can say, hey listen,
     
    for people that you’re taking through, here is what they should be learning. It’s a learning roadmap for their end users to help the trainers themselves know that they’re on the right track facilitating the material. So visual things, everybody learns different. I’m a big visual person, so I really love those maps. My clients laugh because I’m always making them maps. And half of them.
     
    April Beach (09:06.722)
    think they’re great and the other half are really nitty gritty thinkers and they want me to write it out in a project plan. But whatever that is, right? So think about how the people that you’re working with think and learn and alter your materials to equip them based on who they are and based on your materials. And then a couple of two other tips for you. I want to make sure that you have here today. The first one is
     
    User management. This is like a tech side of it. Make sure that you are equipping them to understand how to manage the attendees. So is it a software that they need to have? Is it understanding how to track attendees? How to provide that accountability to the end user is a really big deal, especially when you aren’t gonna be there to actually handhold, which is the beauty. That’s why we love to train the trainer programs from your material, because we get to free you up so you can…
     
    Go surfing with me for 10 days in Costa Rica with a bunch of girls, right? Like that’s the lifestyle that we want, right? Or whatever that looks like for you. But we have to make sure we’re thinking about these things. The better you can do equipping, that the trainers that are delivering your materials.
     
    the more surf trips you can go on with me, right? So those are the things I want you to be thinking about. What are the questions that may come up in that? So accountability, keeping people on track, facilitating software, and then the last tip I wanna give you is content for internal marketing. Now hear me out, again, every single one of these tips is an entire podcast episode on its own, but hear me out. Your trainers are not you, and they don’t understand
     
    everything frankly that you want them to understand and own with the material in your program. And so in the process of being a facilitator of your program, they’re going to need to explain how important your program is to the end users, especially if the program is being instituted in an organization where the end users don’t have buy-in choice. So let me say that again, if your program is being brought in, I’ll say it in layman’s terms, if your program is being brought in,
     
    April Beach (11:20.342)
    by an organization where the employees that are taking it don’t get to choose whether or not they’re taking it, then we need everybody to love it. We want them bought in because we know when they’re bought in that they’re gonna get better results with your materials. How do we equip the trainer to communicate to the end user in why this program is so rad, why it’s amazing, why this material is so good, why it’s gonna make their life better or their work better or their processes better or save them time or, you know.
     
    whatever it is that your program does. And so you wanna equip the trainer with internal marketing materials. And that could look like swipe copy that they take, just like when we’re building affiliate programs to get affiliates to help you launch your training or your course on the B2C side. We do the same thing on the B2C side, on the B2B side, but we’re gonna equip the trainers with internal marketing for them to best communicate with the people who are taking it to get the buy-in that.
     
    everybody needs because in the end when we release a train the trainer program where everybody has buy-in and the end users freaking love it then you have renewals you have word of mouth referrals your work expands because we have now sold it into more and more and more and more and more organizations increased your profit bought you more time increased the reach of your work so that you can make a greater impact and it’s not all sitting on your shoulders all on your own
     
    Creating the Train the Trainer program is a huge game changer.
     
    April Beach (12:54.894)
    And my dogs are barking. So that is the end of this podcast episode. And I could ramble on this forever, actually. But the reality is, is that doing this type of level, moving into B2B from B2C is an absolute game changer for you and your business. As long as we do our due diligence, as long as we do our due diligence and package up and price and release your materials correctly. And this episode…
     
    is an initiation to help you build your Train the Trainer program. And if you can just do one thing, at least take one takeaway and look at what you’re building and apply that to it, we’re gonna level up your program automatically. And if you weren’t even sure if a Train the Trainer program is right for you, or what’s the difference between a Train the Trainer and a certification and licensing your course and releasing it to all these other companies, if you weren’t even sure what the options are available to you, but this podcast episode just…
     
    spiked your interest, you’re absolutely in the right place. And everything we do here as a company is helping experts build your million dollar offer ecosystems and level you up, increase your profit and expand the reach of your work through building programs like Train the Trainer and licensing programs. And basically taking the work that you’ve already done and helping you expand your reach and make more money off it. And so if you would like to work with us to do that, definitely consider tapping into our licensing accelerator.
     
    or just our beginning licensing training called Licensing Launchpad, both of them can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And all the show notes, everything we talked about here is going to be able to be found on our website as well, sweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 317. And if you haven’t yet…
     
    Subscribe to our YouTube channel as well because we have so many videos and trainings and the video of this podcast episode will actually be over on our YouTube channel. If you wanna hang out with me visually, leave a comment. I love hanging out with people there and building relationships with you over on our YouTube channel as well. Okay, all right, you guys have an incredible night and I will talk to you on the next show. Take this, apply it, and level up your business.
     
     
     
     
     
     

     

     

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing with April Beach (Episode 316)

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing

     

    Who This Show is for and Why It’s Important
    This episode is a must-listen for coaches, consultants, and content creators eager to explore the lucrative world of licensing. April Beach delves into the specialized area of licensing intellectual property, particularly focusing on content, trainings, systems, and courses. This topic is crucial as it unlocks new revenue streams and allows for the expansion of business reach and impact.
     
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
     
    April Beach guides you through the practical steps of pricing your curriculum for licensing. You’ll learn the importance of understanding your operational costs, including software, team expenses, and the logistics of content distribution. The discussion goes further into calculating the Return on Investment (ROI) of your content, emphasizing both tangible training benefits and lifestyle improvements. April introduces two main pricing strategies: bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing, explaining how these can be applied based on the specific needs and outcomes of potential licensees.
     
    Key Takeaways
    1. Understand Operational Costs: Know the expenses associated with licensing your content, like software and team support.
    2. Calculate the ROI: Assess both the tangible and lifestyle impacts of your content.
    3. Pricing Strategies: Learn two methods – bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing.
    4. Customized Approach: Tailor the pricing based on the licensee’s specific situation and outcomes.
    5. Value Communication: Communicate the measurable value and transformation your content brings to the licensee.
     
    After listening to this episode, you’ll be equipped with insights and strategies to confidently price and license your intellectual property, enhancing both your business growth and the value you deliver to your clients.
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    316

     

    [00:00:46] Hi there and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 316 and we are diving into a topic today that I know that many of you have had on your mind. You actually hunt us down for the answer to this question. So the question that we’re answering today is how do you actually price your training or your program or your curriculum or your content to license it To other companies, what do you charge for that?

    [00:01:13] Where does it even start? And in this episode, I’m going to introduce you to the strategy of pricing. You are here because you’re probably a coach or a consultant or a subject matter expert, and you’re certainly in the right place. As you know, my name is April Beach and me and my team work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to help you license your material and give you all the steps.

    [00:01:37] Even down to the pricing calculators of releasing your content, expanding your reach and increasing your profit through licensing. And so you’re here because you’re good at what you do. Let’s just frankly talk about that first. The fact that you are even in a place where your work. Has made a significant impact on a B2C side, whether it’s in programs that you’ve delivered directly or workshops or consulting you’ve already done.

    [00:02:04] And now you want to release it into the hands of other companies and possibly even other companies are coming to you asking you for your content. So congratulations on being absolutely top notch at what you do and having proven systems, methodologies that other people want, and frankly, not everybody is there.

    [00:02:26] So licensing is an advanced move. You can tap into all of our resources we have here for you. And if you haven’t yet, the best place for you to start and to get more information so that you can license your program successfully Is by visiting licensing launchpad. com. It’s a short little mini masterclass.

    [00:02:47] You can go over there and I’m going to unpack for you how to get started with licensing, even what the top 10 industries are looking for. It’s a great starter place for you. If you are ready to go in licensing. You can always shoot us a message by visiting suite life coat. com, and we will partner with you and help you to be successful at that.

    [00:03:06] So this episode, number 316, we are answering the question of how, how do you even prices? And I’m going to actually break out the steps and the questions that you need to answer before you are able to. Price your licensing offer and training, and then I’m actually going to break out the two different ways to actually price your program so you can consider which one is best for you.

    [00:03:28] So if that’s what you’re looking for, stick with me here. We’re going to dive into all the things here in this episode. Okay, a little bit of a foundation. Uh, if you have never heard about licensing before, please go back into our podcast resources, and I have many trainings. You can even visit our YouTube channel, where I have trainings about licensing, how to get started with licensing, what is licensing, and we have so many resources available to you.

    [00:03:53] But let’s talk about what is the definition of licensing. You’re probably actually familiar with licensing. Licensing songs, licensing art, licensing. Images for your marketing, uh, licensing brands. So for example, let’s talk about the, the biggest brand that everybody knows, Mickey Mouse, right? So your child may have a Mickey Mouse backpack that Jansport licensed permission to put Mickey Mouse on a Jansport backpack, but who owns Mickey Mouse?

    [00:04:21] Disney Corporation, right? That is an example of licensing. By the way, that is not the type of licensing coach I am. That is not why you’re here. I know that. We’re talking about something different. We’re talking about a secret scale strategy through licensing, and this secret is why people come and seek us out, and why businesses are All over the world work with us to learn, to license their materials.

    [00:04:45] And that is licensing your content, licensing, your trainings, licensing, your system, your thought process, your framework, your courses. That’s the kind of licensing you and I are talking about here. And I can’t wait to dive into this with you and at least start to skim the surface of this first. burning question that I already know that you want to know the answer to immediately.

    [00:05:10] So in order to answer the question of how do you actually price your curriculum for licensing, first, there are some things, some very important things that you need to know. And some of these are common sense, let’s just be honest, but my job is to make sure that I’m filling in all the holes for you so you don’t do this wrong in the most I can do here for you on this free podcast, obviously giving away free information and, uh, it’s, it’s very valuable what we’re talking about here today.

    [00:05:42] So the first thing is you need to be able to identify your operational costs for licensing this. This is back to a lot of business 101. But frankly, you would be shocked at how many coaches and consultants out there don’t know their numbers. So the first thing you need to do is you need to understand your operational overhead of how much it’s gonna cost you in hard costs.

    [00:06:10] We’re not talking about your sweat equity here. Yeah, we’re talking hard cost of how much money your company is going to have to spend to maintain the release of your content into licensing. And here are some different areas that can control your costs. So where, first of all, is the training content going to live?

    [00:06:35] Does that training content live in your LMS or is that when you release your content to another company or another entrepreneur, you know, whatever that is? Who houses the content? There are hard costs with software. They’re hard operational costs with that. You need to know your company costs. Another example of this is is teams.

    [00:06:56] So are you’re in part of the release of your content to another organization or corporation or even another entrepreneur, whoever you plan to release your content to, which is Totally a different strategy. We can’t even get into today. The question is, is how much time is it going to take you and your team to actually facilitate that release?

    [00:07:19] Well, And will you or your team be required to provide ongoing operational support? So those are two really two of quite a few different numbers, but those are two really hard numbers that you can’t change. And if you’re trying to price your program for licensing and you don’t know those numbers, the very first thing you should be doing is going back to the organization or the potential licensee that you’re talking to and Getting the answers to those questions.

    [00:07:51] Where does the content live? Who is managing the, the, the it and the customer service and the onboarding of this, you need to know the expectations of you and your team so that you can understand the hard numbers. We aren’t even talking about profit. We aren’t even talking about the value of the actual program yet.

    [00:08:10] Step number one, there are some hardcore numbers that you need to know and before you can price any sort of licensing program for release, you need to know them. Other factors that will come into your pricing are legal costs and making sure that you have a correct licensing contract. By the way, we give all of our clients our licensing contracts template and we help our clients to actually customize that and then they can take it over to an attorney for legal advice.

    [00:08:35] So those are some shortcuts that our company can provide to you. But they’re very important costs, and you don’t ever want to cut legal corners in the process of licensing your intellectual property. So just make sure that you know what your costs are and that you can anticipate those costs before you give an organization a price for your program.

    [00:08:57] Now, there are other factors, and I want to break these apart for you. So what is the ROI of what you deliver? First of all, there’s two Basic forms of ROI that your content can deliver and that your content can deliver both. First of all, your content can deliver an actual tangible training benefit of some kind.

    [00:09:21] So you’re up leveling a skill, you’re up leveling, uh, the way, the way. People do things, you’re teaching a method or a process or you’re giving a system. You’re actually leveling up information. You’re feeding people or you’re feeding a company, a wonderful, amazing systems and processes that level up their knowledge, their implementation, their information, their content, their training, their skills.

    [00:09:44] That’s one side. And then, and I’m going to do a whole nother podcast for you guys on this. Cause I get questions about this all the time. The other side is your program can. also benefit lifestyle. So your program may have a training benefit, generally speaking, or it may also have a lifestyle benefit.

    [00:10:01] This is really important to understand. One technically is not more valuable than the other. So if you, for example, have a program that teaches people how to increase sales, teaches sales teams in an organization, the exact thing to say, and it gives a sales process. That fits in an actual skill upgrade.

    [00:10:23] If your program is helping to increase wellness and mindfulness and lifestyle, that is a lifestyle benefit in both are as important, but you need to do the work and find out the ROI. Every single thing has a number. Okay, not talking about sales numbers. Every single solution has a correlated number that it can relate to that affects the bottom line of every single company or the bottom line of every single individual.

    [00:11:01] It and when I’m talking about bottom line, it’s not always dollars in increase in bottom line could be more time. It could be, uh, saving frustration. It could be helping parents communicate with teenagers. It could be preparing for a baby, or it could be equity, diversity and inclusion and understanding how to level up an organization with your training.

    [00:11:23] You know, there’s so many different parts of what you do, and it benefits in two different categories, either a training category or a lifestyle benefit category. Pretty generalized here just for the sake of this podcast. But step number one, know your operational expenses. Step number two, be able, you have to be able to articulate the ROI that your program actually delivers.

    [00:11:44] And you need to find the numbers, the percentages, the statistics out there that relate to the solution you provide. And then step number three is to actually price the program itself. And I told you that I would give you our two main pricing formulas here on this show. And here is my promise delivered.

    [00:12:01] There are two ways to price your program for licensing. Number one is bulk pricing, and number two is what we call Amplify ROI pricing. And that one particularly is named after our Amplify licensing accelerator and program. Now, let me explain to you the difference of these. Bulk pricing is pretty general, exactly what you’re thinking.

    [00:12:25] You are going to reduce the cost based on the number of seats in a program. So if you are selling at retail, let’s say your program’s 1, 000 retail per person. If an organization wants to buy 1, 000 seats to 1, 000 a program, how much are you willing to reduce that cost for that organization without undervaluing the transformation that you deliver?

    [00:12:48] So bulk pricing. Pretty straightforward. You know, I don’t ever want you guys winging anything with pricing because there are many other things that come into a factor with pricing. But for the sake of this podcast, most of you guys are probably thinking, Oh, well, do I just bolt price it? Those are, those are the questions I get when we connect with new businesses.

    [00:13:08] Uh, it’s usually, do I bolt price it? And the answer is yes, you can absolutely do that. They’re. Tons of other factors, including value and operational expenses and ROI. And are you collecting royalties? Uh, and all the other things that you could add into that, like your consulting time and workshops you may teach, or maybe you’re doing a keynote.

    [00:13:29] There are so many other things that factor in that, but pricing structure, number one is bulk pricing. We do have a bulk pricing calculator that we give to all of our clients. If that’s something that you would like to access. And then the other side of it, this one is a bit more complicated. It’s actually my favorite, and the reason why it’s my favorite is because when you present this pricing structure to a potential licensee for your program, there’s nothing that they can ever say to you to say, this price is wrong or this price is too much.

    [00:14:03] There’s nothing that they’re ever going to be able to do based on how we use this Amplify ROI pricing calculator. And here is what it is at a high level. You price your program based on the ROI. Whether, remember a minute ago we talked about whether it’s a training ROI or a lifestyle ROI, and it doesn’t necessarily always equal hard numbers, you price your program based on the ROI that you reasonably believe that your program can deliver.

    [00:14:39] And the coolest part about this, you guys, it’s, I’m going to geek out on numbers now, which this is the only area of business that I actually geek out on numbers. Let’s be real. Um, and, uh, you know, not a huge numbers fan here until it comes to something like licensing and pricing and, and profit. But the reason why this is so cool is because you can actually customize the ROI based on every single company’s specific use case.

    [00:15:11] So you can say this number of, you have this number of people in your organization that are affected by this problem. And based on your organization’s numbers, very specifically, we are going to charge you this because we reasonably believe we can create change for your organization based on your Own numbers in what’s so cool about this amplify pricing calculator in when you just generally speaking, when you are able to articulate what your program delivers and then be able to say, and here you go, this is your organization, or this is your small business, or this is your corporation, or this is your university.

    [00:16:00] And here, here’s what is being affected in your sphere and with based on your numbers, you literally take the potential licensees own numbers, whether it’s numbers based on people or numbers based on the statistics or numbers based on sales or numbers based on attrition, whatever that is that that organization is struggling with and the, your program obviously affects and solves and we can literally take the organization’s own numbers and show them back to them.

    [00:16:29] And it’s such a cool thing in being able to have the power to sit across the virtual, which is really what it is now table from an organization and saying, I see where you guys are struggling here. I want to be able to partner with you. I want to bring this solution that we know is proven. We know it’s transformational, which we have to know that little little prerequisite here.

    [00:16:51] If your program and your content isn’t transformational yet, we need to level that up. And sit across from them and say, here you go. Based on your numbers. This is what we have and we want to create this change for you. And we want to, we want to help you do this. That is the Amplify ROI pricing formula.

    [00:17:11] And so let’s kind of recap what we talked about here today. We talked about how to price your program for licensing. No joke. You guys, this is the number one thing that I get people reaching out to me on LinkedIn and Instagram and sending us messages saying, I’ve been approached by a company and they, you know, I need you to help me price this very, very fast.

    [00:17:32] Within our own client private ecosystem, we do help with those type of emergency wonderful opportunities. But here on the podcast, let’s be real. I can’t I can’t give you the exact answers to that. And I would be doing you a disservice if I did. I haven’t even heard your voice yet. So I’m giving you as much as I can to really equip you to move in the right direction to start thinking strategically about licensing so that You don’t shoot yourself in the foot so that you don’t undersell yourself.

    [00:18:00] Um, and let me tell you a quick case study of a client of ours because I want you to feel this way as well. She came to us and she was teaching a 6, 000 workshop to an organization. She had amazing systems and processes and materials and she’d been a consultant to corporations for a really, really long time.

    [00:18:19] And based on her content, we were able to repackage it. And represent her program out using a combination of the bulk calculator and the amplify pricing calculator. And she was able to turn around and license this program for 298, 000. And she said to me, she’s like, I never would have ever asked for that much.

    [00:18:44] And so that might be what you’re thinking. You know, when we talk to clients with licensing, sometimes there’s. A big mindset block in this where you’re thinking, how can I go from selling something that might have been, you know, even like a 10, 000 strategy or a 1, 000 course or shoot, even if it’s a 9 course for heaven’s sakes, how can I go from that?

    [00:19:10] To licensing it to an organization and asking them for 100, 000 or a million dollars for it. And the answer to that is understanding number one, the measurable value of your work. Number two, the tangible transformation for the end user, for the licensee and the end user. So let’s, wow, I should do a whole nother podcast episode for you guys on this, but there’s a difference between your licensee and your end user, right?

    [00:19:39] When we’re moving into a licensing business model, and you’re, you’re leveling up in this B2B landscape, your end user is, is not the one you’re selling to. It’s different. The licensee is different than the end user. But that’s step number two, is being able to communicate the tangible, predictable, measurable results for the licensee.

    [00:20:01] Not even just the end user for the licensee the company that’s actually licensing your content from you and then being able to sit in front Of them showing them their own numbers and confidently and reasonably pricing based on research based Pricing methodologies in once you have this if you in any way struggle with mindset.

    [00:20:23] I can’t charge this much. How on earth am I going to charge as much blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. Then understanding the process of going through in pricing, your IP pricing, your trainings and your programs and adjusting that price accordingly to each one of your licensees. It’s just going to wipe out. Any of the guesswork that you’ve ever had, and you’re going to be able to confidently stand on your work, on your genius, on your intellectual property, knowing without a shadow of a doubt that you are going to deliver the predicted results that the program says that it will deliver in a reasonable, ethical pricing manner.

    [00:20:57] And guess what? When you’re done with that pricing, you may look at those numbers and say, that’s a half a million dollars. But you’re going to feel so good because you know, just like my client knew when we went from 6, 000 to 298, 000, she knew that we’d done the work. She saw the formula on paper. She knew the ROI because she’d done the work to unpack the process of Pricing and there was never a question and guess what happened when she went, she was so nervous to go back to this organization and say, yes, you know, here you go.

    [00:21:29] Here’s a proposal. It’s 298, 000. The guy looked at her and he goes, you know, across from zoom, you looked at her and he goes, Oh yeah. Okay. Yeah. That sounds great. Okay. Well I’ll get back to you later on today. This looks great. I mean, she probably could have charged even a lot more than she did. And her mind was blown about the value that she provided.

    [00:21:49] And I mean, at the end of the day, that’s what we’re all here to do, right? I’m here creating this podcast episode for you to, to create value. And to pour into you and to help create a change in your thinking and your business so that you can move on to do the work that you’re really called to do. You’re here to learn how to price it so you can create value and pour in to the people that you’re supposed to serve and expand your reach.

    [00:22:17] But both of us, you and me, we truly deserve to be compensated from the years and the blood, sweat, and tears and the research and the experience that we’ve gathered in order to do what we both do. You deserve to be compensated for your work. I deserve to be compensated for my work. We’ve worked hard to earn that.

    [00:22:39] But in the same thing, we always lead with providing value. And when was my last thing I’ll say to you here in this episode, when you lead with always serving first, no one will ever question pouring into the value that you request. Never. They’re never going to question that because they truly believe that you have their best interest in mind because you actually do.

    [00:23:06] That’s the difference maker. And you can actually take this pricing lesson in this strategy and apply it to everything that you’re doing, whether you’re pricing a course or a mastermind or a retreat or anything else as well. That’s how we price these programs and that’s how you’re going to be successful.

    [00:23:24] I hope and know that you found value in this. I appreciate you being here again. My name is April Beach. We work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to build million dollar offer ecosystems and help you license your IP. and expand your reach to build your business and your life to the next level.

    [00:23:45] So if that’s the strategy that you need and you are looking for, here are two different resources that I will provide for you to get started. The first one is just go over to our website at sweetlifeco. com. Again, that’s sweet life. Co. com. You can find an application to apply to work with us or be in any of our programs, our licensing accelerator, any of our workshops at any time, or you can dive right into our very first kickoff training.

    [00:24:13] It’s called licensing launch pad, and it’s an awesome little micro training that takes you through even deciding who you want to sell it to. And I even break down what industries are buying from you. And that program can be accessed by visiting licensinglaunchpad. com. Again that’s licensinglaunchpad.

    [00:24:34] com. And if you found value in this episode, please share it with your friends. We are just going on year number seven of producing this podcast and I refuse advertisers. Because I think they’re very annoying and they, and they break our thought process. So because of that, we really appreciate you just clicking the up arrow and sharing this show on LinkedIn or on Instagram and just helping us expand the reach of our work.

    [00:25:00] Thank you so much for listening and I will talk to you guys soon.

     
     

     

     

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy with April Beach (Episode 315)

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy

    &nbsp

    Who This Show Is For and Why It’s Important:
    This episode is crafted for you, the seasoned consultant or coach, who’s considering moving from B2C to B2B. It’s essential for those of you who have proven success with clients and have developed systematic approaches in your work. This is about taking your impact and profitability to the next level while easing your workload.
     
    In this episode, we specifically guide you through developing and implementing two core strategies for transitioning to B2B consulting. First, we focus on creating a certification program to train other professionals in your field, turning potential competitors into your clients. This approach leverages your expertise and establishes a collaborative network. Second, we explore the process of licensing your unique methodologies to these professionals. This strategy not only extends the reach of your work but also enhances your role as a thought leader in the industry, all while reducing your direct workload.
     
     
     
    Takeaways:
    • Developing a Certification Program: You’ll learn to transform competitors into clients by creating a training or certification program in your expertise.
    • Licensing Your Expertise: Discover how licensing your methodologies can broaden your business scope and reinforce your thought leadership.
    • Reducing Workload, Increasing Impact: Understand how these strategies can lessen your day-to-day tasks while boosting your impact and income.
    • Establishing Thought Leadership: Insights on how to position yourself as an industry thought leader.
    • Fostering a Professional Community: Emphasizes the value of building a network of professionals using your methods towards shared goals.
     
    Resources: 
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:
    315
     
    April Beach (00:00.854)
    All right, let's dive into the nitty gritty of this episode here. So we're talking about the opportunity for you to move from B2C consulting to B2B business coaching and strategic consulting. And first of all, I wanna unpack who is this for. So this episode in general is for those of you guys who are established consultants. You're an established coach.
    
    or you're an established subject matter expert and you have already been working with clients sometime. You have a track record of getting clients results and you've already created systems and methods and processes to get clients results. You've used these, you may have courses and trainings and retreats that you host or one-on-one consulting sessions, one-on-group consulting sessions. Basically, you have done that side of your business. You have built your business, you're good at what you do, you have your offers and your programs.
    
    That is who this episode is for. And frankly, that is who's ready for this conversation. Now, when we're talking about moving B2B, there are some things that I want you to be thinking about because it sounds really sexy and you're probably seeing other people do it and you think that it could be really lucrative, but I'm here to unpack the back end of it as well so that you're really sure whether or not this is a good decision for yourself. So here are some markers.
    
    that you may identify when you're ready to move over to B2B Coaching. So the first thing is, is are you still super happy and excited about working with your clients? So if you...
    
    They're kind of getting into this place where you've been serving clients a long time. You've been doing what you've been doing and you're ready for something new. You're ready to move up for a new challenge or maybe another level of impact, another level of significance that you're having and you're feeling like you want to impact more people. You're probably thinking, oh, well, I'm going to be doing less people in this way. You're actually not. I'll explain it to you. But you want to do something higher, bigger, more.
    
    April Beach (01:59.242)
    and maybe you just are ready for a totally different challenge, then B2B consulting is a great opportunity for you. If you've done that, you've been there, you've done that, you feel like your programs are on a roll and you want to level up your business, level up your thought leadership, level up your personal brand, level up your business brand and level up your profit, B2B is really the way to go. Here is the warning though. If you still want to be completely hands-on,
    
    in B2C, so you still want to be the primary person delivering all your programs. You just love your whole business to consumer side of your business. Even if you're working with other coaches, whatever that is, you love it, love it, love it, and you're not ready to get out of it, then maybe it's not quite the time for you. And then another consideration for you, when we're talking about moving over to B2B is, are you ready?
    
    and hear me out when I say this, it might give you like little heart palpitations, are you ready to allow other people to, other coaches like you perhaps, to access your materials, to access your systems, to access your IP, to access your, you know, all of your SOPs and your processes and your trainings. Does the thought of that make you super excited or are you like, oh no?
    
    I don't want anybody seeing all of my assets, all of my IP and my gold. I could never imagine another company having access to my stuff and me not being the one to actually distribute it. So those are just some things I want you to think about. There are no right or wrong answers there, but my job, my responsibility, my passion for what I do in our industry is pouring in all these strategic thinking objectives for you so that you can make smart choices for yourself.
    
    So those are just some of the things I want you to be thinking of. When we're talking about moving from a B to C business model and moving over to a B to B business model, we have to take in a lot of considerations. And here's some very specific questions I would love for you to address for yourself. So first of all is, what do you wanna be known for? What do you wanna be known for in your space? Do you wanna be known as this person, this front runner, or
    
    April Beach (04:20.514)
    Do not really care if your name is all over everything, but maybe it's more important for your methods and your teachings to get in the hands of more people. That is one thing I just want you to be thinking of. And then the next thing, like I talked about, is what are you excited about? What work do you wanna do? What are you really excited about creating new things or working with new people or helping to make an impact in your industry in a different way? If you're excited about that, that is really an important indicator that you're ready possibly to move into B2B coaching.
    
    And then the third thing is how important is it to you to expand the reach of your work? So let's kind of unpack what this looks like. When you are working B2C, even if you are doing huge launches of group programs, you're still only impacting the end users of that program, whether you have 10 or 20 or 20,000 people in your program.
    
    You're still only impacting 10 or 20 or 20,000 people with your program. When you go to a B2B model, let's say for example, you were going to give another consultant an opportunity to share your program's content, your work only lies in the effort to bring those other consultants and coaches up to speed.
    
    So let's say you have five different consultants and coaches that you're working with on a B2B capacity and you're allowing them to share and distribute your work. And now let's say that each one of those coaches had 20 or 200 or 20,000 people in their program. Now look at what you've done. It's basic math that you are creating an exponential reach with your work.
    
    And a couple of cool things happen when we do that. Number one, your workload actually tends to be reduced. Number two, you get to be elevated to that thought leader space. Number three, you get to work with more go-getters, gung-ho people that are really passionate about the same things you are and support them. And you don't have to be the one, usually in all the marketing and the nitty gritty and some of the really tiring work that tends to...
    
    April Beach (06:43.954)
    happen and burn out coaches and consultants and service experts. You don't have to be a part of that anymore. And so moving from B to C to B to B could be a really great option for you. And if those things make you excited, then you're in the right place with this podcast. You're also in the right place for working with us at The Suite Life Company. This is what we do. We help establish coaches.
    
    and subject matter experts and consultants develop your next level programs and sell them B2B through licensing and certification and other ways we can expand your roots. So now what I want to do for you as promised is I want to unpack the most basic but super powerful. So just because it's basic, don't think it's not good. As a matter of fact, we have a handful of clients that have completely
    
    revolutionized their entire business model with these steps I'm giving you here. And they have never been happier. As a matter of fact, I just talked to a client yesterday and we worked with her to change her business model from B to C to B to B. And she literally sent me a message yesterday. She said, April, I have never.
    
    been more happy in the work I'm doing. I've never felt like I was really able to make the impact I was called to make and here I am with these simple changes and thank you so much and it's just amazing. As a matter of fact, she actually graduated out of our program. She doesn't even need us anymore because she is out in soaring and flying on her own and making this impact. So just because what I'm gonna tell you is simple, please take it to heart.
    
    because this is what people pay me a lot of money to tell them, right? And so that's what our podcast insiders get. So the first business model to move you to B2B from B2C is what I call a one-two punch. So that would be creating a training program for your competition. This is what we call turning your clients, or turning your competition into your clients.
    
    April Beach (08:49.346)
    Let me say that again, because it's a good punch line and I messed it up. This is what I call turning your competition into your clients. So we can literally take your competition and bring them into an ecosystem and you can create a certificate or a certification program and actually certify other professionals in your established methodology, or you can certify them to use your tools or your process.
    
    So we are duplicating you. So step one is the building of that certification program, bringing other people that used to be your competition now into an amazing ecosystem of all these different businesses and might be working with similar audience. We may have seen that they're like, quote unquote, competitors in the past, but now all of a sudden you're creating a collective of like-minded people that are all working towards and achieving this goal. And they all understand one thing.
    
    One very important powerful thing, they all know your processes, your methods, your frameworks, your systems, and they're all able to tell people that they are certified or trained or accredited or whatever words you wanna use. We're not gonna get into all the language here in this. There are ramifications for the language you use, good and bad, but they are trained in your methodology.
    
    And so what this does for us is it helps us to open up this entire world in where you are working with these people, you're having these mastermind meetings, you're training people in your ways and your ninja skills, and you are giving them all of your steps and tools and processes. And you know who this is really great for? This is really great for your competition that isn't quite to where you were in business.
    
    Like they always looked up to you. So you're thinking, wow, you know, who would wanna do this? Let me tell you who. They're usually businesses that have not achieved the level of success that you have with your clients. And so they're looking for these shortcuts. They're looking for ways where they can provide their clients with better results. And then therefore, now my dogs are barking.
    
    April Beach (10:58.57)
    And then therefore, when they provide better results to their clients, then they make more money, and then it's also expanding the reach of your work. So when we're talking about a one-two punch, step number one is creating an opportunity for other businesses to become certified or trained on your methodology, and they can take that into their own program services, businesses, courses, retreats, masterminds, memberships, whatever that is.
    
    And in the process, we're elevating you as that thought leader still, you're making more money, but you're not the one having to deliver it. So that's step number one. And then the one, two, here you go. Here's the right hook, left hook of this business strategy is then on the after that, after you have validated that they're good at what they do, they can follow along the processes, then you give them an opportunity to license your materials and actually use your trainings.
    
    coaching steps Worksheets all of your materials within their own consulting programs. So first of all you train them in your ways Like Star Wars padawan I have to use that reference because I just finished watching all of the Star Wars Soca series with my teenage boys and if you are a parent and you have boys and you know exactly what I'm talking about so that you know in Star Wars they have like that
    
    the Jedi and they have like the padawan. Well, you can create that. You can create these little padawans with your methodology and all of your thoughts and teach them what you know. So instead of competing, you're creating a collective of amazing professionals that are all centered around using your genius work to elevate their clients. And then part two, after they're certified or accredited or they've received the stamp of approval or whatever you end up calling it.
    
    Then you give them permission to use your materials in their own business, and that is called a license. So there's a separate, there's the certification and the training period first, and then there is the licensing period where you give them permission to utilize your materials in their programs with their people. In this, by far, my friends, is the quickest, fastest way to transition you from B2C to B2B.
    
    April Beach (13:21.046)
    Here are a couple of things that we know. The people that admire you the most, the businesses that are really tracking and following along with what you're doing because they're trying to be like you or they're trying to level up, they're on your email list. They're following what you're doing. When you and when our clients in the past have put out a statement saying, we're about to do something totally different. We're about to take our program system training and allow for other
    
    coaches and consultants to learn it, to access it, to see on the inside. And I'm gonna teach you my ways. It is gangbusters. All of a sudden, literally in one email or one social post or one video, we have taken you from swimming in that red ocean, competing with all these other people to elevating you.
    
    catapulting you, you're on a yacht, you're on a parasail flying over the water, you are in a totally different realm where all of a sudden you are leading the way because you're thinking differently. The definition of a thought leader is not somebody who's just talking about all this stuff all the time, it's somebody that's truly thinking and working in a different way and presenting their ideas in their business and in questioning things and disrupting things. You're literally leading a different way of thinking.
    
    And when you transition from B2C to B2B in this way, we are instantly elevating you to that thought leader platform and people are gonna follow you because they see that you're doing something different and they see that you're including them and you're not trying to bury them and smush them, that you're literally collectively working to build a future of profit for everybody. And that is one of the most powerful things that I can share with you about moving from B2B to B2C over to B2B.
    
    So let's kind of recap what we talked about in this episode. It's a short power packed episode, but again, my job here is to introduce you to the world of B2B strategic consulting, licensing, next level offers and programs. And so in this, you're gonna get from us here on the podcast strategic thought processes for those of you guys that are ready for these next levels of business strategy. And of course,
    
    April Beach (15:35.87)
    We're here for you when you are ready for the coaching and you're ready to dive in, you're ready to get our processes to be successful in this. Of course, you know where to find us at sweetlifeco.com and we're ready and willing to work with you. We can't wait to work with you. But my job here is just to get you to think differently, especially in an oversaturated consulting and coaching space. So.
    
    With that being said, what we talked about today is if you have an established consulting business, coaching business, you're a subject matter expert, you're a service-based entrepreneur of some kind. And you've been doing what you've been doing, you have great processes, you have great methods, you have great steps of service, they've gotten people results in the past, and you're kind of over it. You're ready, you're kind of wondering what's next, or I'm getting burned out.
    
    I'm ready to make more money. I'm ready to help more people. I'm ready to expand the reach of my work. I'm ready to get out of marketing and online funnels and all of these things that tend to be incredibly exhausting for really hardworking coaching and consultants that are trying to continue to scale their business. If that's where you are, a consideration of moving to B2B is something that would be really, really good for you to take a moment and think about.
    
    And today on this episode, I have shared with you the one-two punch of a business model that you can use, that many of our clients use, to go from this B2C to B2B. And that business model is, first part of it, is creating the access to your systems for other coaches and consultants. Creating a community, creating collaboration. You know, we've talked about this for the last three years, is that community and collaboration of partnerships
    
    is the future of business growth. It's not competition, it's collaboration. That sounds like such a cheesy Instagram line, but here I'm showing you the business model of how that works. It's not a cheesy Instagram line. It's a business strategy. And I want you to have the best of the best of the business strategies to elevate the work and to be rewarded financially and in your lifestyle for the work that you've done.
    
    April Beach (17:47.966)
    So that first punch is creating an environment to bring in other people that could benefit from understanding your processes and your methods and giving them access to it. And then part two is then for maybe all the people or a small portion of the people, licensing them the ability to even utilize your materials and your trainings, your recordings, your teachings, you can even give them.
    
    And this is like the last bonus tip I'll give you. I'll share with you a little story. I have been doing this since 2008 in my own business. One of the reasons why I'm qualified to teach people how to do this, I've been doing this for a very long time. And at one point in time, at first, I just gave other businesses the recordings of my classes. And I said, Ayanna, you can distribute these in your business. But then I realized, just like we want you thinking about, we're always creating offers and programs that is the best.
    
    for our people, we wanna serve our people. And so in that same line of thinking, even though they used to be what you consider competition, they're my clients now. And I was thinking, what would really be the best for them? What would really make these consultants, these coaches look so good to their clients? And what would make them make more money? Because when they make more money, I make more money. And I realized that I wanted to literally give them.
    
    all of my curriculum and even give them the ability to re-record my classes with their face, their voice, even in some cases their company logo on them. And as soon as I realized how to package my IP in a way that would allow for other businesses to succeed and make more money and it was all about them and I wasn't trying to hold on to so much control.
    
    because I was ready to do something else and I was ready for the next level of my life and my business. So I was okay with that. That is when all the floodgates were opened and everybody just got so freaking blessed. It was absolutely incredible. And the profits had been rolling in ever since. And so those are some of the things I want you to be thinking about here as we talk about this transition. But now that you've listened to this whole episode and we've spent about 20 minutes together.
    
    April Beach (20:03.938)
    The most important thing is coming back to the beginning. Are you ready for this? Are you holding on to your work that you wanna be the only one teaching what you teach and how you teach it and the way you teach it? And if that's where you are, that's awesome. It's the identification that that's where you are. You could be there forever and that is absolutely so cool for you. But if you're to that place where you're like, yeah, you know, I think I can kind of loosen this up a little bit and I think I would be okay with others understanding my secrets.
    
    my intellectual property, my secret sauce, my unique method and framework that, you know, is just absolutely delivering guaranteed transformations. As soon as you realize that it's okay and you're ready to open up that grip a little bit and you're ready to think bigger, think at the next level, think about a more reach and how many more people you can impact and how much more money you can make and you're ready for that next level of your business, then this is a great.
    
    move for you to consider. And as we're here kind of a little bit towards the beginning of this new year, when you're listening to this, we're gonna be focusing a lot here in 2024 on the Suite Life podcast, unpacking a lot of strategies that we work with our very high level private clients and with clients in our Amplify ecosystem. I'm gonna be sharing some of these things with you because I wanna introduce this, I wanna introduce you to some of these things that you may not be aware of.
    
    that I know are gonna make a huge impact in your business. And this is one of those episodes that could literally, if you listen to this and you think on it and you start taking action on it, this is one of those episodes that could be a complete life changer for you in your business moving forward. And I hope that you give this particular episode the attention that it deserves and to give yourself permission to ask yourself those questions that we talked about in the beginning, you can always replay this. And of course,
    
    We are here for you. When you're ready to make these transitions and you want a strategic partner, to think about all the ins and outs, to help you decide what you give away and what you keep, and to give you the frameworks and the processes to actually build this next level of your business, I would love for you to reach out to us. You can find all of our resources by visiting sweetlifeco.com. We have programs, we have accelerators, we have retreats, we have one-on-one, and we have amazing workshops that will bring you and your business into this next area.
    
    April Beach (22:30.486)
    Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I can't wait to drop more trainings for you this year and all the experts we have lined up to work with you this year. And we just really appreciate you sharing the show with your friends.
     
     

     

     

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 314)

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches

     

    Episode Bonus: 
     
    Summary:  
     
     
    Thinking about selling VIP days and don’t know how to start? You’re in the right place! In this engaging episode, we sit down with Amy Yamada, a seasoned expert in the coaching realm, to explore the ins and outs of creating and offering VIP days. This episode is a goldmine for coaches and consultants eager to inject a fresh, personalized approach into their services. If you’re looking to set yourself apart in the coaching market with offerings that truly resonate with your clients, offering VIP Days might be your answer? 
     
    In this show, Amy walks us through the key elements of crafting VIP days that not only meet but exceed client expectations. You’ll learn how to pinpoint exactly what your clients need and tailor your VIP days to address these needs effectively. We also dive into strategies for confidently setting and communicating your prices, ensuring your clients understand the immense value of these specialized sessions. Plus, Amy shares her secrets on post-session follow-ups that keep the momentum going and strengthen client relationships. 
     
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a starting roadmap for offering VIP days in your coaching or consulting business. You’ll also be equipped with actionable tips and a deeper understanding of how to create these powerful, transformative experiences. So, if you’re ready to take your coaching game to the next level, tune in and let’s get started. 
     
    At the end of this episode, you understand: 
    1. Tailoring VIP Days to Client Needs: Understand how to identify and address your clients’ unique challenges and goals, ensuring that each VIP day is a personalized and impactful experience.
    2. Effective Pricing Strategies: Learn how to set and communicate the value of your VIP days, enabling you to confidently charge rates that reflect the high-quality, bespoke service you provide.
    3. Post-Session Engagement: Discover the importance of follow-up support and how it can enhance the effectiveness of your VIP day, leading to stronger, ongoing client relationships.
    4. Marketing Your VIP Days: Gain insights into effectively promoting your VIP days, highlighting their unique benefits and differentiating your services in a competitive market.
    5. Practical Implementation: Walk away with actionable steps to integrate VIP days into your coaching or consulting business, enhancing both client satisfaction and business growth.
     
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    314

    April (00:02)
    All right, you guys, I’m back again with my friend, Amy Umada. And the last time she was here, we were talking about ChatGPT, which is also an area of Amy’s expertise. So you can go back and listen to episodes 277 and 278 if you are here and you want to know more about utilizing ChatGPT to streamline your operations and your marketing and all these genius things that Amy teaches. But today we’re talking about VIP days. And this is such a timely topic.
     
    completely in transparency for you guys, because you know, I’ll also always tell you the truth. I really hadn’t had shows lined up that I was really excited about for 2024 yet. And I thought of Amy and we do some collaboration together. And I was thinking, oh my gosh, this is just the perfect show to do. Let’s dive into VIP days. Because as you guys remember, we just did a show where we dropped the latest trends for subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants. And the number one trend is that people
     
    are no longer seeking to be part of these big, huge launches, these big, huge programs where they’re another number and they are paying for highly curated experiences. And this is a perfect introduction into talking about VIP days with Amy. Amy, thank you so much for coming on the show with us. How are you? I’m so glad to be back and speaking about a topic that I’m very passionate about. And it’s just something where whether you’re totally new to VIP days and this is your introduction to them or you’ve been doing them for a while and you wanna take them to the next level.
     
    I just think it’s a very fun topic because it’s been probably the most fun, easy, and impactful offer that I’ve had as part of one of my offers. And so I’m excited to share anything that can support those who want to offer them this year. I am totally excited to dive in. Okay. So let’s first of all define what a VIP day is.
     
    Let’s start at the…
     
    the basics of the basics. You’re a coach, you’re a consultant, you’re thinking, hey, you know, VIP day, not only sounds like something I would like to attend, but maybe something I would like to sell. How do I define a VIP day versus just a day attending a workshop with me, perhaps? Yeah, that’s a great question. So the way I like to define a VIP day is think of it as a private, like a one-on-one full day intensive.
     
    And you can call it what you want. I know in the coaching industry, we call it a VIP day. You could call it a personal retreat. You could call it a one day intensive. You can call it a solo experience. I mean, you can really call it whatever you want that makes sense for you and your ideal client. But it’s a way for you to work with someone, completely personalize the day to them and think about what is it that my ideal client wants to get out of our experience together and what is their ultimate desire transformation or outcome?
     
    And by coming together for a full day, whether it’s in person or virtually, you can accelerate their experience of getting to where they want to go. So I just have found that it’s been a great way to work with those who, as you said, not all people want to jump into a long-term coaching program or a group or a mastermind, even though I’ve loved those formats as well. But it’s been nice to have something that is short and accelerated and gives them my personalized attention. OK. So I want faster results.
     
    I want your personal attention. I’m gonna seek out a VIP day. And I know that there are customers out there that are certainly looking for that as well. You know, and really quick, just talking about the trends, have you noticed that as well, being in the industry for a while, that change away from these big, huge mass launches and programs where they would be, you know, 500,000 seats sold at a time. Have you seen that as well in your space?
     
    I mean, it’s been interesting because I was recently a part of another entrepreneurs big launch and they still did very well. I mean, I think that it was a launch that does target newer entrepreneurs that really, you know, when you’re newer and you’re just like craving the information, you’re like, I want to know the model. I know I want to know the secret. I don’t have a large budget. So I think there’s still a time and space for that. But especially for those who’ve been in their businesses or own businesses for two, three, five, ten plus years. I think you just get to a point where.
     
    It’s more about implementation and team systems and then investing in the very specific things that you need versus being a part of a larger group mastermind. And I say that and I’m still a part of a larger group mastermind, but even when I have been a part of a group mastermind, I always find like my business besties within it and we create our own pod, you know, and I make a note of getting to know the lead coach and the coaches. I’m like, I don’t wanna just be another number even as a client, let alone have clients that feel that way too.
     
    So I think that when you’re working with someone who’s been in business for multiple years, then they are craving that personalized attention and a very specific outcome. So yeah, I totally get what you’re saying about that. That’s so funny. That’s really good insight. And actually, now that you said that, I think that’s how you and I met. I think you and I onboarded the same day into that larger business mastermind. Funny, that was like years ago. It seems like, okay, I think that’s how we met. Who knows? All right.
     
    So let’s dive into really how does, you know, our listeners are subject matter experts and coaches and consultants and authors and speakers. And they’re thinking about doing this VIP day, but they’re second guessing whether or not they’re qualified to actually even deliver a VIP experience, which we’ll talk about later, but even just be in a position to charge what needs to be charged in order to truly deliver a VIP experience. So I know
     
    that a lot of people based on what you say face this resistance of, wow, can I actually do this? So where do you want them to start first even thinking about whether or not they should offer VIP services within their business? Yeah, I would say that the first step is to enroll yourself first. Meaning, and just know that I struggled with thinking about charging high ticket for a VIP day. What I teach now is I teach clients and workshop attendees on creating and selling a $10,000 VIP day.
     
    And I myself really struggled with the thought of that at one point in my journey because I’d never done it. Right. So it was that whole question of like, who might have think that anyone would invest anything to work with me for a day? And I had a mentor at the time that was encouraging me to sell them for ten thousand dollars. I’m like, there’s no I’m a very optimistic person and there’s no way. I was like, I can’t do it. And she said, OK, how about we’re like negotiating? She’s like, how about seventy five hundred? I’m like, no, I just I can’t even imagine saying the words out loud on a call with someone. And she said, all right.
     
    How about this? How about you sell the first two at $5,000 and then bump it up to $7,500 and sell like six more? Which was an ambitious goal within a month. And I said, I’ll see what I can do. And that month, I ended up selling five VIP days for $5,000 each, paid in full. So it was a nice $25,000 bump in my business, right? Like who doesn’t love a nice revenue bump? Right. And it was so great to just get out of my comfort zone and stop making it about me.
     
    and my limiting beliefs of who am I to think that anyone will ever invest $5,000 to work with me for a day. And instead, focus the spotlight on them, them being your ideal client and ask yourself, do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one dedicated day with them? It just has a reframe on it. So whenever I shift my thinking like
     
    Do I believe I could really make a difference for someone? Yes, I could make a difference for someone. If we got to sit down and roll up our sleeves and spend a whole day together, like think about how much you could do in a day and how you can accelerate their growth because they don’t have to do all the things you did to get to where you are now because you’re gonna fast track them. You’re gonna share with them what has worked and what hasn’t worked with yourself and others. So I would say enroll yourself first and ask yourself, like think about someone, think about one person that represents your ideal client and ask yourself.
     
    Do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one entire day with them, whether it was in-person or virtual? And I’m willing to bet the answer is yes. Okay, now you’re enrolled in someone enrolling in a VIP day with you. So it’s gonna be a lot easier for you to actually speak into this when you believe in the value of it. Wow, oh my gosh, I love that. And I can see why the graduated process that your coach was walking you through bought you into it as well. I know that that’s…
     
    how I started out as well, like a little bit more and a little bit more. And then all of a sudden I realized, wow, this is blowing these people’s socks off. They would have paid so much more than I actually charged for this. And look at the results. And I also I also remember that when I first started increasing my prices that it gave me so much more confidence as well, because I saw how blown away they are with their own results. And you’re right. It was just it was all about them. So that leads me to my next question. So.
     
    buying in and believing in your value, you know? And then we go, okay, but how do I actually transfer the value that I’m saying that you’re gonna get out of 10K into what I’m actually doing with them? How do I actually know, I have to structure this in some capacity, they can’t just show up and just hang out and I have some, you know, lunch waiting for them. There has to be some sort of a framework around what we’re gonna talk about.
     
    How do you recommend people determine the framework of that VIP day and what they’re actually doing, what problem they’re solving? That’s a great idea. Great question, I should say. One of the things that has helped my clients with answering this question is to grab a piece of paper, draw a line down the middle vertically. And so you make two columns. And on one side, you put pain points. On the other side, you put solutions at the top. And so then you can bullet point out, what are the top?
     
    pain points that your ideal client has? And then next to each pain point, what is a solution that you would recommend for each of those pain points? And by doing that, first of all, you can see how freaking brilliant you are because you have a solution for all of their problems. Right. And you might even notice that there might be some redundancies in the solutions, like, oh, if they have these three problems, this solution can actually address these three problems.
     
    But by doing this, you can also see, OK, here are some things that I can apply during a VIP day. And then just know that you’re going to customize the VIP day to the person. So one of the questions I often get from people is kind of what you’re saying is, what does this flow of the day look like? Well, first of all, it’s about what is the flow going to look like that’s going to best serve your ideal client. So whenever, like when in doubt with anything in my business, I always ask myself, what is the flow going to look like that’s
     
    How can I best support my ideal client? Or how can I make the biggest difference possible for them? So for some, they might prefer a shorter VIP day, like four hours. I remember having a mentor when I would invest in a VIP day with her. It was four hours was considered a full VIP day. And we would pack in it. Like, I mean, I would fly out to San Diego. I live in Seattle and I would go to her house and we’d grab some coffee and she’d have like a big flip charge. She’s like, all right, what are we talking about today? And we’d get to, it was fast and furious. And that’s what works for me in terms of a client.
     
    But as far as being a coach with my clients, I’m such a connector. I like to take our time. I don’t want to feel rushed, you know? So for me, I always go from, if it’s in person, it’s 10 to five. So it’s a full day, including a fabulous lunch. I like a little luxury, like a luxury in it. So, but that’s just the framework of like the itinerary, but what’s most important is what are they going to get out of it? So they’re coming to you because they want your personalized attention. They want access to you.
     
    and they want to accelerate their growth. It happens to be three A’s when I discovered this. It wasn’t planned, I’m not that clever, but access, attention, and acceleration. When they’re able to get that access to you as the expert and they get your personalized attention to really meet them where they are and get them to where they wanna go and accelerate their growth, the client is super happy. So I would say think about their pain points, the solutions to those pain points, and then customize the day specifically to the VIP day client that’s stepping in.
     
    So that really addresses those pain points and gets them going. I have so many questions I wanna ask you that are outside of the scope of what we’re talking about today. But about pre-boarding and on ramping and on boarding and off boarding that it’s all Amy’s area of expertise. You guys go to Amy, I’ll give you all the links. I know our clients are thinking or our listeners are thinking right now, well, how do I get ready for that? And how do I make sure it’s good and all these other systems? But.
     
    But I do want to ask this one question. When somebody curates this VIP day, how often do you find, and maybe this is just a personal question with you, how often do you find that there needs to be a little bit of an afterburn support after that VIP day? Or is that like, nope, we’re done, see you later bye, pay me another time? How does it usually work with you with your clients? Yeah, you know, it’s interesting you asked this because I’ve tested.
     
    different ways of supporting them after the fact. What I’ve found that has worked for me is to schedule, as a part of the package, one follow-up private coaching session to be used within 30 days after the VIP day. And here’s why. It can help with accountability. So if they’ve started implementing some things they’ve learned from the VIP day, it can help them hold themselves accountable to build that momentum. It can also be great for going deeper on anything we didn’t quite go as deep on that we planned on.
     
    Um, and then also on that call, you can, you can, towards the end of the call, if you believe that this client could become a longer term client, because you’re like, Oh my gosh, I love this person. We have such a great connection. I can see how I can help them implement. Maybe they become a private high ticket coaching client for you. Right. So, so I would say wait till the end because it is a coaching session, but towards the end, I might say something like, you know, based on everything that we’ve covered during the VIP day and during our session today,
     
    I believe I could help you further in terms of implementation. Do you want to talk about what would that look like? Or do you want to explore what that would look like? And oftentimes they’ve at least been curious about it. And so I’d say, okay, do you still have time today if we have space or we can talk in the next couple of days and then you can upsell them to a longer term offer. And it’s been great. And some of my clients who’ve had the fastest results have kicked things off with a VIP day because we just did that deep dive into what they’re up to and what they’re creating.
     
    The other thing I do want to share though, and I love that you were talking about the pre and the post, that one of the biggest pieces of advice that I can give if you really want to crush your VIP days is to include what I call an intention setting call before the VIP day. So for example, say that you enroll someone into a VIP day, but they’re flying out to you or you’re flying to a really cool destination and it’s a month away.
     
    We don’t want a whole month to go by. And then our first, our next conversation, I should say, to be in person on the VIP day. So I recommend scheduling, even if it’s 15 minutes, a short intention setting call or call, call it what you want to call it, but like a grounding call that you schedule within a week prior to your VIP day. And then when you jump on that call, keep it super laser focused. It’s not the VIP day. It’s not a coaching session. Uh, but if you are my client April, I’d say, okay, April, first of all, I’m super excited for our in-person VIP day coming up on Friday.
     
    from today’s vantage point, what specifically do you want to get out of our VIP day? And then I would take notes, take notes, because those notes are your guiding light, that’s your North star, your compass for the VIP day, bring it to your VIP day and say, okay, so we talked about the other day and that’s how you will get a testimonial every time. I love that. I have two clients flying in here to Boulder, one this month and one next month, and I’m going to do that.
     
    and I’ve never done it before. We usually do, it’s not even, they’re entering into a longer term mentorship with me. So it’s not just one VIP day, but I love the starting out in person. And I’m totally stealing that. Yeah, I’m totally stealing that. I’m like, we’re gonna set this intention call ahead of time to help me help you better. Okay, so we’ve talked about the framework. We talked about the understanding of believing. And I just want our listeners to realize
     
    you guys want this, I want this, Amy wants this, we all want this sort of level of service. So take that and now understand that your clients really want this too, as you’re going through this process. And I just, I feel really strongly about, especially moving forward in 2024, these curated mentorship type of business models, just because we know that so many people really are craving this. So just another little confidence boost if anybody’s.
     
    out there wondering if this is for you. Question is, do you want it? And if the answer is yes, then the answer is your people want it too. Okay, so now let’s kind of wrap it up. How do you actually close it? How do you actually say, this is what it is, this is what I’m offering and communicate the value of what it is that you are doing to close and convert those leads into buyers? I love this question. We can do a whole training series on this. I know, right? I’ll keep it
     
    tight.
     
    Well, first of all, I always like to create what I call a confidence card, meaning an outline of the VIP day offer that are initially it’s like all about the benefits to them. And this is, I use it as a behind the scenes tool just to have in front of me when I’m going to call with someone. Some of my clients will create a beautified branded version of it to send them. But as far as your closing question, I just always, I’m just so real with it. You know, like when it comes to sales conversations, enrollment conversations, all I’m thinking about is how do I believe I can best support the person?
     
    So if I was talking to someone and I was asking them questions, finding out where they are, where they want to go, what they’re struggling with, all the usual questions. And if I truly believed that I could make a difference for them with a VIP day, I would say, I would say that. I would say, you know, I believe the best way that I could support you would be by us doing a VIP day together. And here’s why, right? And then speaking to the why, like when, and then I would focus on them. When you shared with me that you’re wanting X, Y, and Z, and that you’re struggling with this, you know, then this is exactly my sweet spot. And then I would…
     
    visualize with them. I’d say, just imagine us coming together. If we’re able to do it in person, even better. Come to my home here in Seattle. We’ve got a great view. We’ll roll our sleeves. And we can do the first half of the day, we can do a deep dive. So basically, share with them the visual of the journey. Here’s what I could see us doing. So the first half of the day, we’ll do a deep dive. In my case, it’s usually messaging. We’ll do a deep dive on your messaging, how you’re already. What is it that you’re already doing that’s not working so we can release that?
     
    We’ll look at all the puzzle pieces of your business so that we can just get a really good grasp of what you’re up to. And then we’ll have a fabulous lunch. And then after lunch, we’re going to focus on building out a plan that is implementable right after the VIP day. Something along those lines where they can really see that I’ve listened to them on our call and that I am being so honest about why I’m recommending this as the offer and the format and the vehicle in which we’ll cover what we need to cover. So.
     
    I just keep it real. I mean, here’s how I think I can best support you. What do you think? Right. Yeah. Do you take any clients that you are uncertain whether or not your personalities drive? No. If we are not a fit, we’re not a fit. I mean, it’s also a day of your life. I recently came across a quote that said, what you do each day should be important because you’re giving up a day of your life for it, or something like that. It’s not word for word.
     
    I have that. I will, I’m going to text you a picture. I have a big, huge one of the, it’s hanging on my wall downstairs. It’s written out in text cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. So make it good. Cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. I want my boys to see that every morning before they leave the house. So it’s a, it’s a big thing. So anyway, after this, here you go guys. I’ll upload it to the show notes so you can see it too.
     
    Uh, this statement. Um, but Amy, I appreciate this so much. And I mean, your wisdom and your framework and your teaching on VIP days for a really long time has been leading coaches and consultants in the industry. And so certainly a trusted resource and really appreciate you coming in here and, and teaching our listeners all about frameworks. And I know that you do have one of your VIP intensives coming up. Could you want to tell people about that? Obviously.
     
    You guys need to be subscribing and listening to this in real time. Otherwise it’s probably not going to be happening live if you’re listening to the replay, but Amy, tell us about what’s coming up for people that want to learn how to craft a VIP day. Yeah. Well, first of all, I do also have a cheat sheet that I just want to give. Oh, good. Yay. We can offer that link to get the VIP day cheat sheet. So just walks you through the steps to create promote and sell high ticket VIP day. So if you’re a go getter and you’re like, I just want to take it around with it. Great.
     
    I do have a couple of workshops coming up on, so I know some might be watching this afterwards, but if you’re not, it’s coming up on January 23rd, January 25th, I’m doing the same workshop twice. So people have two different times. So we can make sure we have links on that below. And then there will also be a limited time on demand training of it. And then I’m not going anywhere. So please just come find me if you’re listening to this afterwards. I do throughout the year do some trainings on VIP days.
     
    If it is something you’re serious about doing sooner than later, what I have loved about VIP days, it’s been the most like the fastest, easiest, most fun way to make an impact. And I’ve also kept the system that I teach very simple as well. So it’s not, it’s not like a big thing that you need to do, like a lot, you know, like when you’re launching something big, um, you don’t need to have an ad, you know, like a new fancy funnel or an ad campaign or any of that. I love those strategies, but this is where you.
     
    create connect offer, you know, like you create your, your VLT, you connect with your ideal clients, make offers, and you do it in a way that really demonstrates that you understand what it is that they’re seeking. You understand your ideal clients. So that’s going to be a part of the training as well. So I’ve seen people go from my workshop to like, I’m thinking about one of my clients, Tara, who after the training, she went and sold two for 5,500. She said, she’s like, I’m not ready to sell them for 10,000, so, but she sold two 5,500. She’s like, oh my gosh, I just made $11,000.
     
    from what I learned at your workshop. I’m like, and you’re welcome. And that’s what we call ROI friends. I’m talking about. That’s the fun of the workshop. Definitely download the VIP cheat sheet if you’re wanting to implement VIP days. And then let’s stay connected. Like I love helping passionate entrepreneurs to do what you love with people you love and places that you love because this life is precious. And I mean, that’s what I love about you, April. You’re all about living a great life. So let’s do this. Yes, yes, yes. And what is your…
     
    primary website for somebody who isn’t listening timely and is not gonna be able to access those resources so people can find you. Yeah, for once I’m gonna give two websites. Great, let’s do it, let’s do it. Our listeners are very smart and organized. Very smart and can handle two URLs. Okay, so one is simply my name, so it keeps it very simple, amyumada.com. And then we are in the process of building, so it may not be perfect, I’m just telling you right now.
     
    We’re in the process of this is the first time I’m telling you guys. I’m so excited. We’re building out ideal client.ai. And here’s why my dream and my vision is for this to become the go-to resource for all things having to do with your ideal clients, because I found that it’s the first thing marketers will need to know is we’re always asked who do you serve and what problem do you solve? Right. And we skip over to like creating offers. Let’s care enough about our future clients. Let’s be abundantly in minded to attract more of our idea clients by actually
     
    deeply understanding what they want, what they struggle with, what their deepest fears and frustrations are. And so we’re building out like a killer website that’s gonna have amazing blogs on it and resources and ways to deeply understand who you are meant to serve on a level that is un…
     
    Like, nobody can compete with this. Like, I can’t even stand it. So. Oh my gosh. And of course now I’m like, we need to be talking about licensing and patents and trademarks and all that. Totally, totally, yeah. So, we’re not gonna have a conversation after this about all of that. So exciting. And this is something that we all need.
     
    I mean, even me, I’ve been coaching for 27 years. I’m like, oh my gosh, well, what? I think I know what they’re thinking. And the problem is, and now we’re gonna go on a quick tangent and we’ll let y’all go, but a little behind the scenes here, the problem is, is we get so close to our expertise and we forget what it’s like to not know what we already know. I know for me, because I’m not inherently a marketer, that I struggle with that all the time. So that’s why I loved all your.
     
    AI stuff you taught last year in this, we’re gonna be all over this. So I can’t wait to hear more about this. I know all of our clients need this as well. So awesome. All right, well, Amy, I appreciate you so much, just so, so much and all of your wisdom and being here and pouring in everything that you do into this industry. And we’ll make sure that this show gets out to everybody. Thank you so much for having me. It’s been so much fun. You’re welcome.
     
     

     

     

    Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024 (Episode 313)

     Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024

     

    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
     
     
     
    Summary:
    Established coaches and consultants looking to separate from the pack in 2024. You want to do your work differently and reduce friction. The theme of this year is “less in more”. We’ll be focusing on making smart decisions to reduce overwhelm and create more traction in your business. Though there are a lot of things you can do to build your company, in this show we’re focusing on 4 of the most important areas you’ll want to nail first. 
     
    For each of the four areas of your business, I’m breaking down key things to consider in evaluating how you’ll upgrade your process and profit including:
    1. 2024 industry trends in each of the 4 core areas
    2. How they affect your current business
    3. Innovative ways to upgrade, change, and pivot
     
    …All while reducing work time and doing less. 
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the 4 areas of business you need to focus on to scale in 2024
    2. Have evaluated each area to determine necessary changes
    3. Be able to take action 
     
    Episode Bonus:
    6 Components of a Scalable Coaching Program – Includes AI Offer Engineering and more! 
     
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    313

    [00:00:47] Hi, you guys. And welcome to the first show of 2024. I’m so glad to be joining you again for now. We’re rolling into the seventh year producing the Sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Thank you guys so much for being listeners over time and sharing this show with your friends. If this is your first time being here in the show, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:06] I help subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants build million dollar offer ecosystems and scale your business through content licensing and everything that we deliver for you here on this show are proven trainings and strategies that you can literally take to the bank. As a matter of fact, Our slogan, our tagline is delivering you proven trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:30] And I have been consulting coaches and consultants for 27 years with an expertise in online business for 17. So you are really in the right place. Every single thing that we talk about and deliver to you, you can immediately. Apply in your business and will be very valuable to you in this particular episode in kicking off 2024.

    [00:01:49] I was really thinking about the most important things that I want you guys to be focusing on. And in order to do this, I have been focusing on paying attention to the trends in our space. You have seen them. I know you’re paying attention. You’ve seen leaders and gurus and coaches starting to kind of fall to the side.

    [00:02:12] Some of them are just completely overloaded, overwhelmed and exhausted because they built the wrong kind of business for sustainability. Some of them are tired of having to show up on social media all the time and others Just don’t have anything else to sell. They may not have knowledge outside of the one area that they gained notoriety for.

    [00:02:34] And so this is a very special time for you. If you are an established subject matter expert coach or a consultant, and we’re talking about what’s going to happen in 2024, Now has never been a better time for you to hone in on these key areas that we’re going to talk about in our business because now is your time.

    [00:02:52] You don’t have to have thousands of social media followers. You don’t have to be a keynote speaker in front of thousands of people. You don’t even have to have a bestselling book. You just have to be great at what you do, dedicated to your area of expertise and the clients that you serve, and we can scale your business past seven figures.

    [00:03:11] So if you are feeling like you’ve been in this place where you’re just hustling and hustling and you’re never going to get noticed, frankly, many of you guys have been doing what you’ve been doing for a really, really long time and you’re not out there telling everybody about how great you are because you’re in the trenches with your clients delivering amazing results.

    [00:03:29] 2024 is your year. And that’s what we’re talking about right now in this podcast, four key areas where you can scale your business with less work. Here’s the deal. The theme of this year is more results, less time, significant impact, less work. We are talking about more for less, and I want that for you.

    [00:03:52] And so that’s what we’re digging in here, uh, on this show. This is episode number 313. All of the show notes, everything that we talk about here and reference and links and resources and downloads and all the goodies can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Just click on the podcast and this is episode number 313.

    [00:04:12] And a very quick and very important announcement to you. If it’s time for you to upgrade your offer, increase your prices, and take your offers to a scalable level. Create content, create your million dollar offer ecosystem. Then we are opening up offer engineer, which is our leading masterclass that has taught experts to build scalable offer ecosystems and content licensing programs for Over eight years.

    [00:04:41] This is program is really amazing where I get to work with you personally. So if it’s time for you to dive in and actually upgrade your offer, go to the offer engineer. com because we’re going to be doing that live online virtually in January, and I don’t want you to miss it again. That is the offer engineer.

    [00:05:00] com. Go grab your seat in that right now. And let’s go ahead and set this episode to dive in more. All right. So we’re talking about these four areas, these four amazing opportunities for you to upgrade in your business. Things that I really want you thinking about. And I want to unpack some trends and give you an opportunity to think about how you can change or update things.

    [00:05:22] I don’t want to give you a massive amount of work, but as we’re in the beginning of 2024, I see these as four very important areas that not everybody’s talking about. But I want you to be the tip of that sword. I want you to know what’s going on. And so that’s why I picked these four areas as a trend to lean into for 2024.

    [00:05:42] So the first area that you need to nail to scale in 2024 will be your offers, your programs, your services. We don’t actually hear a lot of people talking about actual offer engineering. They just kind of come up with a price and they say, okay, I’m going to do this or I’m going to do that. And this is just what it is.

    [00:06:02] And there’s so much emphasis on marketing. Have you seen that also there really is not enough emphasis on the product itself. And I think there’s some confusion. Um, in a service based industry space, realizing that maybe marketing is more important than the actual product itself. But here’s a little insight.

    [00:06:20] My husband and I own multiple companies and one of the companies he owned is owns is a physical product company. So I have seen what it takes to build a business around a physical product and the difference in the emphasis on the actual excellence of the product. Is what makes the difference the first difference, but in the online coaching and consulting space, we tend to lean into the marketing and the marketing, the marketing, and then the products are kind of shitty sometimes.

    [00:06:49] I mean, let’s be honest, right? So the reality is, is you’ve probably been in many of these programs that had this awesome shiny funnel and you’re diving in there and they give all the bells and whistles and they say all the right things for you to invest your money, and then you get in there and you really didn’t get what you thought that you were going to get.

    [00:07:07] Because the person that sold it to you was a great marketer that maybe not so great and actually creating an offer that’s going to give you substantial, substantial, tangible results that you’re looking for. Frankly, maybe there weren’t even an expert in that part. Maybe there were an expert marketer.

    [00:07:25] And so as we’re looking at your business, I want to just reset what we’re talking about here as business owners, your knowledge, what you teach or the service you provide, what you do, the programs that you deliver, they are your product and they come first and without leading products that deliver amazing, massive, predictable results, nothing else that we talk about is going to matter.

    [00:07:55] So let’s just lay the prerequisite and the ground rule here. Your offer has to be absolutely a leading offer in your space that provides amazing results. So number one key area is that offer engineer engineering and here’s some of the trends I want you to see That have been happening. Well, really it’s been about the last four years we’ve really seen these trends because I literally have been coaching experts to build their offers for so long you guys actually since Pre 2000.

    [00:08:25] I’ve been, I’ve been helping people like you do this. And so what we’re seeing is that these big programs, these huge programs were the ones that were amazing and everybody was attracted to them. But here’s a trend that I want you to be aware of for the last four years, the smaller programs, the boutique programs, the programs that serve less people, or the only serve one company at a time, or that are really super niche.

    [00:08:50] Those are the programs that are selling. Those are the programs that people are looking for and gravitating to. So I want you to see these trends and if that’s the kind of program you’ve had already, amazing. What can we do to upgrade that? How can we scale the actual program itself to scale your time, that you are reducing your time?

    [00:09:10] Especially if you’ve been delivering one on one coaching services and that you can provide efficient results for your clients while providing top notch industry leading results to them as well. And so what the trend that, or the term that this is, is called the blue ocean strategy. I talk about blue ocean all the time.

    [00:09:28] There’s a blue ocean strategy. book. If you haven’t read it, it’s really, really valuable. I will actually go ahead and put a link to that book in the show notes so that you guys can understand this concept, but we need to move you out of what’s considered a red ocean where all these other people are fighting for the same audience.

    [00:09:44] And we need by creating a disruptive, thoughtful, efficient, Offer. We can move you into a blue ocean where you have no competition. So the trends I want you to be aware of are these huge programs are really, in my opinion, going to the wayside. People do not love being in part of a cattle drive. It’s like, cheers, everybody.

    [00:10:03] You know, we want people to know our name. And so being in big programs without any personalized curation is we’re having industries are having trouble selling those types of programs. So look at your programs, think about your programs and think about. What you have and how niche is it? Do you provide specific measurable results?

    [00:10:25] And then the third thing I want you to be aware of is you probably need to increase your prices in 2024 with inflation, with how much it’s costing you to actually run your business and pay yourself, pay your team and the way that. I will be sharing with you here and that we coach our clients is I need you to increase your prices so we can increase your operational expenses so we can increase your ability to scale and get more help.

    [00:10:52] And so if you need to increase your prices, we always want to do this in an ethical way. We never just say, Hey, this was this cost and now it’s going to be that cost. So make sure that you’re increasing your prices and in an ethical way and take a look at your offers. So the question’s for you. Are they niche?

    [00:11:09] Are they niche? Are they specific? Are they disruptive? Am I doing something? in a way that nobody else in my space is doing this. Do I have a method or a framework that I’m teaching people to get better results than other people in my space? That’s what we need your offers to do. So area number one that you need to nail to scale in 2024 is not only one offer, but your ecosystems of, uh, of offers to make sure that they are predictable.

    [00:11:38] tangible, delivering amazing results, and they’re scalable for you and efficient to run. Again, you can go into the offer engineer. com because that’s everything that we’re working on here in January with our clients and our podcast listeners and all of our friends live. You can dive into that masterclass with me.

    [00:11:58] Make sure you don’t miss that if you need this. So area number two are relationships. So let me talk about the trend that I am seeing. It’s no longer as important to know everybody in your space. I don’t actually know if it really was. I don’t know everybody in my space. I’ve been here for a really long time.

    [00:12:21] What I want you to understand is connecting and building relationships with the right people in the right businesses are what is going to be the one driver to really bring in profit for your business this year. It’s not ad spend anymore like it was 10, eight years ago, seven years ago. Right? Their relationships, relationships, scale, relationships.

    [00:12:43] So, but I know that there are problems running into spending time and investing relationships. Talk about what type of relationships I want you to focus on this year. I want you to focus on relationships with other experts that serve your same audience, but they may do a different thing. So building relationships with colleagues and mutual circles of trust.

    [00:13:05] Think Robert De Niro. And meet the parents, right? So you want to build circles of trust with other experts. These circles don’t have to be huge. They can be three, five, six, seven people at the most that meet your clients. And my recommendation this year is to make time for these relationships. Do things with them.

    [00:13:26] Go on retreats just with this other group of people. Have an opportunity to create a mastermind that is not a paid mastermind. It’s all of you just showing up to a hotel, paying your own way and pouring into each other for three days. These are the things that are going to build your business and scale.

    [00:13:43] And I want you to think about who these people could be in your space. Nixon with relationships is you need to make time to build new ones. If you don’t have enough relationships in your space, you think could be valuable. And of course that you could lend value to one of the things that I do is I have what’s called a coffee calendar.

    [00:14:00] And you know, when you get these LinkedIn messages, Hey, would you like to, you know, connect and, and just get to know each other? First of all, I’m just going to be really honest. I will never give my time to somebody because time, my time is more valuable to me than money. Unless I have already connected with that person in the public feed somewhere.

    [00:14:20] So by the way, if you’re listening to this and you’re one of those cold people that sends DMs saying, Hey, do you want to jump on the call? If you ever send that to me, the answer is immediately going to be no. And you know, you’re wasting my time because you haven’t ever tried to connect with the content that I have put out on the public feed.

    [00:14:37] Um, but for those people that I really do want to connect with, I have this coffee calendar and it’s set up in my acuity calendar scheduler and it’s not about, it’s not a sales pitch. It’s literally just a connection time and I have connection times. Sometimes I have them only one day a month, you guys.

    [00:14:53] Let’s be real. My time is very limited or I have them at one time every single Wednesday afternoon. It’s the one time I know that I can block out. And as soon as those coffee calendar connections are full, I don’t book anymore. I don’t spend any time wondering, Hey, when can I fit this networking thing in, you know, my calendar to meet with this person?

    [00:15:13] I always have this available and open it, but I. Only share it with people that I believe that I can lend value to and people that could be valuable to me and my business as well. So if you have the ability to create a separate calendar, that’s not going to mess up any of your other work time. Do it.

    [00:15:30] Call it a coffee calendar, a networking calendar, just. meet and greet or whatever, and I have virtual coffee with people. It will make all the difference in the world and your business. And I want you to think about honing in on specific people in specific groups that will make the greatest impact for your time.

    [00:15:47] Remember, these relationships are going to be very powerful because these people are going to send you business. You’re going to send these people business and you’re going to create that circle of trust. I believe in 2024. that these relationships will be even more valuable to you than creating content in a marketing process.

    [00:16:07] So if you don’t yet have that sort of coffee calendar designated time to network with people and get to know other people, I highly recommend you do that. Okay. Area number four is marketing. Of course it’s marketing. Yes, we have to market your business, but let’s talk about the trends again that we are seeing here.

    [00:16:27] So if you have been on Facebook for decades and Instagram for decades, and then you tried threads, the trends that we are seeing, we’ve been seeing is that businesses that sell to other businesses are hanging out on LinkedIn. Number one, and the great thing about LinkedIn is you do not have to create. a massive amount of content.

    [00:16:49] You just have to build relationships and share valuable information and give feedback to others that share valuable information. And so in the marketing process, make sure that you’re not just creating content to create content that might not be for you. I’m not sitting here talking to you. I don’t know your business cause this is.

    [00:17:08] Unfortunately, a one sided conversation right here on the podcast. So LinkedIn may not be the place for you, but I’m just saying, I want you to be aware that creating videos and spending thousands of hours on, you know, um, Instagram or even Tik TOK has it like, look at the measurable, measurable results.

    [00:17:25] Has it given you the traction that you’ve needed? If it hasn’t, it’s okay to walk away from things instead of just doing things cause you’ve been doing them for the last five years and you think you need to. Again, less is more. Understand where the actual traction is happening for your business and just focus in on that.

    [00:17:45] The other thing that is really important, which is not a newsflash, but I really want you to make sure that you are normalizing AI. In your processes of creating content. So one thing to look at and just ask yourself and our little check and balance here, do you have SOPs for using AI within your business on a regular basis for creating your marketing content?

    [00:18:08] If you don’t, it’s very, very important. And a few other keys are understanding your primary message on a monthly basis. What do I mean by that? This is especially important for those of you guys who have a B to C side of your business and you may also be moving into a B to B. So if you’ve had courses, trainings, masterminds, VIP days, whatever that is, and you’re also looking into a Content licensing.

    [00:18:35] Maybe you want, maybe you’re here and you’re connecting with us. Cause you also want to know after we build those programs with you, how to actually license them to other companies, right? So your message is going to be different and you need to make sure you’re honing in. What am I saying to a B2C audience?

    [00:18:51] And what am I saying to a B2B audience and just make sure. If you’re foggy on your marketing, if you do not have a marketing team that’s working for you and creating content, number one thing to start with, and just doing this one thing will be a massive game changer is understanding what your primary message is to each one of those audiences on a monthly basis.

    [00:19:12] In January. What is the most important thing you want your audience to know about you in February? Are you selling something in March? What is that most important thing? Just make sure you’ve broken it down month by month, especially if you have two audiences and it’s very, very clear. So area number three to nail and scale, and those are some tips is marketing use AI.

    [00:19:34] But make sure, of course, it’s absolutely unique to you in your voice and never put AI into your, never put your IP into your, um, chat GPT. Okay, so anything that is proprietary, never put it into chat GPT. And then the third area, the fourth area I want you to focus in on for 2024 are your teams. It’s time for you to get the right person in place.

    [00:20:05] If you don’t have this already, that’s going to help you scale. If you can find one person, you can trust one primary person and be able to have them delegate so that you can focus on your areas of genius. 2024 is the year to do that. In, in order to do that, you need to understand what your top priorities are and you need to be able to put a budget behind this.

    [00:20:29] So let’s talk about some of these areas and, and based on how much you’re making. If you are making up to 15k a month, You do need team members. You may get specific niche team members to do specific things. So one person might do your video editing. One person might do your copy editing. You know, one person might post on social media.

    [00:20:52] One person might be your client concierge. That’s totally fine up to 15 K a month. It’s fine to have these teeny tiny little specific, amazing people that do little teeny bits of work for you. When we get to around 20 to 30 K, you’re going to need more operational help. So that is orchestrating all of those people that are doing all the little pieces.

    [00:21:16] And so around 20 K a month, if you don’t have a primary, it could be an online business manager. However, be really careful with that because the term online business manager and those certifications often mean that they are not operationally. Excellent. They just know a software. Be careful for that. I’m talking about somebody that can step into an operations management, see all the moving parts and actually orchestrate all those little team members underneath.

    [00:21:43] That’s going to be around 20. And honestly, when we get to 30 to 40 K a month, these operational bottlenecks are what scale or what stops businesses ever from getting beyond 40 K a month, because our brains is CEOs don’t really. Think like that in most cases operationally. So we need this key person to help see all the moving parts, bring it together to bring you past 40 K a month and statistics show that it 50 K a month is when you actually can afford, uh, to hire somebody else to be more in a COO position for you.

    [00:22:22] So based on where you are, if you’re up to 15 K, you need to be able to delegate if you’re 20 to 30 K. We need somebody to be able to oversee all those little little delegations. So now we have at least two people on your team. If you’re if you’re getting stuck in that bottleneck, then you need to increase your team members.

    [00:22:41] And remember what I said is we need to put a budget behind these team members. And if you’re at 50k, that’s usually around the time when you can really start affording somebody to come in full time into your business while still paying yourself. So these are the four key areas and the trends that we’re seeing that I worry if you don’t nail these areas, it’s really going to severely affect you.

    [00:23:06] In 2024. And so that’s why I picked these key areas. And again, they’re not things necessarily that everybody’s talking about, but I know they will just be a game changer for your business. So the first area again is upgrading your offers. You can charge more, scale them, be more efficient. Doesn’t mean serving more people.

    [00:23:27] It could mean a collection of offers that collectively equal over a million dollars in sales, but they’re all very curated and they all take clients through a predictable journey again. If that’s what you need, cruise over to the offer engineer dot com. This, this masterclass is not for building new offers for new coaches.

    [00:23:50] This masterclass is only for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts that are ready to. Upgrade your offers and scale more. I want to make sure that I’m differentiating that if you are a brand new coach or a consultant, you are not ready for that masterclass. Okay, and that’s it the offer engineer dot com Second way is scaling your relationships really diving into those relationships making them a priority Creating a collection of people that you can rely on that are your peers without paying 10 a year for a mastermind and just leaning into building these relationships Maybe investing in a little trip or a virtual mastermind with this group of people and really pouring into them This is going to be a game changer for you and your business if you make this a priority and set aside the time in 2024 The third thing is your marketing process really important.

    [00:24:40] We need to streamline your marketing process using ai And if you have a B2C side of your business and a B2B side of your business, make sure you know who you’re communicating with and where and on what platforms and what your signature talks are and what your services are to each one of the areas.

    [00:25:00] And Again, moving on beyond that is your teams. Make sure that you have the right people in the right place doing the right things. And then we broke down the numbers of what those financial thresholds are that are typical of what you can afford based on your business. And these are the key areas that I really want you focusing on because when you focus on these and when you nail these In 2024, it’s going to make a significant difference in your business and I want that difference I actually want to hear from you about which ones of these that you’re going to lean into first Please connect with me on linkedin at April beach and let me know that you listen to this show.

    [00:25:39] Let me know which of these four areas that you’re going to dive into first. And I want to end this episode by saying that I don’t want this to be overwhelming. Again, we’re talking about doing more, getting bigger results with doing less. So getting more, doing less, by focusing on the, how you curate these areas in your business, it’s going to make a significant impact.

    [00:26:03] And again, I can’t reiterate how important it is to share that the trends in the subject matter, consulting and coaching spaces have completely changed. And there is an open pathway for people like you that maybe you haven’t hit the financial mark that you really want to hit, or maybe you have found trouble keeping up with the Joneses.

    [00:26:30] This is your year. It’s your year to be very specific and true to yourself, your business, your area of expertise and build marketing strategies, offers and relationships that are actually going to get you there. And I want to hear about it as you go along. So thank you so much for listening to this show.

    [00:26:48] This has been episode number 313. You can find all of the show notes and everything we talked about by going to SweetLifeCo. com and clicking on the podcast. And of course, if you ever want to work with us, we have clients all over the world, and I would love to point to you personally. All right, you guys have an awesome first week of the year.

     
     

     

     

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business (Episode 312)

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business

     

     

     
    Summary: 
     
    This one’s for all you independent consultants, coaches, and experts who are looking to grow your business next year. We’re going to chat about what it really takes to build a million-dollar consulting business. 
     
    Yes; you need the right mindset. 
    Yes; you need to be good at what you do
     
    But did you know there’s an actual mathematical formula to determine if your company is capable of hitting a million dollars in gross revenue a year? There is, and in this episode April Beach, an international business strategist, unpacks the key values you need to be aware of that become the inputs for your milliondollar business formula. 
     
    This episode is like your personal guide to growing your business in a smart way. It’s super helpful if you’re working on your own and want to increase your sales without burning out. We’re going to talk about knowing your limits, which is really important, and using that knowledge to make better plans for your business. This way, you can make more money, keep your customers happy, and still have time for yourself! April’s approach has helped people all over the world. She’s got some great strategies that can be tailored to your own unique business.
     
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Assess your Offers: It’s important to really know the ins and outs of the services or advice you provide. This helps you see where you can grow.
    2. Understand Your Limits: Knowing how much you can handle is key. It helps you plan better and grow your business without getting too stressed.
    3. Clean Up Your Offers: Quickly see what offers are dragging you down and where to build improvements 
     
     
     
     
    Resources: 
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    312 

    [00:00:46] Hi everybody. I’m so excited to welcome you to episode number 312. Here on SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, we have made some changes to the show. If you haven’t noticed, we’re actually giving you more free business trainings and tools with every single episode. And so therefore we are dropping our episodes.

    [00:01:07] every two weeks. So if you haven’t noticed that now you can be aware that we’re actually giving you more time to use the materials that we have given you here on the show so that you can actually apply them to your business and continue to grow and continue to make money. We’re getting feedback literally that we’re just giving away so much within a seven day period for the last six years that sometimes you were scrambling to actually utilize it all.

    [00:01:34] And if you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know, that we are known for giving away free business trainings and strategies backed by 30 years of business coaching expertise that other coaches will charge you hundreds and thousands of dollars for. So we definitely want to make sure that you’re able to utilize the tools we give you.

    [00:01:50] So heads up. The show’s dropping every two weeks. Now this episode is very jam packed. I’m actually teaching you a workshop in this episode that we teach to our private clients called method to millions. And because I need you to really have the worksheets to implement. At a higher level, we’re talking about it here on the show, but to really implement the nitty gritty of the method to millions workshop, I’m giving you completely free access to a recorded one hour training where I just recently brought our clients through this method to millions process.

    [00:02:24] And I’m giving you completely free access to all of the worksheets. This workshop is no strings attached. I just want to bless you and honor you for being a listener here in the show. So you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions, and you’ll see there is a cost to it in there. I want you to use coupon code guest again at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:49] com forward slash millions. With an S at the end and use coupon code guest, and you can get full access to the whole one hour workshop and worksheets. But let’s go ahead and talk about what we’re going to talk about here in this episode. So you even know if you’re ready for this level of business strategy.

    [00:03:07] So in this show, I’m going to unpack the importance of engineering your business for capacity so that you don’t hit burnout. Many coaches and consultants and subject matter experts, you know, you, you work so hard and you’re creating new offers and you’re doing all the things, but have you ever stopped to take a minute to actually realize with a mathematical formula?

    [00:03:29] Is to whether or not your business is actually engineered to hit a million dollars, or if you were smashing up against a complete brick wall, that’s what we’re talking about here in this show. That is what the workshop helps you see as well. So we are diving into what is called capacity. We’re talking about offer engineering.

    [00:03:47] offer sweet engineering. And this episode is going to help you have a reflection on the last 12 months is to whether or not what you’re selling and what you’re building is in fact actually going to equal a million dollars in your business. And it might not even be a million. You might be just working on trying to hit.

    [00:04:06] 300, 000 or maybe you’re working to hit your first 100, 000. I’ll be honest with you. This show is an advanced business training for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts who have already passed the hundred K mark. But if you haven’t done that yet, please Pop in here because now, you know, what’s to come and I love pouring into you and, and helping you see some of the strategies that might happen at the next level.

    [00:04:30] So if you’re ready for this, all of the show notes, everything that we are talking about here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Click on the podcast button. This is episode number 312. And again, go right now before you forget and access the free method to millions training by going to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:50] com forward slash millions. Use the coupon code guest. All right. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right. So there are three reasons why your business is not going to hit a million dollars, no matter what you do or how hard you work or all of the best marketing strategies in the world.

    [00:05:11] There are three reasons why you might not be hitting a million dollars, no matter how hard you work, how hard you try. And frankly, how great you are. Those three reasons are your offer design. isn’t done correctly. You have reached capacity on how you have designed your offers and frankly, there isn’t enough time in the year.

    [00:05:30] So reason number one is incorrect offer model design. Each one of your offers needs to be engineered. to correctly ensure that it aligns with your ability to bring enough people in based on how much you charge and how many people you can serve that you’re actually going to hit a million dollars in that offer.

    [00:05:51] So that’s number one. Number two is that inside that offer, Especially depending on how many times you offer it a year, whether you do it one on one, you are going to reach capacity. And then the next one is not enough time. We’ll get into what not enough time last when we talk about marketing. So let’s kind of unpack the problem here.

    [00:06:10] And if you’re frustrated, could you see other strategists and other businesses just consultants having million dollar businesses, it really isn’t maybe just their marketing plan. It’s how their programs and their offers are engineered. So the deal is, is we don’t talk about capacity enough. As a matter of fact, I think business coaches and strategists, it’s a huge missing mark because of the fact that we talk about marketing, marketing, get more people and generate leads.

    [00:06:34] But what happens when we’ve generated all those leads in your offers or your suite of offers? Isn’t engineered to hit that capacity. So the problem is, is if we don’t pause to talk about the capacity of your suite of offers, you are never going to reach a million dollars. It’s like building a house where you need a hundred people to sleep there, but there’s only one bedroom.

    [00:07:01] It’s just physically impossible to do it in. So therefore, I want us to come back here and really understand the process of assessing capacity based on the offers that you are offering and your business offers your offering. I know that sounds silly, but you know what you’re selling your, your programs and services.

    [00:07:20] So. Our goal here today is to help you identify your current offers that you have already done, that you’re already selling, and understand if you have hit a threshold. Also today, I want you to understand that any new offers that maybe you have thought about creating, How do they fit into the math to help you reach that million dollar mark or just replace the word million dollar with your next financial threshold?

    [00:07:48] Uh, and let’s just kind of speak to that for a minute. A million dollars is a lot of money for, um, to generate for a single. Consulting business. It’s very important that we engineer your offers correctly so that you can do that. And so, um, but if you’re, if you’re here, maybe if you’re struggling from money mindset, I don’t want you to shut down this training thinking, Oh my gosh, she’s just another person talking about how to hit a million dollars.

    [00:08:11] I could care less. any number with a million dollars. This math works. If you’re trying to hit 250, 000 or 750, 000 or 350, 000, it doesn’t matter. I want you to use this math because it’s going to give you a huge insight. So the process, the method that I am talking about today is a method I created called mathematical Method to millions.

    [00:08:34] So it’s called a method to millions and the worksheet I’m giving you or the workshop and the worksheets that I’m giving you away for free with this episode are is also called method to millions. And so basically what it is is it’s a mathematical equation to add up capacity. With what you’re charging for your offers with the model of your offers and understanding how many people you can actually fit in that offer in a year to see if you can actually mathematically hit a million dollars.

    [00:09:02] And when you engineer your numbers correctly. Basically, when you engineer your suite of offers correctly, then you can do it. But if you’re looking at these numbers after we go through today and you’re realizing, wow, I can’t do any more of this. I can’t sell any more of this. I’m never going to make any more than 75, 000 on this one thing.

    [00:09:23] Then we have a problem. And that is why I want to help you with this today. You know, the end of the year, depending on when you’re listening to this, it’s the end of 2023. It’s a really important time for us to assess. All of the hard work and how we’re serving our clients and what we’re working on. And so that’s why this topic is so important.

    [00:09:43] So first of all, let’s kind of define capacity. What is capacity? Capacity is the maximum amount of people you can serve and the maximum amount of money you can make based on a certain offer or program you’re selling. Now, let’s define offer or program. So an offer is your consulting service, whether it is a one on one service, whether it is a course or a membership or a retreat or a VIP day or a licensed product or a certification program or a mastermind, whatever it is that you sell.

    [00:10:21] Also for you guys that have done for you services, if you have like an agency or if you have a hybrid where it’s kind of done with you and done for you, that’s, that’s what we’re talking about. Right? So when we’re talking about your offer, it’s what you do, what you sell. And so. Inside every single offer, there is usually a capacity and capacity isn’t bad, right?

    [00:10:44] So I don’t want you to think capacity is terrible, like, Oh, my gosh, everything has to scale. I have to fit 5000 people in this offer. That is a wrong approach. All right. I know there’s a lot of coaches out there that are like, Oh my gosh, you need to build these offers so you can sell it to more people.

    [00:10:59] Frankly, I don’t want to be in any program where I’m like one of 5, 000 people. And you probably don’t either. That was a big trend from 2000 and you know, 13 to 2019. None of us want to be a number in a cattle drive anymore. So first of all, it’s important to know that I am not here advocating that you build all these offers.

    [00:11:19] For a low ticket or even other offers for a super high ticket, you know, so you can fit more people. The most important thing I want you to take away from this episode is you can engineer your suite of offers any way you want. And the very first thing I want you to understand is it how you build your suite of offers and how you serve your clients and what you sell.

    [00:11:42] It’s going to affect your lifestyle. And so I want you to actually stop for a minute and I want you to take an inventory and I want you to think about every single thing you’re selling. So here we go with the step by step training. Step number one is make a list of your current offers that you are selling.

    [00:11:59] And again, I have this cheat sheet worksheet for you where you can get access to it for free. When you access our method to millions workshop for free. So in the left hand column, if you’re visual like me, you’re going to list the name of the offer. So it could be one on one coaching or done for you website services, or, you know, my, my week long retreat in Costa Rica, whatever it is you guys sell.

    [00:12:20] Okay. Left hand call. The next column over and the next step I want you to go through is I want you to understand what is the model of that? Is it done live in person? Is it on demand? Is it a hybrid model? It’s important to look at the model of how you deliver your offer because it’s going to tell us whether or not we’re going to hit capacity, right?

    [00:12:44] So we know, for example, let’s use the retreat. If you have a retreat, so the title of the offer is retreat, the model of it is, One time a year and it’s in person. That’s awesome. That’s very exclusive and and I’m sure you know You’re selling that out because people love those type of experiences But the next step is after we do offer and model the next step is how many people can you actually sell that to?

    [00:13:09] Is it a retreat for 10 people? Is it a retreat for five people? What is the total number, what is, what are, what is, let’s say correct English there, what is the total number of people that’s not correct? Alright, help me out here. What, how many people can you sell this baby to, right? So if it’s a retreat, there is going to be a capacity of a lower number.

    [00:13:29] But if your offer is a course or a training where it’s endless, Fantastic, right? So first is offer. Second is understanding the model of each one of your offers. And the third one is understanding the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer. Here’s the key in one year. So if you have that retreat twice a year, You’re going to say, okay, maybe it’s 20 people total.

    [00:13:53] If you have that course available all the time and you, there’s no limitation. If your model has no limitation, it’s something that’s an on demand training or especially for those of you guys that are getting into licensing. If there’s really no limitation on how many you want to release it to, that’s incredible.

    [00:14:12] That’s awesome. We love that. I want you to put in the goal number of how many seats you want to sell into it. So if it’s on demand with no capacity, the maximum number of people, you’re going to put your goal for the number of people that you want to sell into that program for the year to come. So we’ve done three things.

    [00:14:32] We have assessed your offer. We have assessed the model of how each one of the offers are delivered. And now we’ve assessed the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer in a 12 month period of time. Now. Part four. Hopefully you guys are with me here. Step four is I want you to multiply the per person cost of what you charge for that offer by the number of people you can fit into it.

    [00:15:00] So if you have a course that has your, your goal is to fit, it’s on demand. Your course course name here models on demand. Your goal is to fit, sell it to 100 people. And the course is, you know, five bucks, right? Whatever, that’s terrible. Don’t charge 5 for your course. But you know what I mean? Then you are going to multiply them the maximum amount of money.

    [00:15:23] If you hit your goal, you can make on that is 500, right? So let’s go. Let’s give a different example here. If, however, let’s go to the retreat example. If your offer is a retreat and you char in, it’s, you know, you can sell it to 10 people at a time and you charge 1, 000 for that retreat, then the maximum amount of money you’re going to make on that retreat is 10, 000.

    [00:15:50] So it’s really important to look at the number at the maximum amount of money that you can possibly make. On a particular offer. And you’re going to do that for every single one of your offers. Now, here’s where it really becomes eyeopening, especially for our clients. If you provide boutique elite high end offers, you’re not going to sell that to as many people.

    [00:16:10] So the idea here is understanding this is the offer. I only can take five private clients. Like for me, for example, I only take four private clients a year. That is my capacity. I cannot take more than that. So I know that I cannot make more than four times the amount of money I charge for it, which is currently 33, 000.

    [00:16:30] So I cannot make more than that on actual private clients. So what it does is when I’m looking at my list and I go through this, my team and I go through this every single year, really, I really don’t love pushing private clients because I have a lower capacity for profit with private clients, even though I charge more because I only can take so many.

    [00:16:51] So the process is you are going to have your list of offers. You’re going to have your model. You’re going to understand how your offers are delivered and you’re going to see where you’re hitting capacity. Now, I have so much more. I want to teach you about this and what we do next, but. Our first goal here today is to have you have an understanding of where you might have hit capacity.

    [00:17:14] And frankly, how much time is it taking for these offers to be delivered? When we understand capacity, when we really talk about capacity based on how you are engineering your suite of offers to reach your profit threshold, then you can take a look and you can be like, there is no way I’m going to hit this.

    [00:17:34] Especially if you only have a few different offers, if you only do one on one services and and their boutique services, and that’s what you’re pushing, especially with that done for your hybrid approach, you’re going to hit capacity. And so what else can you be? Should you be? Might you want to engineer so that you can increase your profit across other methods?

    [00:17:57] So again, there are three reasons why you won’t hit a million dollars or 300, 000 or whatever your profit threshold is. Number one, because your offer model design isn’t engineered. I don’t even want to say the word correctly because it’s different for all of us. It’s just your, your list of offers aren’t engineered.

    [00:18:16] to fit enough people into them for the price that you are charging. Now, most coaches will be like, we’ll charge more. Absolutely. If you are at capacity, if you, if your program is sold out, if you have a wait list, if you are selling at a certain rate, it’s time to increase your prices for sure. But in most cases we’re looking at a list of offers and they just aren’t engineered correctly.

    [00:18:41] Either the price isn’t engineered correctly or the offer itself can’t fit enough people. Recognizing that you’re hitting capacity is a very important thing that I want you to be able to do before you go into the hard work of actually promoting the offer and doing the work of doing the launch and the marketing and all the things.

    [00:18:59] See, now you understand why all the marketing in the world, the biggest list in the world, if your offers aren’t engineered correctly and your suite of offers aren’t engineered correctly, you’re never going to hit that seven figure mark because it’s physically impossible based on the way that you’ve engineered your offers.

    [00:19:14] And then here’s the third really important thing that I want to leave you with. And I really do want you to access the method to millions workshop for free because this is where our clients just, their brain just explodes when they realize what we’re going to talk about next. Even if your list of offers, your suite of offers is engineered that you’re going to be able to hit capacity.

    [00:19:36] Sometimes there is not enough time in the year to market and sell them all. It’s really, really important. This is what I mean. You only can sell so often. If you’re out there being like, buy my this and buy my that. And you know, I have, I have all these great things and I want to work with you. Uh, if you’re selling all the time, people are going to stop following you.

    [00:19:58] You only can sell. so much. And if you are looking at your list and you’re like, wow, I can reach them all, but January I have to sell this and the end of January I have to push for that. And then in February I’m going to have everybody, you know, do a campaign to work with me one on one. And then in March I need to start filling up my retreats, but also in March I need to sell this little workshop.

    [00:20:19] If you realize that There is not enough time in a calendar year to actually market and sell all of the things that you have created in order to hit a million dollars. That is also a big problem. And so that’s kind of this aha that people have. So even if the suite is engineered correctly, we’re going to run into a capacity with time in the calendar based on.

    [00:20:46] Basic relational communication skills. The way around that is if you have lower ticket offers, so we can also, we can always run ads to that, you know, we can just keep pouring in ad spend too, but frankly, ads aren’t converting the way they used to, and they’re much more expensive. And so that’s not usually, uh, a first defense to fix this problem.

    [00:21:05] So let’s kind of recap what we talked about. We talked about a process that I teach called Method to Millions. It’s basically a math formula for you to open up your eyes, take a look at your suite of offers, what you currently have and determine whether or not you are actually physically going to be able to hit A million dollars with the programs and services that you’re selling.

    [00:21:23] This is why a lot of our clients love licensing because there isn’t capacity and it’s very little work and very little marketing. Just a little plug. If you’re interested in learning more about licensing, I have a lot of podcast episodes on that here to help you understand what the model of licensing your courses in a nutshell, take a look and be real with yourself.

    [00:21:43] Also understand how often can you realistically sell to your particular audience? And what I want you to do from this is pause for a minute and I want you to remove any offers that are not profitable or taking too much time. I want you to consider also adding new offers or upgrading current offers to increase the capacity.

    [00:22:04] So either increasing more people. Or increasing the amount of money that you can charge for those offers by engineering them better than they have been done in the past. We don’t want to necessarily just always increase the cost. We always want to look at the ROI of what we’re delivering and making sure that you’re ethically increasing your costs, especially in the consulting and strategist space.

    [00:22:24] Great. Okay. So again, this was the method to millions kind of mini workshop here. We’re talking about how to truly build a million dollar coaching business, what it actually takes. It’s not in the marketing. It’s not in the relationship. Those things come later. It comes in engineering the products that you’re selling, which is based from your amazing knowledge and whether or not you’re capable of actually hitting that number.

    [00:22:47] Again, if you want to access the free workshop that I teach exclusively to our clients, you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions and use the coupon code guest. That coupon will only be available for a limited time. So don’t wait to go over there and grab that. And for all of the show notes, the transcript of this, all of the resources and other resources we have for you, please visit SweetLifeCo.

    [00:23:17] com and you can just click right there on the button for the podcast. And I really appreciate you guys. Thank you so much for listening to the show. We are rolling over to year number seven. I absolutely love it. Absolutely. Cannot believe it. And, uh, we’re always here for you. So if you haven’t connected with us on LinkedIn, find me on LinkedIn at April beach.

    [00:23:35] And of course we would love to work with you to bring your business to the next level. Cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com and all of the resources we have are available for you there. Thank you so much. Have a fantastic end of 2023 and we have some exciting episodes to help you kick off the new year coming up here soon.

     
     

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types with April Beach and Charles Byrd (Episode 311)

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types

     

     

    Who is this episode for? 
    Entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of our Online Business Roadmap™
     
     
     
    Summary: 
    This episode is tailor-made for entrepreneurs who have an established training or program but struggle to generate leads or have a smaller list. If you want ways to increase visibility for your business without diving into conventional advertising routes like Facebook or LinkedIn ads, then this episode is a must-listen.  
     
    April’s conversation with JV partnership expert, Charles Byrd, provides an alternative path to business growth that is dependable and requires less effort to generate leads. You will be introduced to the world of joint venture (JV) partnerships through Charles, a renowned figure in this arena. They’ll uncover the four distinct types of JV partnerships, learning how each can be a lucrative option depending on your business’s unique needs. This episode delivers actionable steps on implementing these JV strategies. When you’re finished listening you’ll have more clarity on which type of partnership is best for where you are in business currently. 
     
     
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the 4 types of JV partnerships
    2. Determine which type is best for you based on your offers
    3. Gain confidence in starting JV partnerships even if you have a small offer and no list. 
     
     
     
     
    Resources: 
     
     
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    311

    [00:00:47] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to another episode here of the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach. The host of this show, this is episode number 311. And we are diving in with a friend of mine, Charles Byrd, who’s going to unpack four different types of JV partnerships that feel really good and are very, very profitable for you to get into place for your business.

    [00:01:09] April Beach: So who is this show for? This show is for you. If you have an. Established program or training, doesn’t even matter. The actual cost and the value of that program. Charles is gonna unpack different strategies based on the value of your program here in the show. So if you have an established training or program and you want to get more eyes on you, you don’t probably run ads.

    [00:01:32] April Beach: If you’re like me, you know, Facebook and I had a big, huge divorce that includes my Facebook ads account. And so, you know, and you might not either have the investment or want to invest in running LinkedIn ads. And maybe that isn’t even aligning with your company, but you need to get more eyes on your business in a way that feels really good to you.

    [00:01:50] April Beach: So joint venture partnerships are a great way to do that. And so our guest today. Charles Byrd was referred to me by multiple different people because he is this go to guy on building JV partnerships in the way that he talks about it. And we unpack actually what is a JV partnership and what would be the right next steps for you.

    [00:02:09] April Beach: So if you want to generate your lead, more leads with the right people. In a way that aligns with your time, Charles is very much like I am. He takes his kids to cool places and travels around a lot and just frankly doesn’t overwork himself. He’s been very strategic and actually how he’s modeled his business.

    [00:02:26] April Beach: If you want to do that, get more leads into your business as well as this great episode for you to listen to. So again, this is episode number. 311 and you can visit all of the show notes by cruising over to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash 311 or by just going to SweetLifeCo. com clicking on the podcast.

    [00:02:47] April Beach: This is episode number 311 and everything will be over there waiting for you. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in and meet my friend, Charles. All right, you guys. Thank you for being here this week. I am here with my friend Charles and Charles and I were introduced to each other by a mutual friend who is always looking to connect great people with great people.

    [00:03:07] April Beach: And one of the places that he learned that was from Charles himself. And so Charles has a gifting. of helping you to build your network, build your business by helping you to rethink how you get in front of your ideal audience in a way that it’s a win win for everybody. So I’m really excited to be talking about what we’re going to chat about on today’s show.

    [00:03:28] April Beach: Charles, welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. You want to give people a little bit of a background on who you are and how you got to the point where you are right now in your business and your area of expertise.

    [00:03:39] Charles Byrd: Absolutely. And April, thanks so much for having me. So I help businesses scale with joint venture partnerships, referrals, speaking, and for a little backstory straight into what I do today, I worked in the Silicon Valley for 15 years.

    [00:03:54] Charles Byrd: I was a director at a billion dollar software company. I left to get a taste of the entrepreneurial freedom I read about in books. I started with a low ticket and that’s it. Productivity course and being new to the online space. I didn’t have a list or connections at that time. So started going to a lot of events and connecting with people online and quickly found my new peer group of entrepreneurs already had my ideal clients in their communities.

    [00:04:22] Charles Byrd: So I started setting up presentations to other people’s audiences, delivering a high value training and offering the deeper dive course and started growing my email list quickly, making sales, making a positive impact. So I thought, since this is working, what if I take my it and systems background and simplify and systematize the entire joint venture process, which I did.

    [00:04:47] Charles Byrd: And eventually people wondered how I book. Two to six joint venture promotions per week for my offers to other people’s communities. And I was at a mastermind in Aspen and my phone’s blowing up with texts and messenger messages and people knocking on the room door going, how do you line up so many of these deals?

    [00:05:07] Charles Byrd: So I decided to put together my first high ticket event called pure JV and that’s the market I’ve been serving. Ever since, uh, at this point, that’s through one on one work with companies over five weeks and the steps that we walk people through are creating a unique joint venture strategy for their product and market, help them identify their most profitable partners.

    [00:05:31] Charles Byrd: Show them how to connect to those partners through warm channels. My favorite part, how to guide the conversations to land the deals frequently on the first call. Operationally, how to execute those deals from a systems perspective, and then how to turn each deal into two or three more. Eight of my clients in the first year added 1.

    [00:05:53] Charles Byrd: 25 to 6 million in additional revenue. I had three clients on stage with Tony Robbins last month. teaching them how to create embedded partnerships. So their offers inside of Tony’s, uh, one of my clients, Dr. Dan Pompa just booked on Joe Rogan through his PR company. And I’m showing him how to parlay that into warm intros to Lex Friedman and Andrew Huberman to take that win and take it to a whole nother level.

    [00:06:20] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a way to simply get in front of more of your ideal clients. through other people’s communities, audiences, and, and build amazing relationships on the way.

    [00:06:31] April Beach: And now I’m sure our listeners know why I was so excited to bring you here on the show, because this is, this is exactly what people are looking for.

    [00:06:39] April Beach: And the way you go about doing it, we’ve talked about affiliate launches and we’ve talked about those things. This is completely different. So the way you go about doing this is. is very unique and, um, it’s very relational. And that’s one of the reasons why I have been so interested in working with you as well for a long time.

    [00:06:56] April Beach: And I’ve, I’ve seen the case studies and I know your clients and it’s just what you do. You create amazing results in a way that feels really, really good. So let’s kind of go back to the beginning for our listeners who might not know actually what a joint venture is. Let’s define what JV is for our listeners or people who may be confused.

    [00:07:17] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Uh, so again, coming out of corporate, I, I thought a joint venture has been two big companies like Partner together and they’re basically married. And, uh, this is nothing quite like that. This, you can think of them as promotional partnerships. And I’ll just share a basic example, but I’ll point out there’s, um, you have the product or service.

    [00:07:42] Charles Byrd: Someone else has the audience. And so to use an example of like Brian Tracy, he’s got a, an audience of 500, 000 people who’ve subscribed to receive his emails. They follow him because he teaches sales, productivity, high performance. And so He’ll partner with experts that compliment those topics. And so imagine Brian mailing his 500, 000 people, inviting them to a presentation you’re putting on for your product or service, because it aligns with why people follow him to begin with.

    [00:08:19] Charles Byrd: And then everyone who registers for that training is added to your email list. So you can literally add thousands of people to your list. A day during those promotions and then you deliver a high, high value training in this example, everyone who signs up is a new client of yours and you share revenue with Brian because it was his audience to begin with.

    [00:08:40] Charles Byrd: So that would be like an example of a webinar type of promotion, but it also could be, I’ll cover a few different joint venture types in the process. It could also be me simply sending you a referral if we’ve lined up a referral partnership. That’s a type of joint venture as well. Um, and systematizing the joint venture process.

    [00:09:06] Charles Byrd: Um, in my presentation, I have a slide that says, do you get your referrals by luck or by design? Is it baked into the DNA of, of what you’re doing? So I personally get 12 to 20 referrals to million dollar plus businesses a week through this process. Um, so speaking to other people’s groups. Whether that’s a webinar format or a physical stage, um, referral partnerships, embedded partnerships.

    [00:09:38] Charles Byrd: That’s where as other people make sales of their product or service, you’re making a sale of yours because your offers inside of theirs, which I know April, we were chatting and you were excited because that aligns with some of your licensing strategies, creating embedded partnerships around that. And lastly, it would be social JVs, much like this interview is.

    [00:10:02] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a conversation. Um, this of course gets me some exposure to your audience, April. Um, if I’m promoting this show to my audience, that’s getting you more exposure. So this is another form of, of joint venture, uh, which we never even talked about in those terms. It just happens to be. Another way to think about it.

    [00:10:24] Charles Byrd: Yeah.

    [00:10:25] April Beach: So for our listeners who, um, clearly this is somebody, I’m sure it’s something that almost everybody who’s listening is going to be like, this is, I absolutely need to be doing this. This sounds so smart, but what do they need to actually have in place already? To be in a position to start making these JV partnerships, what sort of content or trainings or what level of expertise do you recommend people have before they start moving into this?

    [00:10:53] April Beach: What’s this? That’s the prerequisite to move into this type of a partnership.

    [00:10:58] Charles Byrd: Sure. So I’ll, I’ll, uh, dive into what those specifically are. Um, also addressing. What are some of the things that hold people back from wanting to do these kind of things? Number one, how, how are these configured? If people don’t know how the deals are put together, then it’s easy to avoid them because they don’t know what the next step is, or they feel they could be complicated.

    [00:11:22] Charles Byrd: Um, and you know, or they, even if they see alignment, they don’t know how to guide a conversation into making that a reality, um, or something I call the reciprocation trap where people feel that. If, if someone else promotes them or their offer that they have to promote the other person’s offer, which is simply a story in our head, that’s not actually true.

    [00:11:49] Charles Byrd: Um, or one person’s audience is way bigger and they feel they’re not big enough to participate yet, which is again, just simply a self. limiting, um, thought. So the prerequisites, as, as you asked, are as follows. Now, based on the different JV types, um, some of them have more requirements than others to be able to achieve technically.

    [00:12:17] Charles Byrd: So let’s start at the simple side referrals. Not a lot of infrastructure required for referrals, so you can simply have a conversation with a friend, a peer, a client and talk through who right fit. Connections are for your product service, product services or rooms that you may want to get in front of minimal infrastructure.

    [00:12:45] Charles Byrd: We’re talking texts, emails, uh, those kind of basic things. So, and, and, you know, some way to track. Those from a spreadsheet to however, you feel like tracking them, um, which of course we have super dialed systems for and then, um, to a little more advanced where if you’re doing something like a webinar, like the example I shared regarding Brian Tracy, you would need a little more infrastructure in there’s layers to have very simple approaches versus more advanced, but in general, if you were doing something like a webinar, you would want it.

    [00:13:26] Charles Byrd: emails for a partner to be able to send out on your behalf so that they’re promoting it to their audience because you’re not going to have them write your emails. You’ll share them so their job is easier. Um, then those emails will have links to register for a training. That would mean you’d need some type of landing page where someone can read what the presentation’s about.

    [00:13:50] Charles Byrd: If they’re interested in it, they can sign up. And as they put their name and email in, those folks are getting added to your email list. So you’d have some type of autoresponder email tool to collect those, uh, leads coming through from the registrations. You’d need a tool to be able to deliver the webinar, something like Zoom or GoToWebinar, something like that.

    [00:14:12] Charles Byrd: Point being… Each strategy has its own specific, uh, systems and tools behind it. But keep in mind, a lot of these can be very straightforward. So certainly don’t get intimidated by the tools. It just has to do with which approach is the best for your business and to kind of cut to the chase a little bit on that, if you have higher ticket offers.

    [00:14:38] Charles Byrd: Your, your offers are more expensive. We’re talking 10, 15, 20 K, um, doing big promotions. Isn’t even a good use of your time. You want to simply get in front of your ideal clients going straight to where they are. So where are affluent, uh, entrepreneurs? Well they’re in other high ticket masterminds. They’re in other high ticket programs.

    [00:15:06] Charles Byrd: That, that’s where I spend my time is presenting to rooms full of million dollar plus businesses. So I can do one presentation, which by the way, I’m not even making an offer. I haven’t made an offer in front of a room in probably three years, but I walk off the stage and everyone who’s interested comes and has a chat.

    [00:15:28] Charles Byrd: We line up a followup call and a bunch of those become. Um, clients and then I meet with them a year later and many of them have, they’re over a million in, in a new revenue just from that. So, um, in any case, those are some of the JV types, some of the, uh, uh, reciprocation trap things that can hold people back.

    [00:15:49] Charles Byrd: But really what I want to highlight is it’s a new way of thinking of everyone you meet. They know someone who could be an ideal client for you or an ideal partner for you. So it’s, it’s building better relationships to get to those winning outcomes.

    [00:16:06] April Beach: Yeah. You said, you said so many things there. I want to pull out again and just highlight.

    [00:16:10] April Beach: First of all, is that oftentimes when you speak, you aren’t actually making an offer. And I think that our audience would assume that you’re coming in and you’re doing an actual sales webinar or a training, which could obviously be the case as well. But. Yeah. In what you said, in the way you do it, going in and just organically teaching your area of expertise or introducing a different thought process regarding, you know, what is the solution that you provide?

    [00:16:38] April Beach: That is, I think that feels really good. That’s one of the things that you do that I love the most because that really aligns more with. how we operate as a company. And I think a lot of our listeners are going to are going to find that as well. And I think just allowing for our listeners to, um, perhaps even get permission, maybe they need to realize that it’s okay to go and teach and pour in without feeling the need to sell and sell and sell in.

    [00:17:10] April Beach: According to your system and your process, you’re actually more profitable possibly because you don’t. Actually do that.

    [00:17:18] Charles Byrd: Yeah, absolutely. So again, I’ll draw these distinctions that could be helpful for people to self place where they may fit the best with some of these JV types. For one, I think everyone listening should lean into referrals.

    [00:17:34] Charles Byrd: It’s simple. It’s, it’s, uh, highly effective. Um, especially this doesn’t mean just from your own clients. I mean, I get a ton from clients, but it’s from my peer group. It’s from my friends. In fact, before we hit record here, you and I scheduled a call to line up great connections for each other. How much did that cost either of us?

    [00:17:56] Charles Byrd: Nothing. Um, so, uh, number one, start there. I will make a distinction with, uh, like my offers are quite high ticket because of the value they bring. But I’ll point out if if I had a two K offer or five K offer, I would be in front of broader groups. And I would be making offers in those presentations. It just has to do with where you are in the market where I’m talking to more advanced businesses in general anyway.

    [00:18:32] Charles Byrd: And when they hear a strategy that they don’t have in place and they want in place in a way, they don’t need to be sold. They’re like, I want that. So, um, whereas when I was running a group programs, which I did for many years, I’d actually fill them from, well, I guess three main places. One, I would do broader webinars and the call to action was to a sales call.

    [00:18:58] Charles Byrd: And, and so that would be people mailing their lists like that example, the Brian Tracy one, um, and I would present to the mid level masterminds, people in groups that are eight, 10, 15 K. Which those are way smaller groups, but they’re, they’re full of ideal clients. These people have invested in themselves.

    [00:19:20] Charles Byrd: They’re, they have enough traction in their business to do that. And typically the further along a entrepreneur is the way easier it is to help them because they have so many other ducks in a row. Um, and I’ll point out by consciously choosing to move up market Your life gets way easier.

    [00:19:42] April Beach: I’ve heard people say that for years and it wasn’t until I started doing that myself where I actually believed him.

    [00:19:48] April Beach: I think that was in the beginning, there was just a lot of intimidation there, but uh, over the years I, I realized you’re completely right about that. So that’s a really good distinction to my, yeah. My next question was going to be what, what is the vow? Who do you best connect with based on the value of your offer?

    [00:20:02] April Beach: And I know our listeners have offers absolutely from, you know, a few thousand dollars up to, up to 10 K whereas other, uh, other of our, our listeners have 50, 000 programs that they deliver as well. So what I’m hearing that you just said is based on the actual product that you’re selling, that’s where you’re going to The way that you would approach and deliver your content within this JV partnership would be based on the actual, um, really financial level or the audience.

    [00:20:33] April Beach: Um, I don’t want to say maturity because that’s not right. Uh, the, the audience, how advanced the, the buyer is with, with correlation with that offer in what they usually tend to need to buy because you’re right, because, you know, are more advanced or profitable entrepreneurs. They have their teams, they have their systems, they’re not so busy, uh, in the things that those people that are, are trying to break like that.

    [00:20:58] April Beach: 30 or 40 K a month ceiling or try all of those processes that, that tend to need to be brought into place for those other kind of mid level entrepreneurs. So that’s, that’s a really, really good point. So let’s kind of recap again, some of these, you said there are four primary types of JV partnerships that you love to guide people through.

    [00:21:20] April Beach: Can we recap those one more time? So I’m just trying to cover those again for our listeners.

    [00:21:25] Charles Byrd: Yeah. So number one is presenting to other people’s audiences. And you could kind of put that in a few camps, um, that could be, uh, speaking on a stage in front of a physical room. It could be presenting virtually to a group and, and then the caliber of that group, it, it could be a higher level group or it could be a broader webinar to a big list, a big audience.

    [00:21:51] Charles Byrd: Um, so all of those are. Presenting to a group number two referral partnerships again, highly recommend these and keep in mind referrals. Don’t have to just be to clients. Although those are lovely. Of course, you can get referrals to joint venture partners. You can get referrals to stages like If you want more podcasts, get your referrals to podcasts.

    [00:22:16] Charles Byrd: So you, you aim the cannon at what you are after. Um, then there’s embedded partnerships. Again, this is where there’s different configurations, but in general it’s where your product or service is inside of someone else’s offer or some of your content is in someone else’s offer that’s like a lead source for you.

    [00:22:39] Charles Byrd: And those are Some of my favorite because you’re making a singular deal that represents ongoing lead flow. Um, and just to cite an example of that, uh, one of my clients, Jackson Milan, um, came to me when it was at 1. 8 million a year later is over 6 million in cash collected through joy ventures. He was running Facebook ads that weren’t working particularly well and started working a lot worse when Facebook shut down his account and That’s when he was referred over to me and he’s a quick start.

    [00:23:13] April Beach: I love Jackson I’ve taught I’ve taught a master class in Jackson’s group before I think Jackson actually might have been one of the people that originally introduced us now that I’m thinking back before our other friend Brian this is So I, I’ve seen the ins and outs of how Jackson’s stuff works and, and you’re a genius, my friend.

    [00:23:37] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Um, Jackson, he, this guy’s he implements, so he booked, he hired me. We dove in on a strategy, identifying ideal partners, how to land those partners. He, he landed 70 joint ventures in two months, which is. Um, and then I taught him how to create embedded partnerships, and he lined up 15 of those. Uh, he more than tripled the business all the while touring Australia with his wife and two dogs in a four by four camper van before buying a farm by the, uh, Ocean and jungle.

    [00:24:14] Charles Byrd: Um, he wrote an intro for me two weeks ago. I, I think I got a screenshot of it. He does this intro and he’s like, Charles has made me more money than any human on planet earth. Right.

    [00:24:27] April Beach: Right. I believe it. I, I believe it. Um, Absolutely. What a great case study. And I, and I, and I love, so I can like continue to share a little bit, you know, with, with our audience that I, that I’ve actually been within his ecosystem, um, and seen that.

    [00:24:44] April Beach: And it’s a very well oiled machine. I will say that.

    [00:24:49] Charles Byrd: Yeah. He’s done a beautiful job. Um, I want to point one other thing out is, uh, I started with joint ventures off a 200 product, so you can do this the whole way. Like, and it is a risk free lead source, meaning. You only pay commission on sales that have been made.

    [00:25:13] Charles Byrd: So some, some promos work great. You send your partner money. In fact, I made a sale earlier today from a referral from a good friend of mine. And I’m like, remind me your PayPal, like going to send him money. Um, now keep in mind, he didn’t do the intro to make money. He did it because it’s the right fit for that person, but who doesn’t like getting money in the process?

    [00:25:37] Charles Byrd: So again, 200 product. Successfully jv’d with that. And then as, as I evolved as a entrepreneur and prices went to 2k and then five and then eight and have continued. Up past 45 for different offers. Um, it’s the strategy the whole time. Um, I, I do, I guess personally like it when folks offers are a little higher ticket because they can ROI me so fast.

    [00:26:08] Charles Byrd: Um, just as an example of Todd Hartley, he’s got his core offer was an 8k offer helping. businesses leverage video in their sales process to increase conversion. Um, Tony Robbins hired him to train all of his sales sales teams across his companies that worked so well that now Tony has him on stage for business mastery.

    [00:26:30] Charles Byrd: And he wanted to learn to JV with other people, not just Tony. So within four weeks of working together, he’d. We helped get this whole system in production. He’d lined up six JVs. He happened to pay me 35 K. His first joy venture brought 125 K next joy venture, 125 K. He’s added a hundred thousand a month for the last five months in money.

    [00:26:57] Charles Byrd: He never had previously. So, um, Anyway, with higher ticket offers, like not that everyone does this, mind you, but if, if he can four or five X his money on deal number one, but he’s lining them up multiple per week going forward, it’s a pretty nice thing.

    [00:27:16] April Beach: That’s a pretty great way to justify the investment of the genius you bring to somebody’s business too.

    [00:27:22] April Beach: I mean, this is just like, it’s, it’s great for him. It’s great for you. Um, I want all of our listeners to be thinking about just. Totally a little sidebar here. You guys, um, on your program, you know, can, can, can your students, uh, you know, four or five times the ROI on your program to besides the JV side of it.

    [00:27:43] April Beach: And, uh, it’s always something to, to be mindful about, or how long would that take them or actually what do they need to. do to be able to do that. So this is such a great conversation. Okay. So I think because I totally sidetracked us, you talking about Jackson. So we went over the four, the four basic types.

    [00:28:00] April Beach: Of course, I have my notes here. Cause I, I love learning from you. If you talked about presenting in front of other people’s groups, we talked about the referral partnerships. We talked about the embedded. Um, partnerships, which you and I both love you from a JV standpoint, me from a licensing standpoint.

    [00:28:17] April Beach: Those are just so powerful and so simple. Um, did I miss the

    [00:28:20] Charles Byrd: fourth one? What’s number four? And the fourth one was a social JVs, much like this kind of interview. Social. Oh my

    [00:28:27] April Beach: goodness. So cool. Um, my friend, I have, I have my chicken scratch notes here that I’m going to turn into our show notes, which I’m sure will turn into more resources for our listeners to, to recap, because there was so much, so much wisdom here in this show.

    [00:28:42] April Beach: So thank you. Thank you very much for your time and sharing this. How can people get into your ecosystem? How can people tap into where do you hang out? Uh, how can they continue to learn from you and, and tap into your world? Like, like our company is tapping into your world.

    [00:29:01] Charles Byrd: Oh, wonderful. Well, thanks.

    [00:29:02] Charles Byrd: Thanks for asking. Uh, simply pop over to charlesByrd. com B Y R D it’s got more info on that. the kind of work we do. There’s ways to, to reach me and the team through there. Um, I’m also on Facebook, Facebook slash dot com slash Charles Byrd, B Y R D. I don’t use LinkedIn a ton, but you can find me on there too.

    [00:29:26] Charles Byrd: Um, so yeah, these would be good places to, to connect. Awesome. Thank

    [00:29:31] April Beach: you so very much, Charles. I love learning from you and appreciate you pouring into our community and your

    [00:29:36] Charles Byrd: time here. My pleasure. Thanks for having me.

    [00:29:41] April Beach: All right. What a great episode with Charles. As you heard, and we’ve talked about affiliate launches before on this show.

    [00:29:49] April Beach: You’ve met others that have been in here. Um, I will say to you that personally, one of our strategies is a company that We have been leaning into for the last couple of years is having me teach and other business masterminds in that sort of, um, you know, way number one here is presenting other people’s groups.

    [00:30:08] April Beach: I’ve even taught a podcast on how to create a training program that’s aligned for your next step. here. If you want to go back and relisten to that, um, on how to teach a masterclass and other programs, the way Charles does it, you guys is it’s just so organic. I don’t want to use, I don’t want to use the word authentic because unfortunately I think that great year, that great word has been overused, but it’s very organic and it’s a good fit.

    [00:30:34] April Beach: So my summary for you here is, if you do have a higher ticket, Definitely make sure you’re connecting with Charles Moore. It’s charlesbyrd. com. And especially for those of you guys that hang out on Facebook, it sounds like he’s over there on Facebook and connect with him more, follow along. He’s, he’s very, very smart and, uh, in giving man and will lead you in the right direction.

     
     

    Episode 243: How To Make The Most Of Your Time On Clubhouse – with April Beach and Annabelle Bayhan

    Annabelle Bayhan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab Annabelle’s FREE Clubhouse Productivity Planner!

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs with limited time, who are looking to grow a warm audience with Clubhouse. 

    Summary:

    Clubhouse is an amazing platform to grow your audience, but most of our listeners have limited time and you want to be strategic about how you spend it. So, in this week’s episode, we dive in with Annabelle Bayhan, Clubhouse marketing expert, to clarify 3 strategic objectives that can save you time and make you money while using the app. We also pull back the curtains on our Clubhouse to Masterclass sales funnel, and tell you exactly how to increase sales with decreased time.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the 3 money making activities on Clubhouse
    2. Know the 3 secondary strategies that will lead to money down the road
    3. See our complete Clubhouse sales funnel

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hi guys. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 243, and I am April beach host here and founder of the Sweetlife company, where we help coaches, consultants and niche experts,

    launch and scale your company online through proven strategies with decades of business success. And here on this podcast, it’s our extension where you can get business trainings that you can bank on. So welcome to the show today. We’re talking about how to make the most of your time on clubhouse. Now, this is a really important topic because if you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know that I am a big clubhouse fan. We dove in headfirst into clubhouse last December, and it’s been a really great special platform to build relationships. And for us to grow our list as a business, we’ve had multiple clubhouse episodes that we’ve recorded. You are welcome to search those on how to get started on clubhouse and how to grow your club. But today we’re talking about kind of the elephant in the room here in that is how to make the most of your time on clubhouse, because we like many people dove in to clubhouse, but we have also taken the last three months off of the app for the summertime for us to travel in. So have the majority of leaders that we moderate rooms with, they have taken time off the app as well, but as seasons change, everybody’s diving back into clubhouse. Now, as we go into September and October and the end of 2021. And so the real question is how do you make the most of your time? What are the activities that you can be doing in order to make money in a limited amount of time and be really strategic about what you’re doing on clubhouse in a way that really aligns with your business. And so this particular episode is great for those of you guys who do have a limited time, and you’re looking to grow your warm audience and increase sales using clubhouse. This is also great for you guys in any phase of my lifestyle, entrepreneur business roadmap, if you are not sure what phase of business you’re in, you can go take a little quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are and what stage of business and give you a checklist of what you should be focusing on to grow your business to the next profit stage. You can grab that anytime by going to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. So now let’s go ahead and talk about what you can expect from hanging out with us here today. This is the deal, you know, clubhouse is an amazing platform to grow your audience, but most of you guys have really limited time and you want to be strategic about how you spend it. So in today’s episode, we’re going to dive in with Annabel by hand. Now she is a friend I met on clubhouse. She’s one of the many amazing business friends that I have met on the app. And she’s a clubhouse marketing expert in today’s show. We’re going to talk about three different strategic objectives that can save you time and make you money while using the app. We’re also talking about three other secondary activities that are also great to do on the app, based on your goals, that you are setting your strategic objectives for the time that you spend there. And then at the end of this show, I actually pull back the curtain and you can totally hack our funnel. I lay out our entire clubhouse list, growth to sales funnel into our, OFFER ENGINEER™ MASTERCLASS, how we did it at the beginning of this year and how we’re actually about to start it again right now. So I just give you everything and I lay it out there for you, so you can see how we’re doing it because it works really well. And when things are working really well, we want you to be able to apply those strategies in your business too. So at the end of this episode, you’re going to know the three moneymaking activities to do on clubhouse. You’re going to know the three secondary strategies. You can also do that lead to money, just not immediate money in your pocket, but there are also good activities to do on the app. And you are going to understand and know our complete clubhouse sales funnel and that’s ours at the Sweetlife Company. So I frankly just give you all of that. I try to give you so much here on the show and just lay it all out there for you. So let’s talk about our expert and our guests. So first of all, I met Anabel on clubhouse. And when you spend any time on clubhouse, you can just tell the people you want to hang out with and the people that you want to get to know more. And she’s really one of those people where I had my eye on her in the beginning, and she kind of shares her story about how she has risen as a clubhouse marketing expert, which that in itself is a really amazing lesson about just diving in, even when people around you think that maybe that’s not such a great idea. And so you’ll get to hear her story. And she is the founder of clubhouse for bosses in the business and digital marketing strategists for coaches and consultants who want to increase their influence income and impact using clubhouse prior to becoming a business and marketing coach Annabel worked with digital marketing for over a decade. And you can learn more about Anabel by visiting Annabel bay han.com. And of course, we will go ahead and link to that in this show. She also gives you her whole entire clubhouse productivity strategy workbook. And so you’re really getting a ton out of this episode. So I hope you stick with us if you want to grow your business on clubhouse and you have very limited time. Like I do, like Annabelle does, like most of our clients do. Then this is a really important episode for you to listen to in order to get all of the loaded and free things that Annabel has for you and all the notes for this show, you can visit Sweetlifeco.com simply click on the podcast button. And this is episode number 243, and Annabel will be live with us because we are just kicking off our wave makers, mastermind rooms again on Tuesday night after our three months off. We’re so excited. We had a room this evening in there and it was just so great to see so many faces and people we haven’t spoken to in a long time. So we hope that you join us Annabel. We’ll be live in clubhouse with us in the wave makers club, talking about the same things we’re talking about here on the podcast and taking your questions. So make sure you’re following Annabel. You’re following me at April beach on clubhouse so that we can connect with you and help you grow your business further through clubhouse and other proven online business strategies. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive by then. All right. Hi, you guys. We are so excited to be talking again today about clubhouse. Yes. My new favorite. I have my friend Annabel here with us today and I asked her to come because of the fact that she has really become the clubhouse guru when it comes to building your business on clubhouse. And whereas I totally went Mia and took three months off of clubhouse this summer. You have people like Anabel who have been consistently on this app, understanding the ins and the outs and the strategies of business, and really being faithful to watching this app grow and helping you grow in your business. So I’m so excited to invite Annabel today, to come and talk to us about the realities of how to use clubhouse as a strategy, but also for people like me and probably most of our listeners, how to actually fit this into your life and your time and your business. So welcome to this Wheatland entrepreneur podcast and about, we are so glad that you are here. Thank you for having me. I love your whole entire kind of transition into being the marketing guru, the business guru of clubhouse. Can you just briefly tell everybody a little bit about your business and how you help entrepreneurs? Yeah, So I am the founder of clubhouse for buses it’s to my knowledge, one of the very first business coaching programs using clubhouse. Before that I’ve worked behind the scenes with a lot of small businesses growing their businesses. Many of them being, you know, people who work on Instagram and they teach people how to use Instagram to grow their business. And so I was very familiar with the model and actually very interested in doing it for myself. And so when I noticed that clubhouse was something that’s up and coming there was nobody working like this in this space yet. I thought, okay, this is my chance to be a very early adopter of this app and teach people what I know about growing businesses from, you know, Facebook and Instagram and LinkedIn. It’s all very similar model with a different basically funnel head, I guess you could say, or a marketing positioning. And so I decided to just dive right in, like right when I had 300 followers, which was really intimidating and I would go into rooms and tell people that like I was a clubhouse for a business coach and they would laugh at me, but now seven months later that has worked really well because I positioned myself very well to be somebody that people turn to for this information. But like I said, I took like about 10 years of experience growing companies, whether corporate or small business, all in my overbroad company called scalability, marketing and coaching, where I’m now taking those principles and those concepts, but I’m making them applicable to clubhouse specifically. Well, I love that you dive right in. Okay. So let’s just take a pause for any of our listeners. Like this is the story of growth and success. You guys, it goes with diving in, even when other people might be like, oh, what is she doing? Or who does she think she is to do that? So like, this is a perfect example of how you only need to focus on your vision, what, you know, you’re supposed to be doing and just like race, horse blinders on and dive fully in. So take Annabel’s experience, apply it to wherever you are, if you are afraid to die fully into something, but you know, you should be and you want to be, go for it. So that’s a whole entire separate podcast episode. I love that you share that. So let’s go ahead and roll into what we’re going to talk about today. So here are the problems that we know entrepreneurs experience on the app definitely burn out for sure, from being on clubhouse in the middle of December, I think is when I joined clubhouse and fashion, I don’t even know how many of there, a couple of thousand, maybe at the most. And it was so exciting to be on there in the beginning. And I remember like we don’t fully in, and I loved having these amazing, authentic conversations. And I know that other entrepreneurs felt the same way because basically we had been so disconnected in the world with what has happened until we’re craving these amazing conversations. And then I discovered something that I know you’re going to talk about today, which is the goal of professional and personal development. And I was able to literally sit at the feet of people like Myron golden and go through total masterclasses on live virtual events with people like Barry and blue. I mean, and really be in these spaces with these leaders that I otherwise never could have had an opportunity to become connected with and now become, you know, business professional friends with. And so it was really amazing in the beginning. But then as a mom of three kids, I owned five companies. All of a sudden I really started feeling that fatigue as well, especially as we got into our summer travel season. And I know that so many other businesses feel that way. And so it’s so important what you teach and your expertise because I love clubhouse, you know, we’re back on it. Jose, I think I was telling you that behind the scenes, before we started recording we’re back on it tonight, launching our regular weekly wave makers mastermind room, which is so much fun. And I’ve really missed everybody, but man alive, we have to have a strategy behind this in order. It’s like not a sprint, it’s a marathon for sure. Can you talk about some of the things that you have noticed are problems with businesses in having a long-term strategy for this and maybe some of the stuff that you’ve even experienced yourself and being consistent on clubhouse. Yeah. Yeah. So I’m going to tell you three places. You could spend your time on clubhouse that won’t pay your bills. So let’s start with that. And one big mistake that I think people make right from the beginning is not being clear about why they’re on clubhouse, what they’re there to do and who they want to be known as on clubhouse. And this is the same for every single social media network, right? If you go on social media and your purpose, there is either. So here’s the first one, your own personal development, although it’s great. It won’t pay your bills unless you turn it into something else and give yourself that time to implement it, your own entertainment, right? You can go on Instagram all day and take talk and watch them all day long, but they won’t pay your bills. And the last one really is something that’s more of a long-term strategy, which is networking, right? It’s great to network with people, but if you aren’t getting yourself positioned and your brand position to actually convert people when you’re just meeting people, it’s all fluffy. It’s all nice. You might be developing. You might feel really good. But you know, when we think about burnout and we think about business owners is that it feels really good until it really doesn’t. And so you start asking yourself, like, I’ve actually invested a bunch of time on this app and all of a sudden, now I’m asking myself, why did I just do that? Like, it felt really good. I was lonely. I made some friends, but now, okay, I’m six months in and I spent 20 hours a week on an app. What does this actually mean for me and my future? And this is the point that I think a lot of clubhouse users are coming to. And a point that I want to maybe help people avoid if they’re just getting on the app or just building a strategy around how to use it, because it’s real, right? Because here’s the thing. Unlike Facebook or Instagram or LinkedIn, really, where you could pay someone else to actually engage for you, get in front of your audiences, you can pay ads. You can’t do that on clubhouse. It’s you in a room talking to people. Now the power of it is that when you’re in a room, talking to people, you build relationships, you build networks, you get yourself in front of prospective clients, but if you’re not in the right place and you’re not talking and you’re not in the right positioning, and you’re not clear about what you want to do, all of that is literally just wasting time. And you have to decide, like, there are moments of my day where I want to scroll tech talk because it’s stress relief for me, it’s fun. But if I do that every day, I’m not going to reach my goals. So I think what it comes down to is like to avoid burnout in the first place. What do you really want in your life? What is that driving force? What is that life that, that you want to design? And then as we kind of like get behind that, we can then say, okay, how can we use clubhouse to create that? And that’s what I’m really passionate about. I think that, you know, something that a lot of people don’t know is that like underneath every single thing that I do it’s to empower women, to have more decision making power, because they’re able to create and monetize the lives that they love. Like every single thing that I do clubhouse is just the tool that I use to do that. And so for me, that’s why I drive that message so clear. And that’s the best way to avoid burnout is know what you want, if you know what you want. It’s so easy to say, like, is the action that I’m taking right now getting me what I want. And then when you say, no, it’s very easy to not do that thing. So yeah, that’s what I wanted to say, Writing down your quotes and like writing them down here and I’m going to go make these quotes and put them out on it. You are so, right, right. So like, understanding why are we doing this? How does this play a role in the bigger part of this? And that’s why I’m so excited to have you here on this show. Because as you know, like that’s everything we talk about, it’s reverse engineering, the lifestyle, and then we build the business to get you there. So love everything you’re saying, of course, which is why I love you. So let’s talk about the ways that do make you money on clubhouse. And let’s kind of hone in on those business trainings. There are three primary ways that you teach entrepreneurs and small businesses to interact into function on the clubhouse app. And so can you dive into, let’s start with number one, what is the first money-making way for somebody to spend their time on this app? So it’s awareness, right? It’s building visibility around who you are. If nobody knows you on the app, nobody’s coming to your room is going to be very hard to then take them down the rest of the journey. This is something that I actually see a lot of people getting in the awareness trap, right? It’s very addicting. Especially for entrepreneurs. We get a little bit mixed up with like, oh, I can grow here. And so we come to this point where we have to decide how much exposure do I actually want before I try to then take people along a journey to actually sell something to them. And that’s also a very personal question. How much time do you have, right? How much time does your business have before you need to drive leads before you need to turn this traffic into leads and what would best serve the people that you’re generating awareness around. Right? If you kind of like go on a clubhouse stage and you’re talking about something that people could really use more information on that they could use more of a transformational journey, and you’re not providing that, just be rest assured that your competition will, right, but you might be the person to like create the awareness around it. You might be the person to let those people know that they have their problem, right? Those are like kind of two things to really think about, like how much time do you want to spend as simply building your account, building up your social media profiles. That’s more of like an influencer strategy, but also every single brand, every single business needs people to know that they exist. And so the ways that you really do that on clubhouse is by either being on other people’s stages within other people’s clubs, opening up rooms within other people’s clubs. And of course, opening up your own rooms with other mud squads and you know, that type of thing. And the whole goal of this awareness strategy is really to get in front of as many new people as possible and have them remember you for what you do, right? So you want to make sure that your bio set up, you want to make sure that you have a clear introduction. You want to make sure that the rooms that you’re going to are going to make sense with, you know, the topics that you open up when you open up a room, you know, you don’t want to be like in a music room talking about how you like create business strategy, right? It probably would not make as much sense, but people literally do this. Like you want to be in a place where you can get in front of an audience that needs what you do. So the first question you want to yourself is, you know, from my ideal client, from the person that I want to be on clubhouse, whether or not you’re becoming it, you’re it, whatever it may be, where are the people that you could serve the most sitting on clubhouse right now and showing up in those places in the biggest way possible. That is what the awareness phase looks like is getting people to really know who you are, Where are the people that you can serve the most on clubhouse right now. And so for those people that are new and they haven’t actually dove into clubhouse, let’s give them a hack. How would they find those people? What are some of the ways they can use the app to actually find their people that they want to be in front of? Yeah. So something really cool is happening right now on clubhouse, where they’re using interests, that’s to tie in people and clubs together. So the first thing you can do is really make sure that your interests match the interests of the ideal client that you’re trying to actually attract. So for business owners, when they’re setting up their clubhouse profile, I recommend that you try to show up in the places where your ideal customer is going to be. And then you can add in a couple of your own interests, but for now I think that’s very smart to make sure that that’s niche down to your category. So that clubhouse begins to recommend you in the places that matter most. So clubhouse did not use to recommend people based off their interests, but they’re about to, so I want everybody to set up their interests. The next is to make sure that you show up in keyword search for your industry. So whatever that ideal client might be searching for, make sure that you show up in your bio and your entire clubhouse bio is searchable. So just make sure that those keywords and you can use a lot of them are all there, but also reverse engineer that right? If we know that people are putting keywords in their profiles, we can also go out and find the community leaders, the thought leaders, the people that might want in our network, the people we might want to be on stages with the people who have already collected the community. We can go through and follow some of those people so that we start to see their rooms in our hallway. And then the last way is really using that keyword search in a similar way, but for clubs and I think clubs, they work very much like Facebook groups. There’s something that we’re all, you know, intuitively aware of, but maybe not everybody is as strategic about it. When they first joined, they probably think, what clubs do I want to be in. But then we’re always asking the question, which club does my ICA most likely spend time in. Right? And so those are the things that you want to ask yourself, because what this is going to do is basically open up the content and the communities that are already being created with your ideal client already in it. It’s going to accelerate your growth because when you show up in those places, when you’re like, okay, I want to become aware of there’s a room of like 100 to 200 people that are all within my ICA set. I’m going to get up. I’m going to talk, I’m going to build awareness. It becomes very easy, but all we have to do is make sure that we’re showing up in the right places. And the best way to do that is really through keyword search to start from there though, what’s really cool about clubhouse. And I don’t know if this level of visibility is going to always be available, but if you find somebody that’s a thought leader in your space, you find somebody that maybe is serving your ICA. Maybe they’re complimentary to you. You can go through their entire network. You can go through every club that they’re in, you can everything. So if you want to take this to the next level, the next thing to do is once you have your clubs set up, is that you go in and you see if there’s anything that you maybe didn’t think about that somebody else did. And so that’s what I would do. I think that’s the most strategic approach to really set yourself up for maximum awareness. Oh my gosh. That is so great. Thank you so much for all of that wisdom. Quick question. Before we go into money-making strategy, number two, because I have been off clubhouse for the last two, three months traveling, and I know this is always something we were trying to figure out before, but I’m wondering if it’s become clearer. Are there now proven better times here for those of us in the USA, when certain audiences are on the app, are we starting to see that like the business people are usually primarily using the app during the daytime? Are we starting to really have been on this app now for now a year, almost a year, it’s starting to see those flows in those trends and when are people active on that? Is that becoming clearer? Yeah. Yeah, it is. So most people are on in the morning. And the reason why is because you have, you know, India in the evening, you have Europe, you have us up. And so maximum times are really at the top and bottom of our time zone. So I’m in Pacific standard time zone. And so was clubhouse HQ. So it tends to be like anything like 8:00 AM and before, and like 5:00 PM. And after there seems to be a lot of people on the app. But if you think about your ideal audience, right? When are they on the app, if it’s an entrepreneur or maybe it’s during work day of your hours, the trend that I’m seeing is that, or the trend that clubhouse has talked about is that all the rooms are going to start getting bigger because fewer people are creating more people are listening. So I would say like the number one thing to worry about would be when is the best time for you and your business, right? So that you could do this sustainably over time in the future. And this was a big question I had for myself. Okay. What is the absolute best time that I can do this for a long time? So I had to ask myself that question, but on top of that, what you can do is you can go in the app and you can see how many members are on the app and in certain clubs at every single hour. And you can start to think, okay, you know, I have two different time slots I could do on a Tuesday. Let me see which one of those might have the maximum potential. Let me also see who is doing regular rooms during that time slot. So I can see what if I have a competitive advantage or a competitive, you know, situation here where there might be other rooms that are pulling people in the same direction for the same topic. So I think that that is a little bit individualistic, but I will say that there’s more people on the app in a global sense in the mornings and at night, but that might not matter for everybody. For instance, I coach people mostly in the U S right. So I’m okay with hitting people in the U S but just know that as people go back to work, you want to set yourself up for success for thinking, you know, when our people that my ideal client, if it’s somebody that’s working, when will they most likely be on a social media app? So those are the questions we want to ask them. Great advice. Great advice. Yeah. And that’s exactly what you were saying. So we picked Tuesday night for our wave makers mastermind room, because I know I’m usually not on an airplane. I know that sounds silly, but like, when I’m traveling to see my kids, I’m on an airplane, like Friday to Monday, right. I knew that there was no way I was going to be able to be there every single Tuesday night. So as we roll back into the fall, I never have to wonder about a Tuesday night because I’m always there. And so I love that you said that, and then I have so many questions for you clearly. Hopefully all of our listeners are getting value out of the questions. I’m asking you as well for our Australia participants. Are we starting to see more of a growth in Australian participation on clubhouse than we were in the beginning? Yeah. Yeah, we are. And I think it had to do with like more lockdowns, more like of the pandemic actually grew the user base. So we do think that there’s more people from Australia. I’m meeting them. They’re a little bit of an opposite time zone for me. So I don’t meet as many of them, but there’s growth in that side of the world has accelerated a lot, like all the way from India to Asia, to Australia. Europe has also grown a lot too. I think that us kind of had a strong user base before you left, but that side of the world, I mean, they’re, they’re creating communities and the app just continues to grow. Like it really only has like a few million people on, like the growth potential is still in the billions for the app. So it’s something to really think about. It’s still a baby. Yeah. You guys are all a drop in the bucket. So this is why we love clubhouse so much. You know what Annabel was saying? Like, she’s an early adopter, even you who would be on this app now would be an early adopter. So you are not late on the upswing on that at all. Thank you so much. And those were kind of very specific questions, but these are questions. I knew that our clients and our audience is asking, we have a huge client base in Australia and yes, it’s like three to five o’clock, you know, in the afternoon here in mountain time. When, when, when it is there tomorrow morning. And so there are some, some different times in there. Okay. So way to build your business and be productive with your time is number one awareness and everything we just talked about can fit kind of into that awareness category. What is the second way to make money off of clubhouse and be strategic about your time? Yeah. And these next two, I think, are things that I told you, a lot of people are getting in the awareness trap. They’re just building awareness, building awareness, building awareness. Okay. Let’s think about the human beings, right? That we’re meeting, we’re building relationships with and the fact that we’re going to see them again, because here’s the thing on clubhouse. We’re all clustered together. Everybody that’s interested in business development. We are in a cluster. As people follow more people in your social graph, you are going to be more visible to them, especially now. So going back to what you said, where this is a great time for people to be an early adopter. Yeah. Because discoverability just started right before the rest of us were kind of like, I hope you see me over here. You can’t really find me by my keywords unless you’re being super strategic, like that doesn’t exist anymore. So here’s the thing is that if you are setting yourself up to get to know people really well, you’re treating them well. You’re giving them a ton of value in that awareness phase. They’re going to like and want to maybe see you again. But as we know with the business buying cycle, people don’t necessarily buy from you the first day they meet from you. So I think what a lot of people need to do is nurture their audience, right? You are literally building a community on the app. There’s something called clubs on the app, which we talked about a little bit, but you could have your own, right? Most people when you’ve been active for like maybe a week, you could start your own club if it’s aligned with your brand even better, but that’s basically your hub, right? You can take people also, I just want to put this out there into a community of your own. Like maybe you have a Facebook group, something like that. You can take people, but the level of readiness for them to take that journey with you is going to depend on how you treat them and how you bring them into your world. So, one thing that I think is really important to do is through that awareness phase, bring people onto your email list so that they can see even more value from you. See if you can get them to take the journey over to Instagram and follow you there so that you have more touch points. These touch points are so important in like developing that trust. When you see somebody on video and you also heard their voice, you’re going to trust them a lot more. And also what this also informs is that I know that there’s people who are aware of me, but they don’t know me that well. And my content, I need to nurture them on clubhouse, right? I need to create rooms that maybe are not the big, bold, like huge rooms where everybody sees me that are nurturing people in specific needs. So if somebody comes up in a clubhouse room and they ask a specific question, I may create a room about that specific question to best serve them. If I think it’s going to, you know, serve the community that I have, because I want to nurture that community and help them with their needs and give them a chance to get to know me in a smaller setting. And so that’s really nurture is like kind of moving people along, getting them to like you more, giving them more resources, maybe engaging with them on social media. So you can hit them in more ways. It just depends on how robust you want to be. But at the very minimum form, it’s, you know, you might meet me in a room with other people on a stage. You might like me, you might follow me. Now, I’m going to take you into a container where you can really learn from me specifically, have an incredibly clear idea about who I am and know my style, know what I have to offer. And so that’s, the second part is nurture. I love that level of that. Okay. And then number three, the third way to make money, grow your business and be very productive and strategic of your time on clubhouse. Yeah. This is the one that almost nobody is doing and it’s conversion. It’s converting straight from the stage. So what I’ve noticed is that people can sell anything from an SLO or a very low ticket offer all the way up to something that’s a few thousand dollars. Sometimes even more from the stage, like you don’t even have to like get them into a fancy funnel, but if you have one, it does help support you, but it’s having those rooms and being in that position where you are literally by yourself, hosting a room. And the whole intent is to get your super fans into the room. The people who are the hottest that know you the most and basically drive them down a sales sequence. So that content might look like why you need an email list to build your business. Then you would sell to them like some sort of email list building service at the end of the day. But having something that’s like very coherent with the room to what you are selling and selling it directly from the stage. And in order to do that in the way that has the highest integrity, in my opinion is to really be the only moderator to not have any conflict between offers and to have that be a very small niche down room that, you know, like, okay, somebody came into a clubhouse room and awareness phase. They asked the question, I did a nurture room on that. And then, you know, maybe, you know, as I’ve, I’ve warmed them up, I’ve gotten to know them on socials. I’m now going to sell them something that answers that. But it’s me as part of the solution. And so bringing people down those journeys on clubhouse, it’s really, really working well, but people have to do it. They have to be okay with being in a room with one or two people that said, heck yes to them. And sometimes it’s more than that. Right. I noticed that as you grow, it’s more than that. But this conversion content is really, I think what makes or breaks businesses as being okay, sitting there and saying like, by myself, do you like me? Do you like what I have to offer? Are you interested in taking a further journey and then offering that to them in a way that’s like, of course of service. And so those are the three types of content to grow your business on club. Yes. Okay. So I want to give an example of that. I always try to pull the curtain back on what we do in our business. So this is a strategy that we’ve used on clubhouse since the beginning of January. So let me reverse engineer for you guys, because some of you guys have actually been in this strategy who are listening and we’re about to do it again. Okay. So I’m going to tell you here on the podcast, and then you will be able to go and watch us do this. Okay. So we have a masterclass. So we only hold a couple of times a year called your leading offer. Right? So where we teach everybody how to build out their industry, leading leading online course and program mastermind coaching program. So that is starting here in October. We were talking about that behind the scenes, right? So before that we have a challenge like creating your industry, leading offer challenge, right? What we do is we host clubhouse rooms for three weeks leading up to that on the primary questions that are answered in the beginning parts of our masterclass and in our challenge. So the rooms are going to be like how to create your leading framework or method, you know, how to choose a leading offer. That’s right. For you, you know, is launching a course, right? For you, like all of those questions that people are asking. So that’s, I’m just telling you guys exactly how we do it, and you’re going to see us doing it on clubhouse here over the next couple of weeks towards the end of September and October, because that’s leading that up. And that’s exactly like Annabel was showing you that when you do this, that conversions are incredible because you’ve been able to have conversations with people. They know that, you know, what the heck you’re talking about. They know that you actually can, that you are proven to give them the results they’re looking for. They know that you understand their frustrations and their pain points, and you are like the golden arrow to the problem they’ve been probably trying to solve for a very long time. It’s full of integrity. It’s very straightforward. There’s nothing hidden or tricky about it. It just goes from a conversation to a smaller solution to our masterclass and those people that want it, they totally want it, right. They’re like, yes, please let me do this. I need this industry leading program. And so that’s just sharing with you guys and just laying it all out there on the table. Exactly how we do this strategy. And, you know, it’s interesting that you said something in there, you know, as long as you’re okay, being on being on stage and being like the one. Totally. And I think that makes people scared. Right? I think the reason why some people get scared of that is because they aren’t so sure about their solution about their leading program and offer. If you aren’t sure about your solution, then, then that’s a problem we need to solve for you. Right. But I think that they are not so sure about themselves. And so that’s how they, you know, don’t want to do that. Some people that are just shy, what we have seen people do in the past is bringing in. So instead of it just being them on the stage, bringing in affiliates and friends or clients who have actually experienced their services, and I will have some people ask a question, I’m like, Hey, you know what, that’s a better question for, you know, Nicole or somebody else to answer it because Nicole has actually been in our class and we’re always very upfront. We sell the solution to this. We’re never, you know, like cryptic about it. We’re like we actually sell the solution to this. And so I just wanted to share that with you guys, as we’re talking about it. So as Annabel’s teaching you the structure of it, that you will also have like set example of it in action as well. And it does work really well. And I’m really surprised that you say that more people aren’t necessarily doing that. Why do you think that they aren’t doing that so much? Yeah. You know, I think it’s because they don’t have a business. Like they don’t have an offer exactly what you’re saying. They got on the app. Now they have all the awareness. They know people like them. They know they like their ideas. They probably know the problems they could solve, but at the end of the day, they don’t really have either that confidence or that flow. So there’s some people that like, maybe they start with, okay, you can get on a discovery call with me and I’ll try to sell you coaching. Right? Like that’s probably the level that they’re at with their funnel, but they don’t really realize that you could do a masterclass or you could have like freebies to build your email list or you could have some sort of launch sequence. And so I think that all of that’s really important, but at the end of the day, you have to know what it is that you’re offering people so that you can then back that up and say, okay, what’s the bridge between you knowing who I am in a clubhouse room, me actually make an offer to you and you actually buying the thing. Right. So people kind of need to know that bridge. And so I think that it’s a little bit like a happy surprise for many people that they grew group, they got all this awareness. They have all these people that like the thing is about a clubhouse is if people are interested in you, they’re going to come to your inbox and say, can I work with you? And then if you don’t have an offer, you’re like, Hmm, yes, you can. Let me just like, create something for you right now. Like, let me just, if you want that, yes, I’ll do it. But we want to get people into a model that’s really scalable, right. Something that they could do over and over again, just like you are like, you know, that it works, you’ve measured. It, you practice it. You know, that like if people go from clubhouse room to masterclass to challenge, they’re going to buy the product. Right. And so that’s kind of the thing that we want to build for everyone is just knowing that that conversion content will always work for you on a consistent basis because your offer matters. It’s something that people want. It’s something that they will take that journey on with you. And so that’s why I think it is, is that a lot of people are disliked kind of like in that development phase. And it’s totally okay. I think that’s awesome. Yeah. And we have actually had multiple clients come to us for that exact reason. Like, I don’t have an offer. I don’t know what I’m selling any of my leading offer. I help them out. So totally. Yeah. A hundred percent. All right. So today we talked about how to be really wise on your time, but we actually didn’t talk about the numbers of time in itself, but I know everybody’s different. So before there’s my children calling in my emergency breakthrough listeners, there’s another child podcast listeners calling for more lunch money, probably for our listeners that are really kind of wondering how much time do I actually need to spend on this in order for it to actually be worth my while. Is there at least a minimum time or is it a cadence or a consistency that you recommend? Yeah. Okay. So I would say that like, you’re probably not going to move the needle a lot if you’re not willing to spend at least four hours a week on an app and at least one of those hours being you having your own room. So I think that that’s something that’s really important. It’s a time intensive app, but here’s the other side is that the sky’s the limit with influence awareness and all of that. So to me, the real question is what do you actually want? Do you want to build something that’s more evergreen? When we talk about the offer, when we talk about the funnel, do you want to build something where it’s like, you can be on the, in the conversations? Do you enjoy them? Does clubhouse let you up? There’s a lot of people that are like, I love it. I just love it here. I just want to spend all day every day. Okay, great. Let’s build the model that lets you do that and be profitable. So that’s kind of like the question that goes to my mind. But at the same time, there’s people like Janet who does Pinterest marketing and she’s made a ton of money on the app. And she does her two regular rooms every single week. And in her free time outside of her business, she goes into other rooms and she creates awareness around who she is. And her funnel is really strong, but it’s a service based funnel, right? She has coaching. She has her courses. She has a little bit of a mix. She’s made a lot of money on the app to spending around four hours a week. So the sky’s the limit for you. If you’re somebody that has the desire to build your personal brand and build your social media, and maybe you are starting at zero and you have a lot of time use the time to grow that, build that. I think it will serve you for years to come. If you’re somebody that’s super busy, you have a great funnel already in place. Maybe you have a Facebook funnel or something that’s already existing. Maybe you want to add a little bit more. You want to actually use clubhouse to nurture your community or get in front of some new eyeballs or be an expert guests. That’s great position yourself for that. I really think that anytime, but I would say the minimum is around four a week. And I think most people could probably figure out four hours a week. Right. And it’s worth it. We love being on the app. I love the app so much and I get to meet amazing people like you. So thank you so much for being on the show. So you actually have a guide that you’re going to give to our listeners, a clubhouse productivity guide, just share what is in that. And then we’re going to make sure it’s in the show notes of this episode so everybody can grab it for free. Yeah. Yeah. So this guide really came out of the question of so many people say like is clubhouse worth my time. And so it’s literally your answer to that. So we go over the six different places where you can show up on clubhouse effectively. But then we also asked the very hard question is like, what is your ideal life and week actually like, right. Take the time to actually do the worksheet in order. I tell you my winning formula, how to use awareness, how to use, you know, nurture how to use, you know, conversion. You can do all of that, but none of that matters to me unless it fits into your ideal day and week. And that is going to help you to decide, okay, what are the hours that I might spend on clubhouse? Why is it worth it to me? Because I want you to define what you want. Right? What makes it worth your time to show up in a clubhouse room, do the scary thing, add some value, get in front of people, build your brand, do the work around clarity. Like what is it that gets you to actually do that? And then once you do that, then it’s like, okay, so what time am I going to do it like that? That’s where I want to get you. And that’s how I designed the guy Love. That sounds so awesome. I know our listeners really appreciate it. And I really appreciate you sharing that with everybody. This is episode number 243, and all of our listeners can find you and how to connect with you@theshownotesatsweetlifeco.com, just click on the podcast button. It’s episode number 243. But before we go, what is your clubhouse handled? So everybody can follow you. Yeah. At Annabel, by Han. And then if you went to follow my club, it’s now the club under clubhouse mastermind. And so you could follow me in both places and that will get you right into the content that you want to see. It has mastermind. I love that. Okay. Well we’ll for sure be jumping in your rooms from your club too. I appreciate your expertise and your time so much. Thank you so much. And Thank you for having me.

    Episode 239: Systems To Scale Your Online Coaching Business, Part 2 with April Beach and Rachel Cook

    Rachel Cook SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Discover your business growth phase by taking the SweetLife Entrepreneur Self Assessment

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is for those of you who’ve nailed your first offers and you want to scale.

    Summary:

    Predictable systems are what makes the work flow. Systems to scale, systems to grow your team, systems to manage your marketing, client facing systems, and more… 
     
    This 2-part show with systems scaling queen Racheal Cook makes understanding how, why and when to create systems within your business, simple. There was so much business IQ delivered that we broke this show up into 2 parts, so be sure to tune in to both for the full effect in your profit. In detail we discuss, scaling versus growth, the 3 systems every business needs and why you don’t need to try to do everything to create a profitable online service or consulting practice.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Learn the difference between growth and scaling
    2. Understand why the best sales start with subtraction
    3. Gain confidence that you really don’t have to be everywhere online to be profitable

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. You guys welcome back to two of the systems that scale show here on the Sweetlife entrepreneurial business podcast, we have a very special guest Rachel Cook. And if you missed episode number 238, please just pause it here.

    You can come back to this right after you listened to episode number 238, because I want to make sure you don’t miss any foundational parts of what we’re talking about today. I want to make sure you leave with a whole entire clear business picture on the systems that you need to scale your business. Today’s guest is our returning expert. Racheal Cook. She’s an award-winning business strategist who believes entrepreneurship doesn’t have to be so complicated.

    And over the last decade, she’s helped thousands of women entrepreneurs designed predictably profitable businesses without the hustle and burnout. And Rachel’s work has been featured in places like fast company, us chamber of commerce and other resources online. And she is an Amazon, Amazon bestselling author of the fire and up and focused challenge in your business sweet spot. And when you tune into last week’s episode,

    you’ll hear that I have been a huge fan of Rachel Cokes for a very long time. So this is a very special treat for me personally, to be able to bring her on today’s show so that you can learn her amazing simplified strategies to scale your business. In today’s show, we’re going to talk about the importance of following systems and creating systems for your business,

    including marketing systems, sales systems, and customer-facing user experience systems for coaches, consultants and service-based online businesses. So if you are at the point where you are trying to scale, you’re struggling to scale and you know that the systems part of it is the missing piece. Then this is the episode that you need to be paying attention to of course, partnering with last week’s episode,

    number 238 and all of the show notes and everything we’re talking about today can be found by visiting sweet life co.com and simply click on the podcast as well as all the places where you can connect with Rachel tap into Rachel’s amazing challenges. The ones that initially connected me to her over eight years ago in so many other places where you can learn from Rachel directly.

    All right, so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Now let’s jump to the next area of systems that companies need to have in place to scale. Yeah, we had talked, I the earlier about, you know, each time you add a new offer to your business, you have to make sure you have a marketing system, a sales system,

    and a customer experience or a delivery system for each offer. So you almost need to do an audit of your business and figure out what are the things that you’re doing in each of those that are working and what aren’t working. Because often I find that we’re doing things because we feel like we should do them or that’s because how everyone else does it or how the industry says to do it.

    But if we pop the hood and take a look under there, we realize, oh, maybe this actually doesn’t work that great for me. So thinking about marketing, I’m always thinking through the framework I mentioned before the marketing pieces attract, engage, nurture, so attract getting it in front of brand new people. Who’ve never heard about, you don’t know who you are,

    what you do, what your brand is about. Engage is getting those people to kind of raise their hand and go, oh, I’m interested in learning a little bit more. I want to connect with you and learn more about what you talk about, what you have to offer. And then nurture is actually building the relationship and helping them to build that know like,

    and trust so that they are like, oh yeah, April is the person I want to learn from. Or April’s the person who’s going to solve this problem for me. And then I’m ready to have a conversation about what the thing is that I’m buying from you. If you don’t have a clear idea of what your strategy for each one of those is going to be,

    it tends to be throw spaghetti at the wall marketing, right? And that is the biggest waste of time. And this is where I see so many people burning themselves out. They create these ideas of all the things they think they need to do all the places they think they need to be, but nothing works together and pulls people in a singular direction.

    So for example, in my business, my number one attract strategy is doing interviews on podcasts. See, And you guys are all gonna follow her after this and eat up everything she puts Out. So interviews on podcast is my number one strategy. How did I realize it was my number one strategy? I actually went back, looked at my last 10 or 25 or a hundred clients.

    I pay attention to where they came from. And if 80% are coming from podcast interviews, then I’m going to do more podcast interviews. And I intentionally designed systems around it. And when I was able to, I hired someone whose whole role in my business is to pitch me for podcast interviews, because we know that it drives results. So we’re putting a system in place we’re tracking it.

    We’re adjusting when we realized this one thing is working really well. Once I do a podcast interview, what happens? Well, I’ve already mentioned the fired up and focused challenge, which one is one of my best performing engaged pieces of content I’ve ever created. So it’s free value where people can come get into my ecosystem and learn more about me and how I operate once they do that.

    We’re nurturing them with our podcast, promote yourself, CEO. And every week they’re getting more content along the same types of topics as the fired up and focused challenge and what we’re talking about now. So it’s all very congruent. It’s keeping people on a similar learning path. So everything is mostly audio because we know if they like podcasts and they like podcast interviews,

    and we want to make it really congruent for people to access all the content that I’m sharing. It’s all designed to travel with them. And that system is just rinse and repeat for us rinse and repeat, rinse and repeat you. Won’t see me add much complexity to that. I might do experiments here and there. We’re going to drag you on clubhouse.

    Well, And that’ll be a fun experiment. Like I am. I’m always open for experiments. When I have the bandwidth to play around with them. I find that there are certain things I could take away from my business and it would not impact the bottom line. I could go silent on Instagram and it would not change the revenue I bring into my business.

    But if I go silent on my podcast, it will absolutely change the revenue I bring into my business. Right. So you have to know what actually works for you and be able to track so that you can make those smarter decisions. And it follows that 1, 1, 1 rule, like you just need one thing in each thing and make sure it makes sense for your people.

    So that’s kind of a marketing system is what is your attract strategy? Where are you sending them? How are you engaging with them? And then what’s your nurture strategy? How can you make sure that all of those things are very symbiotic. They’re all working together in this really easy to manage ecosystem. Now, as the CEO, it doesn’t mean you have to be doing all of those things a hundred percent by yourself.

    Your goal should be to have other people who are helping you deliver those things, because the most important thing for any business is consistent marketing. If you turn off the marketing, it’s like driving your gas tank down to empty, and then hoping you’re going to go somewhere. You’re just not. So if you’re starting to feel like you’re on a content hamster wheel and you’re exhausted and you feel like I don’t have time for this stuff,

    then you had to hire some help and have team to help you with that. So I have team that helps me with every part of that. Literally the biggest part of my role in all of it is to sit right here in this chair with this big microphone and talk, everybody else handles all the other moving parts of that. All I have to do is sit down and talk,

    which makes it sustainable. So if you can answer those three things, you will have a marketing strategy that becomes scalable. And if you’re willing to keep it simple and instead focus on the quality of what you’re putting out there, instead of the quantity of places you are on, you will see amazing results. Hmm. I love that. And I think that’s important for our listeners to hear as well,

    you know, especially with so much push to, to be everywhere and do all the things. And I really, it’s just so important in, in fundamentally proven and Just think about everybody points back to, we talked about Gary V and how he’s like be everywhere. Do all the things. If you follow him long enough, you’ll realize he has a team of about 15 to 20 people who all they do is follow him around all day,

    record everything coming out of his mouth and then repurpose that into tons of content. So he is not doing that on his own. He has a massive team that is producing at that volume. And his play is as an influencer. He has to be everywhere because that is his approach is widespread messaging. That’s not everybody’s approach. So if your approach is you have a very specific topic,

    a very specific niche, a very specific person you’re trying to talk to go deep. You don’t have to be shallow and playing on the surface level, trying to reach as many people as possible. You can go deep with a smaller group. Well, And I love that you said that too. And I think that this will resonate quite a bit with our audience as well.

    Is it? You said something. I think I wrote it down here, somewhere in my, in my notes, but you said that you’d rather be, you know, incredibly significant for a smaller group of people than superficial and barely making an impact to thousands and millions. And I think that that is really an important differentiator because it is a different business model.

    And I think that maybe even starting there, if you guys are listening to this and you’re like, oh, you know, which, which approach do I really take? Listen to what Rachel said and think about what aligns with what you want to do, your significance, your impact, and frankly, your, your business model in your, your life.

    I mean, listen to the show, you guys know me, we’re always talking about building, you know, really the life we build the business, you build life. Like, what do you, what do you really want? And so building a profitable business with a small audience is done all the time again and again and again and again. And so I think that that is maybe the first step as our listeners are thinking through what you said for you guys to think about,

    you know, how does this really fit into, you know, really what I want my big picture to be, who do I really want to be in this space? And how does that align with how I see myself in my significance? And so I really appreciate that. You said that. So we talked about scaling with teams. We talked about scaling with marketing.

    I really, your simple marketing three-step system is amazing. And then the third area that you were going to share with us today is scaling through your customer experience. Yeah, yeah. That I love this too, because I feel like no one talks about customer experience. Everybody is so focused on the brand new people coming in the front door that they forget about all their clients are losing out the back door.

    And the reality is most strong, successful, sustainable businesses. It’s not about the one-time sale. It’s about the repeating sale. It’s about the lifetime customer value. And these are things that I feel like no one talks about these days. But if you look at any traditional business model, which is the world I come from, they’re always looking at who is their customer and how are they getting those people to continue,

    right. Customers. So retaining them as customers getting repeat business from them, getting rave reviews from them, getting referrals from them and just having those people continuously engage with them. And if we change it, our perspective there, instead of putting all of our effort on the front end and into putting it behind the scenes and how we take care of our clients,

    it gets a customer for life versus a customer that’s one time. And I think this is a huge differentiator for a lot of people. If you think about the research shows that it’s seven times easier to keep an existing customer than to go out there and buy a new one. Well, we know right now that there’s more noise than ever before. Ad costs are going up.

    It’s harder to break through than ever before. Our industries are becoming more saturated. They’re becoming more sophisticated. Taking care of your people is one of the simplest things that will help you to stand out. And it does not mean that it needs to be complicated or it needs to be expensive. It just needs to be thoughtful. So a huge piece of this is actually thinking through the delivery of what you’re doing.

    And this is like the bare minimum, the delivery of your promise and your product program or service needs to be thoughtfully done and not just thrown together at the last minute. And I’ve seen this happen so many times, especially in this online world where people are so focused on how big the launch is that they forget that on the back end of those launches is upwards of a 10 to 20% default or refund rate.

    And the reason that is so high across the industry is because the customer experience is terrible because there’s no follow up with those clients because they buy something. And then it’s like, thanks for your purchase. And they never hear from that person again, there’s no personal attention given. So this is one thing where we want to scale deliverability in a way that brings back the human touch to business.

    And I think we’ve gone so far in the direction of automation that it’s been to our own detriment. Like the idea of everything should be evergreen. Everything should be automated. It’s left a whole lot of people right now who are saying things like, I don’t want to buy another course, right? I didn’t open this course. I didn’t complete this course.

    I didn’t get as much value as I thought I’d get out of this. But if we do a few things differently, they would have a different opinion and a few simple, simple things. You can do one, you can continue doing the automated things like you should have some sort of email delivery reminding people to go in and use the thing. They just bought coaching them through it,

    answering questions, highlighting cool things going on in the community that is like the bare minimum that is highly scalable. But then do the things that don’t scale because the things that don’t scale or the things that are memorable Heights, this is one huge thing. We forget that some of the most amazing businesses in the world will still pick out a few people to send amazing experiences to they’re still upgrade people’s experiences.

    And that’s how we end up with these customers for life. So one of the things that we do, I mean, these are just little things. One is we actually track our clients progress through our programs. And if we see in our coaching platform that we use that they’re getting stuck, or they’re not moving forward in their plan that we’re tracking with them.

    If they’re not responding, if they’re hiding, we proactively reach out and we’re like, Hey, what’s going on? Right? And half the time they’re surprised. They’re like, hold on. How’d you know, and it’s like, well, we can tell that you haven’t logged into anything. We haven’t seen you on any calls. And so we’re concerned,

    are you okay? How can we help? And to some people, that’s all they need. They just need that little nudge. And sometimes it opens up a whole like, oh, I’m stuck or I’m having a hard time and we can get them back on track and deliver the promise of our offer. But if we let them default into overwhelm or I don’t know what to do,

    then they’ll fall off. And there’s another customer who feels less than happy about the experience they had with us, as opposed to a customer. Who’s like, oh my gosh, they actually reached out and checked in on me. Right. It’s just bringing that human approach. Right. And, you know, and even small things like you were saying, writing like a handwritten card and dropping it in the mail.

    And we were talking about this. And one of our programs is where identifying where that places, where people can, whether it’s the hardest work in the program or the part that’s not fun and doing that phone call then. And, and I think that, so it’s really interesting. Again, there’s a certain need to have a, a higher level perspective on the evolution of online business to have this conversation about,

    you know, being in this space for a good deal of time. So I actually speak about this often on the show, but just for our listeners that haven’t heard that yet. There’s an evolution of like courses like the, we’re talking about where we used to do these like huge courses and set it and forget it. And evergreen, huge launches and people ate him up and he was amazing.

    And then like 2015 came along, 17 came along and now we’re to the point where only 6% of people are completing online courses. And I love what you said, it’s doing the things that don’t scale. It’s doing the things that actually matter. Like, okay, if I’m a teacher and I’m actually trying to teach people and not just sell them into my big launch,

    what do they really need from me? And I love that you share that you guys do that because you, that those are the things that separate the oil from the water. When we’re talking about businesses that really, really delivering a transformation to their clients and their students. Yeah. And this is important if you’re delivering a transformation, you just have to know that the industry has shifted away from the automation,

    the evergreen, I know that’s what everybody’s selling right now because they made their money on it five years ago. But right now, what is getting those clients stick around. And like, we had a 90% renewal rate of our program this past year, 90% of the people who took it last year, renewed again this year. Okay. And you guys,

    Rachel has a year-long CEO program. We’re going to make sure you know about, so this isn’t like joining us for, these are people that have worked with her for a year. 90% of them are like, I want to stay with you. They want to continue. And they’re either continuing in the same program or they’re upleveling to work with my team in a higher level one-on-one way.

    And when you start looking at it from that different lens, it’s like, does it make sense for us to send a handwritten note? Yeah. Does it make sense for us to say, Hey, do you want to come to Richmond for just a small peer mastermind day? Here’s some people who live in the area, let’s just send them a quick invite.

    Heck yet, does, does it make sense that we ship out books and print planners and all these things that five years ago, people thought I was crazy when I was mailing out little bundles to my clients. And I’m like, but you don’t understand. These are the tools that I think will help them and they get it. And they’re like, it feels like Christmas because no one gets that stuff.

    So it’s not about sending a gift. That’s just like a fun thing. It’s about how can you make this experience thoughtful? How can you show people that you’re really committed to the result that you’ve promised them? Does it mean that if you see somebody struggling, you offer to jump on a quick 15 minute call. Yeah. I mean, this past year we have gone through new babies.

    We have gone through miscarriages. We have gone through divorces. We’ve gone through weddings. We have gone through movies across the country. We’ve gone through spouses, losing jobs. We went through the global pandemic. We went through a crazy election cycle. We went through all sorts of things. And at the end of the day, it’s the commitment to saying,

    you know what? As a team, it doesn’t take us a ton of extra time each week to sit down and go, Hey, who could use a little extra love and check in with our team of mentors, check in with who’s running our communities and say, who could use a little extra something from us? Do they need a little email? I’ll send video emails out to people.

    Do they need a little extra love? Do they need a reminder? Hey, we’re here for you. Those are the things that stand out compared to just feeling like another number on a list that paid, you know, a couple of thousand dollars for a program. And that program designer, celebrity, entrepreneur doesn’t know who you are, right? It’s a whole different experience.

    Does that mean every business needs to be as high touch in their approach as I am at this point, no, you don’t have to be at all. You can definitely scale up lower price point things and have a more hands-off delivery of it. But I think this is where you have to know your purpose and the work that you’re doing in the world and how you want to do it.

    There’s no right or wrong. I’m just giving a different perspective of, I would rather work in a really meaningful way. Go really deep with people have clients who work with me for a few years at a time. And then they come around and tell me the things they’ve been able to do. You know, like my husband quit his job and is working with me full time.

    I was able to take two months off this summer and the business kept making money. I was able to hire people in my team to deliver my course. And all I have to do is show up a couple times a month. Like those types of things are really exciting to me because it does give them back the freedom and the life that they really want.

    And I love how you design businesses. And that’s why I’ve followed you for so many years. All of these really, I don’t want to say common sense because they, they aren’t common unless you’ve gone through the process of seeing what else is out there. But fundamentally we’re teachers, we’re, we’re coaches, you know, we’re we’re teachers. And especially if we just compare it to like how our kids,

    third grade teachers are to them, you know, they’re doing these things are trying to figure out all the ways like to make them laugh and make them happy and make them, you know, do all these things. And granted it’s totally different situation, but as teachers and as people that people pay us money and they trust us to help them. Yeah.

    I love the way you engineer your programs. And I love the way that you explained that customer experience. So we talked about a lot, totally to break this episode up into two episodes. This might be a, two-parter Going to be a two-parter. You guys are recording it Now, not a plan, but this will be a two-parter if you know,

    I think that what is so important, what I want people to take away. In addition to all the things you should see, all the Rachel Cook quotes. I have that written down on this paper. You guys, you’re a scale is about adding and it’s not, no scale is not about adding it’s about subtracting. I can’t even read my own writing.

    What comes easiest to you is most often your greatest asset. I mean that you are gold. You’re like just gold or gold. I have like five quotes in my chicken, scratch written here on my paper. You know what I want you guys, listeners, you know, every, every show we want to give you proven processes, trainings, tactics,

    and strategies that you guys can take to the bank, but it doesn’t mean you should take every one of them, right? We have shows and all these different topics, but why I’m so excited to have Rachel here is because of the fact that if you are designing a, like, Rachel does, like I do, you know, family, how frequently we work,

    how often we work, the capacity in which we work simple is always better. And it doesn’t mean that it’s the right way for everybody, but it is very, very profitable. And it’s very tempting to make things really complex. It’s really tempting to make things complex. So I really want you guys just to like, take a deep breath as you’re listening to these now,

    two shows and put them on repeat, make sure you’re following Rachel. And the first and the first episode, I, you know, we, we sent you to go do the fire up and focus challenge. So hopefully you did that. If you’re listening to part two of this, go back and listen to part one, take a deep breath and just,

    and just be like, this is doable. This is smart business. This is taking what you were saying, traditional business and applying it to the online landscape, which not very many people do. Looking at those metrics, referrals in, you know, lifetime customer value, things that are very important to look at that again are oftentimes missed and not discussed in the shiny world of the online coaching space.

    Go back and listen to this episode of repeat, just absorb. And then we really want you guys to reflect in what aspects of what Rachel talked about today, that you could be implementing into your business because it’s not about adding it’s about taking away in the simplification in order to scale in getting away from the grind, the more, and really coming back to the key factors that are going to increase profit and decrease time and capacity is such an important,

    there’s so many lessons in gold that, that you share today. Rachel. And so I appreciate you being here so much. We’ve talked about a lot. Thank you so much. Thank you for coming. You know, tell everybody, you know, in the end of this episode, day time that we’re spending together, what do you think that you know about yourself as a leader,

    through this process of what you’ve done? What do you, what do you feel like that you really love of how you grown as a CEO in this space over, you know, over how long have you been in business over a decade? For sure. Right. I mean, Yeah. I think I started my business in April of 2008. So it’s been awhile.

    It’s been awhile. I would say, you know, the biggest thing I’ve come to love about myself as a leader is that I’m continuously willing to be uncomfortable. I think as a leader, you have to be willing to get uncomfortable and to be able to sit in discomfort, which does not make leadership sound too appealing. But what happens when you’re willing to sit in the discomfort,

    when you’re willing to sit in the discomfort of coming up against your own inner critic, coming up against your own imposter syndrome, coming up against your own resistance, being willing to look at the different sides of yourself that maybe you really don’t want to look at. That’s where the leadership growth has been for me has been when I’m willing to sit in that discomfort and lean into it and push myself through it.

    Because often for me, the leadership parts that have been the hardest have been the one about the parts about surrender and letting go of control and getting out of the way and trusting that I am hiring amazing, amazing, smart, brilliant women who also have a gift. And who also have things that they’re here to leave the world with. And I’m providing them an amazing opportunity to make an impact within the scope of this container called my business.

    And if I’m just willing to continue leading into my own discomfort and stop trying to control the heck out of everything and let other people do great work, too, we’re going to do amazing things together and it’s going to be incredible, but I can only do that if I’m willing to push myself out of my own comfort zone. And right now that comfort zone is learning how to rest.

    It’s tracking my sleep. It’s taking intentional time off and not feeling like the urge to jump in and start a new, a new thing because what I really need right now is rest. And I really need time off. And sometimes as an entrepreneur and as a leader, it’s hard to really fiercely protect that thinking time, that recovery time, but it’s so true.

    The more higher up you get in your career and your journey as a leader, the more you need to protect that so that you can come back to your team and really give them everything you’ve got. Everybody’s just kind of gone nodding their head listening. Yep, yep. Exactly. Free to aware. Can besides we said it in what will now be the first part of this episode?

    I really highly encourage all of our listeners to follow you. I, like I said, I’ve done it for years. I have my team follow your stuff. You’re very, very smart. And the way you teach is very understandable. And so I appreciate you consistently showing that you have consistently shown up. And that says a lot, that says a lot.

    So, so we appreciate that. Where can people find you The best place to find me is going to be on my podcast, promote yourself to CEO. We have an episode going out every week, all about how to scale a sustainable business without the hustle and burnout. So I’d love to see you over there. And of course, we talked about the fired up and focused challenge.

    You can get the full 10 days@firedupandfocused.com it’s available on demand and absolutely gratis. So go dive in. Yeah. Awesome. Thank you so much for all your time and, and making this a two-parter cause there was so many things. I just, anytime you, anytime you’re talking, I’m like writing it down. If I know our listeners so much appreciated getting to know you,

    if they don’t know you already as well. And so all of the show notes will be available for you guys@sweetlifeco.com, click on the podcast. We’ll have everything there, all the resources that Rachel said and how you guys can continue to follow her as well. Thank you. Thank you very, very much. I really appreciate finally getting to meet you face to face after all that you have poured into our company from your knowledge and wisdom over the years.

    Well, thank you so very much for having me. It was such a pleasure. Okay. Thank you so much for sticking with us. That was amazing. Rachel is one of my favorite people and now you know why, again, don’t hesitate to follow Rachel, reach out to her and connect with her. And of course, Rachel and I are also connecting on clubhouse live in all the places that you can find her and tap into the solution she provides can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com,

    simply click on the podcast. And thank you so much for listening to this show. It’s because of you guys that we’ve been named the top 50 moms in podcasting, and this show is going on our fifth year. Really, really appreciate you guys and appreciate you sharing the show with your friends. Have an awesome day and I’ll talk to you next week.

    Episode 238: Systems To Scale Your Online Coaching Business, Part 1 with April Beach and Racheal Cook

    Rachel Cook SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Discover your business growth phase by taking the SweetLife Entrepreneur Self Assessment

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is for those of you who’ve nailed your first offers and you want to scale.

    Summary:

    Predictable systems are what makes the work flow. Systems to scale, systems to grow your team, systems to manage your marketing, client facing systems, and more… 
     
    This 2-part show with systems scaling queen Racheal Cook makes understanding how, why and when to create systems within your business, simple. There was so much business IQ delivered that we broke this show up into 2 parts, so be sure to tune in to both for the full effect in your profit. In detail we discuss, scaling versus growth, the 3 systems every business needs and why you don’t need to try to do everything to create a profitable online service or consulting practice.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Learn the difference between growth and scaling
    2. Understand why the best sales start with subtraction
    3. Gain confidence that you really don’t have to be everywhere online to be profitable

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate Back to the show and welcome to a very special two-part episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast, episodes, number 2 38 and 2 39 coming straight at you. As a matter of fact, these episodes are so good.

    I didn’t actually set out to take the value today’s guests offers and break it up into two shows, but it was so great. There was so much information and I want to make sure you have an opportunity to absorb and implement it, that we did break it into two shows for you. So welcome. If you are a new listener here, I’m April beach,

    founder of the Sweetlife company host here of the Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast and everything we do is to help entrepreneurs design, launch and scale their business online since 2006. And we are so glad that you are here in tuning into today’s show. Today’s guest is somebody, let me be really honest that I have totally fan girl over four years. And if you know me,

    I don’t fan girl often like ever actually it takes a lot to impress me, but I totally fell hard for this one woman because of her scaling systems. When I first found her back in 2013, and I have followed learned from it admired her ever since this is Rachel Cook MBA. If you do not know her, I am super excited to be the one to be able to introduce you to her.

    She is literally a systems genius and all the way back in 2013, 14, her lead magnet guys lead magnet, it was called fired up and focused was so good that I put my entire team through her lead magnet. So let me give you a formal introduction into who Rachel is. She’s an award-winning business strategists who believes entrepreneurship doesn’t have to be so complicated over the last decade.

    She’s helped thousands of women, entrepreneurs, design, predictably, profitable businesses without the hustle in burnout. She’s the author of Amazon bestselling books fired up and focused and your business sweet spot and hosts a weekly podcast promote yourself to CEO. She’s a sought after speaker on entrepreneurship, marketing productivity, productivity. Look, I can’t even flow through that word because Rachel is so amazing.

    She’s just going to make everything so much more productive on this show. And her work has been featured by the us chamber of commerce Ford’s coaches, council, fast company, and more, and we are going to dive right into today’s because I want to give you an opportunity to truly focus in on what we’re talking about, implemented in your business and walk away on the other side,

    changed and transformed by what you applied from, what you learned today. At the end of this episode, you’re going to learn the difference between growth and scaling. You’re going to understand why the best sales starts with subtraction little puzzle there. You’re totally going to understand what I’m talking about at the end of the show. And you’re going to gain confidence that you really don’t have to be everywhere,

    online to be profitable. So all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And let’s go ahead and dive in to episode number 238. All right, you guys, I am super excited to be joined by this very, very special guest. And you need to know a little bit about why this woman is so special to me. First of all,

    maybe eight years later, she never knew how special she was to me and how powerful she was to our business Intel. Like right now, this is the one person I can say that I have probably fan girl over for almost a decade in this space. And so here’s a story why, okay? She said here, I’m telling embarrassing her behind the scenes,

    but here’s the story why you guys know I’ve been in all my business for a very long time, since 2006, but inherently, I am not somebody that thrives by creating systems. And so 2013 was coming around and although we had our online offers, we didn’t have the systems in place that we really needed to scale. And I came across this amazing woman who’s here today and literally her lead magnet back in 2013 was so amazing.

    I put my entire team through it and it completely got our business organized and in place. So that’s the intro. This is literally very surreal for me to be here with this woman that I have found, because what she teaches has literally changed our business. And I know it will change your suit. Welcome to this. And we live podcast, Rachel Cook.

    I’m so glad that you, Oh my gosh, April. I think I need that little intro to just come with me for every interview and every talk that I give from now on. Thank you for having me. This is going to be a fun conversation. You are amazing. Okay. So tell everybody let’s like take it back. Was it 2013?

    Is that how long ago was, yeah, It was end of 2013, beginning of 2014 when I created the fired up and focused challenge. And it’s still around today. Yeah. Everybody, what that was and the situation, the circumstances in which you created it, because that’s what makes it even more bad-ass than it already is. Oh gosh. So the circumstances for me creating the fired up and focused challenge is I was at that point,

    it was actually going into new year’s 2014. And I had already planned this very fancy online marketing launch for my, at the time signature course, I had hired a videographer. We had done the three-part video series. I had a makeup artist, I got my hair done, all the things. And about a week before I was set to release that very professional,

    fancy looking launch, I was just getting this feeling like this. Isn’t what I want to talk about. I don’t think this is as relevant to my community right now. So I sent out an email. It was like that quiet week between Christmas and new year’s. And I was like, Hey, I’m just curious as I’m creating content for the new year,

    what is your biggest challenge when it comes to getting things done in your business? And I sent that little quick email out. I said, just hit reply. I did not realize that within a day I would have hundreds of replies. And I went through all of the responses and just saw that there were these themes coming up. And what I realized was,

    you know what? Entrepreneurs have no shortage of great ideas. We have no shortage of creativity. What we tend to have a shortage of though is follow through is the sticktuitiveness to actually implement those big ideas and to get to the other side so that we can see these goals become reality. And that’s when I decided I was going to create the fired up and focus challenge,

    because I realized where a lot of people were getting stuck wasn’t that they didn’t understand the opportunities in front of them or ideas for how they wanted to grow their business. They were simply running out of time and didn’t know how to manage your time and didn’t know how to structure their schedule. They didn’t know how to structure their team. They didn’t know how to structure much in their business.

    And unfortunately, when you hand a bunch of creative people, no structure, not much gets accomplished of really good at starting things, not so good at finishing them. So we created the fired up and focused challenge. I remember my son who was born earlier that year was a baby, which means I was up probably to one or two every morning. I was only a couple of days ahead of recording the challenge and releasing it at the time.

    It was 28 days. It’s now 10, but it became such a huge pivotal piece of work that I’ve created because it was a moment for me where I realized things that I had learned and had intuitively or, you know, implemented in my life and my business that I took for granted for how I was approaching my work and how I was approaching my business.

    Other people didn’t know those. And I think it comes back to what comes easiest to you is often your best asset, because it comes easy to you because you have mastered it. You have a level of mastery over it. And that is something a lot of times other people want and need is someone who has that level of mastery to show them how,

    or to help them do things at that level. So, yeah, so we created this challenge. It skyrocketed my business. It totally took me on a different path because up until that point, I hadn’t really been talking as much about systems and productivity and the operations and internal structure of businesses. I had been talking a lot more about just marketing and sales and I realized that marketing and sales is what draws often a lot of people in,

    because let’s face it. It’s very sexy to talk about marketing and sales, but when you have the operations in place, that’s when you actually have a scalable, sustainable business. Right. And that’s a perfect flow into what we’re going to talk about today. And really that challenge. I went through all 28 days, all of my team went through the 28 days,

    like I said, and we ate up every single bit of it. And it was amazing. And that’s exactly what we needed at that point of time as a company. Yes, we had, you know, we had the marketing down, we have the offers down, but there’s this middle place. And I can’t wait to talk about it today where,

    you know, everybody says, they want to scale. Scale is sexy, right. You know, scale is what we do. But, you know, without these things in place, it’s going to be a bottleneck for your business. And oftentimes companies fail. And like the word that you use behind the scenes that we were recording was like, they implode on themselves.

    So now this is something I’m so glad that you’re here on the show, because I don’t think that you’re saying that yeah, the marketing brings people in the marketing and the sales is what everybody wants to talk about, but what really people struggle with or the systems, the actual systems to scale. So first of all, did you ever watch that thing?

    I don’t even remember. I just was so into the fired up and focused challenge, what did you do with your, did you still want your signature program? Yeah, it was actually our best lunch ever. It was my first six-figure launch after that very first time running the challenge. But you know, it’s interesting is fast-forward I turned that challenge into a book,

    into a podcast and two signature talks it’s turned into multiple other things. The challenge continues to be one of my biggest assets and I give it away pretty freely just because I know it’s so valuable to people. Yeah. Let’s tell everybody where they can find that before we move on because listen, you guys seriously. It is absolutely amazing. Amazing. It really is.

    It’s very clear, very precise, very like pinpointed to what people need to do. So how can they Find that fired up and focused.com? You can go there and get access to the full 10 day version of the challenge and it’s available on demand. So you can go get that at any time. You guys totally go get that, especially for those of you,

    for our listeners. If you’re in phase one or two of our business growth system, if you’re a listener to, you know, our different phases. So it’s really planning really the launch or you’re in that launch phase, moving on to scale, you guys need this. So I think that’s a great asset and resource. Okay. So we have a problem.

    We globally here, you know, we have a problem. The problem is systems systems to scale systems to grow the teams systems, to manage the marketing, all of the systems that really make a well-oiled machine, whether you know, our listeners have just themselves on their team or they have a team of eight or they have a team of 80 systems are still necessary.

    So what do you feel like right now? And we’re going to dive into your most important systems to scale here. What are you seeing? It’s 20, 21. There’s a lot more online businesses now than there were, you know, back in 2013, what are you seeing now are like the biggest bottlenecks that your students are experiencing when it comes to growing their business?

    Yeah. Well, one thing when it comes to systems at scale is remembering that scale does not equal growth. They’re not words that you can just transpose and think they mean the same thing in business growth can happen where it takes just as much effort to achieve each level of growth. So you can bring in more revenue in your business by just working harder,

    putting in more hours, bringing in more and more team scale comes from economy of scale, where you’re actually having less resources produce higher results. So that’s where you’re getting to the point where the growth is more exponential with less resources, less time, less energy, less money, less team going into achieving that higher level of revenue. And I think that’s a really important discernment because oftentimes I find people think that scaling their business just means working harder,

    just means throwing more at it. And those two things couldn’t be further from the truth. It’s not about working harder. In fact, if you start talking to CEOs of businesses that are making multiple 6, 7, 8 figures, you will find that they get to the point where they prioritize their thinking time, just as much as they prioritize time that they’re in their office,

    because they know how important that time away is in order for them to show up and lead and be creative and be strategic. So it’s not about more time and energy and efforting. That’s not what scale is about. It’s also not about just throwing more at it. Scale is not about adding it’s about subtracting scale is about taking away all the excess. And this is something that I think when we’re in earlier stages of business,

    we have to try out a lot of things to find out what works. Because with each thing that we’re offering, we have to have a marketing system, a sales system, and a customer delivery and experience system in place. So for each offer, you have, it doesn’t matter if it’s working one-on-one or having an online course or having a product, you have to market it,

    sell it and then deliver it. So when you add more and more and more offers, which is often what happens for a lot of people, they they’re like, oh, I have an idea for another program. I’ll have another thing for this next thing. And what happens is each time they’re adding a new thing, they’re not adding one thing, they’re adding three.

    So they’re adding layers of complexity. And when you add layers of complexity to your business, it makes it harder for it to run efficiently. It makes it harder for you to reach economies of scale in any area. And it also makes it harder for your team because your team never knows what’s the priority. What are we focused on? Where should my time and energy be?

    What is the goal right now? Because there’s too many things going on behind the scenes in the business, cause it’s too complex. So if you want to scale, if you want economies of scale, the key really is to do less, to hone in and look at your metrics, look at your numbers, figure out what’s actually working and double down on what works and strip away anything that is extraneous to that we don’t need to just keep adding more and more and more.

    So I often see this happening in, like, let’s say in marketing, there’s always something new happening in the world of marketing, right? And so what you’ll start to see is people who, and this is one that’s easy to see what’s happening just because it’s very obvious when people are trying out lots of things, right? We see them suddenly. They’re not only on Facebook and Instagram and LinkedIn,

    but now they’re on Tik TOK and they’re on clubhouse and they’re doing all of these other channels. And if you try to do too many things and spread yourself too thin, it is very, very difficult to do any of them. Well. But what if you find one that you started as just an experiment like April, you found clubhouse is working really well for your business.

    Well, if clubhouse is working great, but you’re getting nothing really off of Instagram and Facebook. Yeah. Then the scalable approach would be okay. The channel that works best for us is live audio. So I’m going to strip away anything that is not aligned with live audio. And I’m going to take that time and energy and resources and apply it towards the marketing channel that is working for us instead of saying,

    oh, clubhouse is working, let’s go do Tik TOK and this and that. You know, I really, I love that you said that because one of the things that is really being spoken about so much as Omni presence of needing to be everywhere and all the channels, and it’s this old, you know, Gary V approach to crushing it. And it’s really,

    really tempting. And it does make entrepreneurs and small business owners feel like they need to be everywhere and they need to be doing everything. And so I just think that this is, so this is so fundamental to building profitable companies. And I love that. I love that you’re sharing this. I also love that you showed the difference between growth and scaling.

    We talked about that a couple of weeks ago on the podcast and actually did a clubhouse room on this. Nobody I asked when I started the room, like, do you understand the difference between growth and scaling? Not one person could define that. And so it was really interesting. So when we’re in clubhouse together talking about this episode, we should talk about that because it’s,

    it’s really, really important in that. Have you heard of the rule Of ones? The rule of ones? Yeah. So I, I didn’t come up with this. I, I heard this Program, one client, one marketing tool, one sales strategy. Yeah. That’s pretty much the approach I take is I have one core, one core strategy for each area of my business.

    And I use a framework that I teach a lot, which aligns your marketing and sales with the customer journey, where we have one attract strategy, one engaged strategy, one nurture strategy, one invite strategy, and one delight strategy. And once we, once we figure out what our primary one in each of those are, I just doubled down on those and try to avoid anything that is taking too much effort away from each of those.

    Yeah. The rule of one, I haven’t heard it that way in a long time. Yeah. All that. It’s super old and that’s why it’s like old is good, but you know, and yeah. I was wondering that. Yeah. And so, and I think, I mean, we’re not old, but when, I guess when we think about online business,

    we’ve been an online business for like we’re old on my business. People we’ve been online business for a long time. And so yeah, as you were saying that, I was like, oh yeah, this is like that rule of lens. This is really great. And it’s so smart. So when we’re talking about scaling and we’re really talking about these systems and thank you so much for sharing your method,

    if you guys should pause this episode, rewind it 20 seconds. And listen to Rachel’s method. I have her like five or six steps of whatever that was. I was genius. Let’s talk about these scaling team, scaling, marketing, you know, scaling client experience. Let’s jam on each one of those a little bit. Can you dive in and help our listeners understand when we’re talking about scaling with teams?

    What does that mean? And where can they start in this process of doing this and what are the problems I’ve shared this before on the show? My greatest weakness is delegation. I have been a terrible person to work for for years, and I have amazing people that work for me. Not because I don’t honor a value them, but because I don’t stop and think about what I’m doing to best communicate and to empower them.

    And about seven years ago, I had an amazing woman working for me who loved me enough to say, Hey, listen, I don’t want to quit. Cause I love you. But you know, you’re not good at this. You’re a terrible boss. And I knew it. I knew it, but I didn’t know. I guess it was more than seven years ago.

    Cause it was before I found the fired up. It was like 2010, 2011. And so I say this to say that I think are a lot of leaders like me who struggle in this area. At least I’m conscious about it now. And I work really, really hard at that, but it does not something that comes naturally To me. It is not something that comes naturally.

    And I think, again, as entrepreneurs, we have a lot of those double edged sword parts to our personality and our kind of mindset. It’s like, we’re really great at what we do because of this. But it’s also the thing that holds us back. So being raised by entrepreneurs as I was, I had a built-in mentor in my dad and he told me the most important lessons in leadership that I could’ve ever learned.

    And he said, your job as a business owner is to fire yourself from every job in the company. It’s to fire yourself as quickly as you can. And some people are like, well, what do you mean if I fire myself, then what am I doing? You’re being the CEO and the business owner. You’re not being the marketing director and the project manager and the assistant and the bookkeeper.

    You’re not doing all those things, but this is really hard for entrepreneurs to embrace because especially for those of us who are building our businesses from the ground up, our businesses are built on our experience and expertise and our intellectual property, our passion, the thing we care about the most, it can be so hard for us to pull ourselves out of our business.

    And when we are really bad at it, what tends to happen is we get in everyone’s way, every person who we try to hire on the team, we end up getting in their way. And that’s where they’re emailing you finally and being like, can you just get the hell out of the inbox? Because I am trying to do my job here.

    And can you just let me do my job, right? So you have to learn how to fire yourself. And this is one of the most important lessons when it comes to scaling your business is every time you bring someone new into your business, it is changing your job description as the CEO, because you’re no longer the CEO and whatever their role is that you just brought in.

    You’re eliminating again, you’re taking things off, you’re taking things off your plate. So one of the exercises I always have people do that are working with me inside of the CEO. Collective is whenever they’re bringing new people into their business, I make them rewrite their job description as CEO. Now this is an exercise that most people have never done because we go out there and rewrite job descriptions for everybody that we’re bringing on the team.

    But we never sit down and say, what is my role as the CEO of this company? What are the most important things for me to be focused on? And each person is going to be a little bit different because we all have our own different strengths as the CEO of our business, right? We all have something a little bit different to bring to the table,

    but you have to get really clear on what your role as CEO is. And when you hire people in, you have to reevaluate, okay, what is most important? So for me and the CEO of my business, my top three tasks that drive results, that I only allow myself to focus on content. So my business is built around my intellectual property.

    So I’m either creating content free or paid my clients really diving in and understanding who they are, what their needs are, what their challenges are, having a deep understanding and connection to my clients. And then connection, connection drives my business. I am not here to be an influencer and make a small impact in lots of people’s lives. I’m here to be someone who makes a big impact in fewer people’s lives.

    So I know that that connection is what drives my business. And so each time I bring somebody on my team, I’m like, okay, those tests are off my plate. What do I need to stay focused on? Is it related to these three things? If it’s not related to these three things, then it should not be where I’m spending my time and my energy.

    And that has prevented me from doing things like getting into the inbox or making graphics in Canva or editing podcasts or, you know, any of those things that we start to do when we are like itchy to get our hands back in the day-to-day of our business, you’ve got to get used to pulling yourself out of it. And a huge part of that when it comes to bringing on your team is just knowing that you have to be constantly firing yourself.

    And re-evaluating your role. And even as you reevaluate your role, you will have to be constantly asking yourself, what is my zone of genius versus my zone of excellence? Because for a lot of us, we’ve had to get really good at lots of things, but it doesn’t mean it’s what we’re best at. Like I can put together a really great slide deck.

    Is it what I am best at? No. Is that the highest and best use of my time? Absolutely not. If I am bored and I don’t know what else to do with myself, will I sit down and start getting into Canva? Absolutely. That’s my favorite way to procrastinate doing the real work that I’m supposed to be doing is to be getting into Canva And say,

    Canva black hole mine. It is, It totally is. But if I talk to my team, they’re like, well, why did you do that? Why didn’t you record something new? Why didn’t you go take some time off so that you can have that thinking space. We know that you need, why didn’t you write the first chapter of the book that you’ve been putting off for six months,

    because the canvas is easy and right there, and I’m pretty good at it. That’s why. So we have to be aware of that and really get into, as you’re growing your business, you’re pushing up against your growth edge as a CEO in your own leadership. And it is uncomfortable and it’s not always easy to sit down and do the higher level things that we know will move our business forward.

    Like sitting down and writing my book is more likely to move my business forward, then making another slide deck in Canva. But I’m more comfortable making the slide deck in canvas than I am sitting down and figuring out what do I want to say right now? Right? And when you do say it, I want to be on that team. So make sure whatever,

    whatever you put out there, I’m waiting. And I think that’s important to know too. So let’s talk about it from my perspective, everything you said is so, and you guys now know why leverage heal so much, right? And like, yes, that is exactly what is happening in my mind right now. I’m thinking the exact same thing. I do the exact same thing,

    but then they put me on perspective as somebody who’s learned from you, I need your content. And I think that, that is like sometimes I think that helps me as a CEO to think like, I’m the only one that can do this. Right. And I know that there’s somebody out there that literally needs to hear what I’m going to say, whether your books about whatever,

    raising kids or systems or whatever you write about, I don’t care because I’m going to read it because I, I appreciate everything that you say and I resonate with it. And so I think that that has been a driver for me to push through that. And I feel that there is, it’s almost like walking up a river, like upstream, like your thigh deep,

    and you’re walking up upstream and you really want to just go to the side and sit on a rock and work on canvas because it’s fun. But instead you need to get back out in the middle of that river and walk upstream in think like my husband always says, she’s like the hardest work that we do as entrepreneurs is, is that thinking it is for sure.

    Absolutely. And so I, I appreciate everything that you just said. And because I, I literally, that is me you’re is resonating and with our listeners too. I know. So this team aspect of it, where we’re talking about scaling with teams, let me ask you, how is it, how many people do you have on your team if you’re willing to share that?

    I think we’ve got about 15 right now. Okay. Yeah. I mean, we have seven, eight now and I mean, I honestly, it’s like a shared, like, that’s hard for me to help each one of them, Brad, just because of who I am as a leader. How do you pick people for your team? Like how do you know they’re the right people?

    I know we could do a whole, I think I just did an episode with this on it and somebody else, but I love asking these questions because I think it’s very important when we talk about scaling. I know that the selection of team members is a bottleneck for leaders. How do you navigate That? It is because you have to be able to not just outsource and delegate,

    you have to be able to give ownership and that’s a whole different level. And this is one of things. It does prevent a lot of people from scaling because they will hire someone to delegate the marketing or to delegate the launch process or to delegate all the onboarding their new clients. But they always end up in a bottleneck because if all you’re doing is delegating,

    it means those people are going to be coming back to you to ask questions and for decisions to be made. And if you are the only person in your organization that has clarity about where the business is going, that understands the values that you have and your purpose, and that understands your kind of internal framework for making decisions. Then you will always be the bottleneck because you will always have people coming back to you to ask a thousand things.

    They will always need things from you. So building a self managing team is like a whole nother level. Another show about that. I mean, it is, it’s a whole nother thing, but for me, when it comes time to hiring people, I mean, I have people on my team. Who’ve been with me for over 10 years now and they’ve grown with me.

    And the biggest reason why I think I’ve had so many people, I mean, I hear all the time people saying, I can’t find a great assistant. I can’t find a great project manager. I can’t find this. I can’t find that. And they’re like churning through people. And I’m like, do you have clarity on what your purpose is and your business and who you’re really trying to help and how you really want to show up and what your business stands for.

    Because if you don’t have clarity on any of those things, it doesn’t matter who you try to bring in. Because at the end of the day, you can train anybody to do just about anything from a tactical practical perspective, but you can’t train people to care about your business or about your clients or about why at any of it matters. So when it comes to hiring great people for your team,

    it takes time and you just have to know, it’s just like dating the first person you’d go out on a date with might not be the love of your life. You might have to kiss a few frogs and eventually you find the right person. And maybe sometimes you end up with somebody who’s great for a while, but then you kind of grow apart and you need to go find somebody else.

    Like it’s a relationship. So like any other relationship you have to spend time having clarity about who you are showing up as and who the ideal person is. Who’s going to be that good compliment for you in the role that you’re looking for and take your time and finding that person, just know that it’s, it might not be the first person you talk to,

    or the first person you hire. You might have to try a few different times, but if it’s a fit and you’re willing to invest in the person and in the relationship, then the delegation part of it becomes easy because they understand who you are, what you stand for and how you would make a decision about something. So they can take ownership over that.

    Thank you so much for sharing your, your perspective on that. I know our listeners are already thinking about that. The processes we’re talking about delegating the team. So I think that that was really, really helpful to share that All right. You guys, that was an amazing show. I know we cut it off there in the middle. And as I said,

    we didn’t start out this interview to actually break the show up into two episodes. But Rachel was so generous with her expertise and she delivered so many tangible things you can take right now and apply to your business. I really wanted to make sure that you had an opportunity to actually do that. So make sure you tune in with us next week on episode number 239 to catch the second half of systems to scale your business.

    And again, all of the show notes, all of the resources and all of the ways that you can connect with Rachel directly can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on the package. All right, guys, talk to you next week. Bye bye. For now.

    Episode 237: How To Grow An Online Empire Without Paid Ads – with April Beach and Lorraine Dallmeier

    Lorraine Dallmeier SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Discover your business growth phase by taking the SweetLife Entrepreneur Self Assessment

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for those of you who want to build a global brand or international empire without paid ads.

    Summary:

    Today we’re diving into the actual, step by step, proven process of building a global empire organically without paid ads.  Following Lorraine Dallmeier’s proven process, you’ll not only be inspired but  leave this show with tactical marketing you can apply to your brand right now, even if you have no marketing team or little marketing experience. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the 6 steps to create a global empire
    2. Be inspired that little marketing skills are required to grow a loyal following 
    3. Understand the power of brand protection and how to apply this to your company
    4. Learn about “edu-tainment” and how to apply this to your content marketing 
    5. Have yet another confirmation that consistency is king

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi guys, and welcome to episode number 237. Here it is the end of July, 2021. And we are so glad you’re listening to this episode. I’m April beach host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast and founder and CEO of the Sweetlife company,

    where we help entrepreneurs did not design launch and scale a business for high profit, deep impact lifestyle. Freedom today’s episode is really special. You’re going to love this guest. She is an absolute delight, and we’re talking about the actual proven step-by-step process to build a global empire. This woman did it starting only 11 years ago with a baby on her hip.

    And she is breaking down her exact formulation for how she did it without running high cost ads and really in a way that creates brand consistency and gets her message across. And so I’m very excited to introduce you to our guests today, and if you’re new to the show and you have never listened, thank you so much for tuning in. There are a lot of really amazing podcast episodes out there from different hosts all over the world.

    And I’m so appreciative that you are here hanging out with us today. All of the show notes, everything we do as a company, to help you design, launch and scale your coaching business, your consulting business, or your expert focused business can be found by visiting us@sweetlifeco.com as well as all of the show notes and all of the resources we have available for you.

    Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. I am pleased to introduce you to Lorraine doll Meyer. She is absolutely literally an amazing woman. You’re going to be so inspired. She’s an award-winning CEO of formula. Botanica the organic cosmetic formulation and business school, which has trained over 13,000 organic cosmetic formulators and ND beauty entrepreneurs in 177 countries. And probably counting.

    She’s voted the most influential person in natural beauty for 2020 and awarded the digital achiever of the year for the cosmetics industry by Google. Lorraine is on a mission to teach the world to formulate and in this process and you’ll hear her story. It is so cool. She’s going to break down what it was like moving from an employee role, becoming a mother,

    realizing that that isn’t what she wanted and that she just had so much more that she wanted to do. And you are going to leave this episode, understanding the exact six pieces. I should say, being six steps to her formulation. She breaks it down very, very clearly her six step formula on how she created this global empire. So the end of this episode,

    you’re going to know her exact six step formula. And it doesn’t matter if you’re in the beauty industry or whatever you’re in. If you were in the education industry, if you were a coach or consultant, this is the level of business that you want to design. You’re going to walk away knowing her step-by-step process. And you’re also going to realize that you can absolutely do this yourself.

    So I’m so excited to dive in today’s episode. It is episode number 237. So all of the show notes, everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com simply click on the podcast. And this is episode number 2, 3 7. All right, let’s dive into the show. Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by my new friend,

    Lorraine Domar and she is going to blow your mind. You are literally going to be inspired just by the little chat that we have done behind the scenes here to get ready for what she is going to teach on this show. I am taking crazy notes and you are going to absolutely love this woman and be incredibly inspired and learn so much from this show today.

    Lorraine, welcome to the show. Can you give everybody an introduction, share who you are, how you started out and all about this amazing online empire that you have built. Awesome. Well, thank you so much for having me on the show April. It is amazing to be here and I can’t wait for our chat. So I’m Lorraine. I run formula Botanica,

    I’m a biologist, I’m a chartered environmentalist and I am on a mission to teach the world to formulate. So I run formula Botanica the online organic cosmetic formulation at school, and we train people how to make their own natural skincare and haircare using botanical ingredients are we are taking the world by storm with what we’re doing at the moment. It has been phenomenal.

    So I’ve been running the school for almost eight years now, I guess. And I have 40 staff. We have over 13,000 students and graduates for in 177 countries. It has been a roller coaster to get here, but it wasn’t always like that. So just to give you a short intro into how I got here, I was on maternity leave with my eldest son who will be 11 in a few weeks.

    And I decided that I couldn’t go back to my day job anymore. I had to work for myself. You know, I’d had really good jobs, but I just couldn’t handle working for other people anymore. And having listened to a few podcasts with you now, April, I think you probably heard that vaping quite well. So I decided I was going to start my own business.

    I was watching the BBC’s apprentice. I was sitting there on the sofa with breastfeeding, my son. And I like, if these idiots can do it then, so can I, so that’s, I guess where it started. And then by the time I was on my second maternity leave, I had my business up and running. I was teaching people online already.

    I had an app, I was teaching people how to make simple beauty products. And then I had the chance to actually buy formula Botanica in its infancy. It was a one woman side hustle. At that point I was, as I said, I had my second baby with me at that point. And I thought, you know what? This could be a fun hobby project.

    And then I went back from attentively for a second time and my employer has ghosted me entirely. And so I thought I got to make this work and I have, so that’s like a potted history of, of how I got to where I am today. I guess You said something to me before we were recording. You know, you said I went from being this,

    you know, mom would just a baby on my hip to having this global empire in 117, a hundred. How many different countries? It’s insane. Saudi 777 different countries, friends. Okay. This amazing woman has done this. And you literally have a formula just like you teach people how to formulate natural beauty products on their own. And I want to,

    I want you to share your mission because I think that’s incredibly important. But what you’re going to share today on the podcast is the act is the actual formula from how you went from a mom with the baby on your hip, to where you are right now. But I think it’s important to know that for people to know, like, why are you doing this?

    You shared this a bit with me before. Why are you so particularly passionate about what you teach women to do? Well, I love formulation because it takes us right back to our roots. It’s a skill that we’ve lost, that we’ve forgotten. And yet everyone used to do it. Like they’ve even found like fossilized face creams from Roman times. You know,

    this is not something new and we can all formulate. Cause formulation is fun. It’s easy, it’s empowering. And most importantly, it disrupts the mainstream beauty industry because they want you to go and buy that product for 150 years. They’ve been telling us we’re not good enough. We don’t look right. We don’t smell right. We don’t conform to that.

    Blonde stick thin what teeth person that they put, all the adverts, you know, everyone is different and we can embrace our own beauty by reclaiming that power from the beauty industry and learning how to formulate ourselves. And that is so incredibly empowering because then not only can you make your own skincare and haircare and even makeup whenever you need it. But it’s also more sustainable because the beauty industry produces over 120 billion units of packaging a year with that is just staggering.

    And most of that ends up in landfill or in our oceans. And we can do better than that. And we can do that by learning how to formulate for ourselves and making things as in when we need them. So I am on a mission to make formulation as commonplace cookery and the entire world had to do it. And thankfully the world is very receptive,

    which is a good thing. And you’re doing a very Good job out of that. You are doing an incredible job. And so thank you for sharing that. So before we even go into these six steps to how you have built this online empire in hearing these six steps, and I know our listeners after they hear them are going to be like, wow,

    I can absolutely do this as well. I want to point something out. You are so incredibly deeply fiercely fire, really passionate about what you do. And you are very clearly leading with that determination. It’s not leading with the money because you want to build an empire to take over the world. You want to change and you want to create a transformation for women and disrupt an industry that needs to be disrupted.

    So I say that. So as our listeners are listening to understand that underneath all of these things that we’re going to talk about in content marketing and all the other strategies to build literally a global empire with your online courses and your education business, that under that all is a fierce passion and conviction for what you are doing. And I think that in order to be successful,

    frankly, anything, unless you just want to make a lot of money and not have a deeply purposeful company. I believe that that’s a requirement. And so I just wanted to point that out to our listeners and our listeners and pick up on that anyway, they’d be like, wow, this, you know, this, this woman’s amazing. She loves what she does diving into,

    you know, history and, and the history of what she’s doing. So let’s transition. Let’s dive into that a little bit. How on earth did you go from this mom who was kind of working kind of decided she wanted to stay home, had an app, bought a company, having another baby to where you are now. You literally have a formula for this as well Through it.

    Well, first of all, thank you for all those lovely things you said as well. I mean, yes, you have to drive forward with that passion, but then there are various steps that as you say, anyone can do. And the first one for me and I live in a brief there, so I absolutely love this is content marketing. Now I have been a prolific content creator since I was 15 years old.

    And I badgered my parents to get the internet at the home. We were one of the first adopters of the internet where I lived. Everyone was like, why do you have the internet? I didn’t know what to write to, you know, web pages that really had anything of use for me. But I started blogging when I was 15. I started designing websites then,

    and that has stuck with me ever since. So a big, big part of what we do is putting out content and I call it edutainment, which is a slightly pretentious word. I mean, you’re mixing education entertainment, but it says what it does on the 10 basically. And so we write, we film, we record content every single week that our followers want to read,

    want to listen to what to watch. And a lot of people say to me, well, how’d, you know what to record? And I’m like, well, I go to ask people, you know, because they tell me what they want to know. And we put that content out there and that has been so, so successful for us because by showing up every week,

    it doesn’t matter if it’s raining. It doesn’t matter if I’m on holiday, it doesn’t matter. What’s happening. That content will go out. And that means that our followers become dependent on it. They want to read it. And actually as a result of that, we’ve become like a publication as well as an online school. And we get more visitors now than the many of the sort of mainstream publications in,

    on niche as well, which has been phenomenal. So let me ask you, where do you distribute the majority of your content? I know our listeners are thinking, okay, well, they’re doing this content. What are your, I know every industry is different. What are your primary social channels or content distribution channels that seem to have worked for you?

    Well, social does well for us, but I have to say the main channel has been email. I mean, it’s all in the list, right? And I’m sure everyone listening who wants to do this understands you have to have a list. And I started off at 300 people on my list. I now have 125,000 and we clean that list rigorously.

    Let me boot people off all the time because they don’t open our emails. Otherwise we’d have hundreds of thousands of peoples out there. So that is the primary outlet for content because people then sign up and they know they’re going to receive value in that inbox every single week. And that is so powerful because it means they stay subscribed as well. So you guys send a weekly email.

    Yep, absolutely. We’re thinking of making that bi-weekly, but at the moment it’s just weekly and yet then the rest goes out on social. I mean our main channels, I suppose, are Instagram. I mean, we have, we’ll have over a hundred thousand followers by the time this episode ads, which quite exciting Facebook, we have big groups on Facebook.

    I have a big networking group there with 47,000 people, which is free. So those are the main channels ready, but email first and foremost. And then, and I suppose that’s 0.2 and the sort of six step process. It’s all about the SEO as well. And I’ve only recently hired someone for the first time to do that before that it was just me writing lots of really good content,

    then hiring people to write really good content. And I’ve always believed that rather than delving into what Google says about its algorithm, the best thing you can do is to just write top notch content, make sure it’s a good length and make sure people want to keep coming back to read it basically. So, you know, one of the things you said to me behind the scenes as well before we started recording this with that,

    and I think this is important for people to know that you have been consistently hitting the pavement with content and putting content out for seven years. I think that’s important for people to know that consistency is king here. And I’d love also how you say that you clean your list. And I think people are afraid to do that as well. You know, get people that have an open things off their list.

    I think people are really afraid to do that. And I love that you said that because we want a vibrant list of people that are actually absorbing your content in and really love what you’re doing rather than a dead list. And when people really don’t, who wants to talk to people that don’t want to listen. And so I love that you said that as well,

    but I feel like one of the important things to say here about this number two is that you were just out there posting, like you said, rain or shine for seven years, and this is organic growth. You guys, we aren’t buying a hundred thousand people to end up on the reins list. This is, you know, fully putting amazing content out there that people want to absorb and organic growth.

    And so I’m really admire how hard you’ve worked at doing this. And I just want to commend you for that. People want to shortcut all the time and it’s not that you can’t be successful fast, but there is, there’s much more to the iceberg underneath the water, for Sure. Absolutely. And I’ve seen so many people sort of try to shortcut or get bored of doing it.

    And then if it doesn’t work within three months, they’re like, oh, I’ll do something else. And so many of the entrepreneurs who started in my sort of year group, I suppose, when I got going, they’re all doing something different now and I’m sitting there going why? And they’re like, I’m really impressed. You kept going with like, well,

    yeah. And look at what I’ve achieved by just plugging away at the same thing every single day. It’s been amazing. Wow. Well that alone, what a great testimony and just a great amount of encouragement. That’s exactly right. And I think that we get so afraid that maybe we’re doing the right things, or we need a confirmation faster in that trust in what you’re doing and what you’re creating and the consistency in doing it.

    And that’s a whole podcast episode on itself. So I just want to highlight that. And I just think that’s incredibly powerful. So we talked about step number one and then step number two is just really being out there consistently posting SEO, you know, really diving into that. And then step number three is one of my favorites in people. It’s not that I think that entrepreneurs don’t want to do that.

    They all do, but I don’t necessarily believe that there are many entrepreneurs that fully understand how to fiercely protect their brand. So let’s talk about number three. Yeah. So three is all about the brand and I’ve created a really, really strong brand around formula Botanica. And when I look at a lot of digital marketers online, they often bypass that step.

    They just go straight for the ads, the shortcut, as we said, and actually building that strong brand is something that has made the company so unshakeable. So rock solid that if something terrible happened to us, we would weather it because the brand is so strong. And I protect that brand fiercely. Now I have brand guidelines. I make people read them all the time.

    I, I tweak little, you know, the very fact that I’m sat here in a green top, in a green office, it’s just all part of the brand. I live in every single components of it. And that comes down to how we speak the tone we use in the emails that go out, even in our help desk, the way we support people,

    the way the courses are put together, the way we show up for events, just literally every little detail is overlooked by that brand. And people often come to me and they’re like, can I say this? And I’ll go, ah, let’s rejig it slightly. So it looks like that. And this is the reason behind it. So I’m constantly trying to educate my team as well so that they can live and breathe that with me because no one can take that away from you.

    You know, if your ads bomb or if no one comes to a website, oh, you know, if something goes horribly wrong on social media, your brand is still there. And that is a thing of beauty that I think, yeah, as you said, lots of people overlooked, but yet it’s the core components to growing an online empire. Wow.

    That is so powerful as I have my, my wave mug and my, my way of wall. And it’s what we do. If you guys are watching behind the scenes in the video, you have to, you have to go to the YouTube channel. You have to see Lorraine behind the scenes and see all her great. It’s fabulous. And this is an example of that,

    but I also love what you said with the language and the tone and the brand personality. And I think that that is so incredibly important as well. So thank you for that. I love number three. So what’s number four. What was a fourth thing? What’s a fourth step in your formulation for building this online empire. So we’ve got the content,

    we’ve got the distribution, we’ve got the brand step. Number four is all about the community. I mean, it’s the people who sits at the heart of all of this in some respects, they should be step number one, but I thought let’s walk through all of them in sequential order. So I’ve built a really strong community around formula Botanica as has my team as well.

    And these are people who we know we love, even though we have over 13,000, almost 14,000 students and graduates. We know so many of them and we get really excited by them because we know what they’re doing. You know, I have, if you’re watching the video, I have all of that products behind me. I sit here with them on my desk.

    I’m always sort of holding them up, going, oh, this is so-and-so. She lives in Denmark. And this is so and so she lives in India and you know, the community is what makes us who we are. We wouldn’t be where we are without these incredible people. And I’ve met so many of them over the years. I know their stories.

    I’ve become friends with so many of them as well. And they inspire me to do better as well, because that constantly out there changing the world, being part of this global green beauty movement that we’re spearheading and yeah, they’re helping us drive it forward. So to do that, we’ve used social media. We use Facebook groups. It sounds really simple.

    And it is in a way, and in the beginning I would be in that and I would show up all the time for our students and graduates. And that was how we built this incredible heartwarming community where are really kind and generous to each other. And that still exist today. Even though we have, I think about 10,000 students in our online classroom,

    it’s got huge, but still that, that really heartwarming aspect is that. And if someone posts and says, I’m having a bad day, you know, there are hundreds of comments from people just going, we’ve got your back. And most of the people who go through our courses and launch a brand, go, I love the courses I learnt so much.

    I can formulate, you know, you’ve empowered me, but oh my goodness, the community, I wouldn’t have got to where I am without my, my sisterhood, basically, because as you can imagine, it is mostly women who go through our courses and that has just been heartwarming and incredible to watch. So that’s step number four. And Question about that.

    You have both a free, and so we’re talking, you know, we’re talking about business modeling, restructuring for our listeners. You have both a free and paid community, Correct? Yeah. We have a big free networking group as well, which has almost 50,000 members. And that’s incredible too. And now I have a community manager, but not just that.

    We also have a whole team of people around the world, our student mentors, so that we have 24 7 coverage in our groups because otherwise, you know, it is like a groups. You have to be there to sort of support, to help, to moderate sometimes as well. And so I have staff members literally around the globe so that there is always someone on and they have a rotor.

    So they’re going through the groups all the time. And that has been incredible actually. So the community is everything to her. I love that. I love that. And Facebook makes sense, you know, the global community Facebook makes sense. And, you know, it’s when we talk about structure and tech and enabling what you want to do and the experience that that does,

    you know, it’s really completely make sense. Okay. So then number five, what is the fifth step to your formulation to building a global empire? So stage, you’ve got your ducks in a row and now you have to start really putting yourself out into the world. And so step number five is very much that I’ve made sure that we are viewed as thought leaders in our space.

    And again, that can sound like quite a pretentious word. You know, what is a thought leader? It’s someone who has an opinion, the other people readily take on board and follow. And we have that. Now people follow us because we teach them all viewpoints and all sorts of what natural means and what green beauty means and what clean beauty means.

    You know, we’ve redefined a lot of these concepts and we’re regularly tagged in social media posts where people go, I listened to this podcast from formula Botanica and I now understand that the three or four shades of natural, and I’m going to show you have made my own little infographic. And I finally understand these concepts and I’ve learned them from these guides. And we do that thought leadership through,

    I have my own podcast as well called green beauty conversations, which is all about green and sustainable beauty and the science and indie beauty. But I’m also constantly on summits, on podcasts, giving interviews, speaking to journalists, you know, I out that all the time as is my team. And that means that people view us as the people to follow because we hold opinions on things.

    We share those opinions. I make sure that they’re always balanced. They fit with the brand. They’re very sort of rational and scientific and the heartwarming and friendly and natural and people buy into that. So you have to have opinions when you’re running a business. And I see a lot of people really struggle with this because they don’t want to put themselves out there,

    but it is. Yeah. Step number five, for reason, it’s been a huge part of our growth in becoming this global empire. It is so important. And I understand that. And I, I think that there is a, there is a fear about not having everybody agree with you, but that’s also part of the destruction and the part of leadership and,

    and most leaders don’t have, you know, everybody that loves them. I mean, that’s the way it is when we’re doing works. That work, that really matters. It means it’s work, that’s different. And to do work that’s different. It means that you’re probably going against the grain on the way that the commonplace has been. And so I really love that.

    You said that. And I think that that is, that’s just very encouraging for some of our listeners to hear. Okay. And then step number six, what is this final icing on the cake to bring it all together? So following on, from what I said about putting yourself out there, now you have to go and form a network. And that means getting to know people,

    big players, small players, any players, really people who also hold opinions and who are active in your world in your sector. And we now have partnerships with NBC brands, with our graduates, with bloggers, with influences, but also with the mainstream beauty industry. You know, I have stood on major stages in front of the big players, the L’Oreals,

    the Unilevers, the Proctor and gambles, but also the indie players at the same time. And I’m trying to bring people into our world so that they understand that we’re the bridge that brings everything together. So for instance, we are, we’re the formal NDBC partner for the world’s largest cosmetic ingredients exhibition. They have 12,000 visitors a year. You know, they tour around Europe.

    It’s like going into three aircraft hangers. You know, when you go and visit these trade shows and we’re there in DVC part in that. Now I have spoken at major industry events because of a lot of the work that we’ve done and the networking that we’ve done. And because of that, that’s opened the door whereby people don’t do formula Botanica as Lorraine’s little side hustle with her baby on their hip anymore.

    They view us as a big accredited award-winning online institution. And obviously that’s all part of the seven years of just showing up every week and just putting yourself at that. But you have to make a network and you have to invest in that network and be kind and really give back because it will come back to you tenfold every single time. And that’s certainly what I’ve found over the years.

    That’s Incredible. And so let’s recap these six steps, and then I have one last question for you. So Lorraine’s formula to build a global empire, but not just any global empower you guys that really matters. It’s really, really making a change in this space are your six steps. Okay? Step number one, content creation, educate and entertain your followers at the same time.

    Step to constantly promote that content, put it at that great SEO, social media outreach, but most importantly, your list, you need one step, number three, build a strong brand that you fiercely protect and build. And you’re constantly growing it. Step number four, create a thriving and happy community. Make sure that the people around you know, that you love them because they’re your biggest assets,

    your biggest fans, they’re everything. Step number five, be viewed as a thought leader, have opinions and put those opinions out there and make sure that people buy into those opinions and hear you. And step number six, build a network and build a strong network that you pour your love and heart into because it will come back to you. Tenfold, how I Love that.

    I love that. Thank you so much for sharing all this wisdom. This is an amazing lesson. You guys hear that you are hearing and I’m taking notes and listening right along, right along with you. And so I have one last question for you. And I don’t ask this. Isn’t like a set question. I ask all the guests. I just really,

    I would love to know this answer from you. What have you learned about yourself along the way through this process? What do you believe about your, I know I didn’t even prepare you for, this is such a tough question, right? Sorry. You know, like what, what do you know and believe about yourself that only could have come through your tenacity,

    your resilience, your consistency. What have you learned about yourself in this process? That is a great question. So before I took them formula Botanica I worked all over the world. I lived in multiple countries. I worked in high-powered jobs. You know, I ran all sorts of fantastic projects, but I kept coming up against this massive glass ceiling everywhere I went.

    You’re too young. You’re too inexperienced. Lorraine. It’s too scary, too outspoken too. In your face, you voice your opinions too much. I do that. And it got to the point that it started to chip away at me because you start to internalize a lot of what you hear. And when you’re constantly told you need to tone it down,

    you need to be less outspoken. Yeah. You need to put your opinions out there less. You start to do that. And I now know that the only way I think for women to achieve true gender equality in the workplace is by building something like this for themselves and driving it forward. And I know myself that I am more confident and more able,

    and I believe in myself more than I ever have before because of the work that I’ve done here over the last seven years. And no one can take that away from me and I will never walk into a workplace ever again, where someone will tell me I’m too scary because I will eat them alive. Thank you so much for everything that you have shared.

    I know our listeners just like Marriott, we just want to eat up everything you’re giving to us. So, you know, and just absorb from you. So this is, I’m just so honored to meet you. Thank you so much for applying to be on this show and wanting to come here and share your story with this audience. It’s incredibly powerful and proven and you know,

    that’s what we, that’s what we do. We bring in experts like you, that have created their expertise through resilience and, and determination. And, and I’m just so glad that you’re here. So how can people find you? How can they connect with you? All of you join your, your formulation school. If we have listeners that want to start doing their own thing and they haven’t done it yet,

    or go and follow you to learn and watch and observe how you are building and how you’re continuing to grow your empire, where can we find you? So wherever formula botanica.com, where we have a free online organic cosmetic formulation course that anyone can take Instagram is the biggest platform for formula Botanica as well. But I am also on Instagram and on Facebook where you can follow me.

    And I talk more about the business side of things, the sustainability side of things. Cause that’s my bag. And I just want to say, thank you so much April for having this amazing podcast and for welcoming me onto it, because it’s fantastic to talk to you. And it’s a real honor to be here. It’s such A pleasure and Lorraine and I will be live in clubhouse.

    You guys. So this is episode number 237. It will be episode number 237 when it drops. So Lorraine and I are going to be here to talk to you. And you guys get to come in, ask Lorraine all of your questions, whether it’s about formulations or how she went from baby on the hip to literal global empire creator through online business.

    These steps work. This process works with consistency. And so we’re going to be live in clubhouse on July 28th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Please come join us there. We’ll make sure all of the links to where you can connect with us in clubhouse are found in the show notes of this episode@sweetlifeco.com. Ryan, thank you so much. We really, really appreciate it.

    Thank you. It’s been awesome.

    Episode 233: Create Videos People Watch, Engage With, and Buy From – with April Beach and McCall Jones

    McCall Jones SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    GET THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO ONLINE BUSINESS MODELS, OFFERS and LIFESTYLES

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    Experts who are ready to increase sales with video. 

    Summary:

    You’re an expert, and you’re pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos aren’t exactly reflecting just how amazing you are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you truly are and how you’re showing up on video. Or there could also be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or entertaining viewers long enough to stay until the call to action. Does this sound like you? 
     
    No worries my friend! McCall Jones, creator of Charisma Hacking, is here to break down her proven framework to “make strangers trust you and followers become aggressively devoted to you.” 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the F.A.C.E. Framework and how to apply this to your videos
    2. See the formula to pin-point your own areas of improvement
    3. Solve the disconnect between the great videos you already make, and your lack of sales

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hey everybody. And welcome to episode number 200 in 33, we have a very special treat in store for you today. You’re Going to leave today’s episode with fully knowing how to look at your own videos,

    how you’re showing up in video and edit and change anything so that you can create an, a crazy devotion to you where people love you and increase your sales. So we’re going to dive into all of that in just a second with our guest expert today, McCall Jones, before we get started, first of all, welcome if you’ve never listened to this show before I’m April beach,

    founder of the Sweetlife company and host here at the sweet life entrepreneurial podcast. Thank you guys so much. I keep forgetting to share back with our audience. I’ve been trying to in the last couple of episodes that you guys have just voted me top 50 moms and podcasting, and I appreciate you so much that never would have happened without you turning in your votes and lifting this show up and lifting me up.

    And I appreciate it so much. So I just want to say thank you to you guys. We’ve been producing this show for about four and a half years, and if you’ve been a faithful listener here on the show, you know that the Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast gives you business trainings from the trenches proven business trainings from decades and decades of proven frameworks systems pass and coaching to bring your business to the next level.

    We like to say that this is the podcast that other coaches would charge thousands for the information you hear on this show. And I just want to thank you so much personally, for being a listener. If you are not officially a subscribed yet, please click that subscribe button and take a screenshot and tag me in it. Take a screenshot tag at April beach life.

    And so I can know you. I can know who’s listening, and then I want to follow you back and I want to follow your business back, and then we can keep supporting you back on Instagram. So I would love to do that for you as well as if you haven’t connected with us yet. Every single week we host a live Sweetlife entrepreneur pot house podcast room on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time on Wednesdays.

    That is your time to come to me, come to our guests and ask your questions. We want to workshop with you based on the podcast trainings that we drop here on the show. So listen to the show as a drop some Monday, join us live in clubhouse on Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And we’re there to workshop with you in order to find us on clubhouse.

    All you need to do is search my name. You can search at April beach and then click follow up and click the bell little bell next to it, to turn on notifications. And you will actually also see a schedule of rooms that I’m hosting, and you can even RSVP for those rooms to get a notification on your own calendar, as well as we always post the clubhouse calendar every single week to my Instagram,

    which is at April beach life. So lots of places for you to get connected and to get answers and to get support. We’re just not here talking to ourselves. Everything we do here is about giving you proven strategies and giving you support to take your business to the next level. And let’s go ahead and dive in and talk about what we’re talking about on this episode with our amazing,

    amazing guests. So who this episode is for first of all, if you don’t know what stage of business you’re in, just stop for a second. We actually have a self-assessment you can take, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, and you can take a self-assessment and you can find out exactly what stage or phase of business you’re in as composed as compared,

    I should say to my lifestyle entrepreneur roadmap. And the reason why I say that is because every single one of our episodes here on the podcast are tagged to a stage of business, because I don’t want to just give you more content. We want to give you a transformation, but if you’re not ready for what we’re teaching you and talking about on today’s show,

    based on where you are in business, then go pick another episode to listen to this. That is, that means that, you know, you, aren’t in alignment with where your business is growing right now. And we want to make sure that you continually stay in alignment. So I say all of that to say that this episode is for those of you who are in phases two,

    three or four. So primarily you two and threes, but also some of you fours. So if you don’t know where you are, again, you can pause this and just open up a new window on your phone. Really quick, go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, or you can text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And we will send you a link to take that,

    to make sure that what you’re being taught, what we’re pouring out today aligns with something that is going to take your business to the next level, because you’re ready for it. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. This show is very important because you’re an expert and you’re probably really pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos.

    Aren’t maybe re exactly reflecting how incredible you are, how great your services are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you are and how you’re showing up a video. Or there could be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or maybe making your videos a little bit more entertaining. So that’s what we’re solving today on the show.

    And my friend McCall Jones, creator of charisma hacking is here and she is breaking down her proven formula to solve these problems. So let me tell you whom a call is. She’s going to introduce herself a bit. So I’ll just read a little bit here to get you prepared. She’s a founder of charisma, hacky, and a set of business systems built from Hollywood tactics that make audiences notice you then obsess over you and then compulsively buy from you.

    And she goes in and she’ll share her whole entertainment story on this show. It’s fascinating. And the connection between her background in entrepreneur growth is this perfect superpower that she has is there. You’re really gonna love today’s show the secrets of charisma hacking success is in its systems and how they adapt to each entrepreneur’s personalities. McCall says we’ve cracked the code on how any entrepreneur can amplify the best parts of themselves to build a rabid fan base,

    regardless of whether they are as intense as Gary V nurturing his Bernay brown, energetic as Russell Bronson, or matter of fact is Dave Ramsey with charisma hacking clients have increased YouTube video watch times by up to 242% tripled their revenue, 20 X, their Facebook ad click-through rate, and more than anything else, finally, we’re able to connect with their audience and meaningful way and deliver their message in a way where they responded by being the best versions of themselves.

    That’s everything you get today on the show. And it is a little bit longer than most of our episodes. So I just wanted to prepare you for that. You are going to want to stay till the end. I promise you, you are those of you go getters that never leave before the end. You guys are so rad. We love you,

    but if you can’t stay too long, make sure you pause the episode and you come back to it. All right, let’s go ahead and dive in and all of the show notes and everything I mentioned previously, and everything that is going to be mentioned on the show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 233. Let’s go Hey guys,

    welcome to episode number 233 here on the sweet left entrepreneur and business podcast. And I am joined by my new good friend. I say new good friends because yes, of course, all my listeners are laughing and be like, oh yeah, I bet you met her on clubhouse. Yes, you’re right. I’ve met McAllen clubhouse. By the way, side note,

    if you aren’t over there yet, you need to come over there and chat with us on clubhouse, because this is what it’s all about. Meeting amazing people that can pour into your business that can pour into my business and create these amazing dream teams, a business collaborations that bring us all to the next level. And I have had such a great time the last five months getting to know my friend McCall Jones.

    And I’m so excited. She’s here on the show today. So I’m so proud of be April. Yeah, guys, you got to get over to clubhouse is the place to be. We’re just making all new friends kind of hang out with us. Kim, hang out with us with that being said, one of the things that we know about clubhouses is it’s a great place to establish your superpower,

    your true superpower for how you get people results and your exact method and strategy. And you have risen to the top. It’s like the best rise to the top and clubhouse because of your very niche, amazingly charismatic, important like important superpower. So tell everybody who you are, what you do and how you got into doing what you do first. Let’s start there.

    Yeah, of course. So I own a company called charisma hacking. So with charisma hacking, we work with coaches to solve two problems in their business. Number one, people aren’t watching my videos and number two, people are watching my videos, but they are not buying. So we tap into your specific personality to make sure that you are being yourself so that you get higher value customers that stay forever.

    The way that I got into charisma have you, I’ll give you the short version. It’s a long story, but I grew up actually as a child performer. So I was performing in front of audiences of 25,000 when I was eight and 35,000 when I was 11. And I was performing on a very consistent basis, did a couple of movies in high school.

    I was in high school musical two a, which was really fun. But the whole time I have this incredible performance anxiety, that was pretty crippling. All of my worth in my mind was wrapped up in the fact that I was a performer and I had this recurring nightmare. That one day I would wake up and not be able to sing, not be able to act,

    not be able to perform and that nobody would love me anymore. And this nightmare started when I was a really little girl and it led me to, you know, long story short, it led me to creating these frameworks back then I called them checklists so that I could wake up and feel like I could teach myself how to do what I did the night before.

    I also started paying attention to what audiences paid attention to and what they cheered for louder, things like that. It all started with Donnie. Ozmen, it’s a long story, but basically I was watching him perform. He saying right before me at the Steve young benefit retirement cruise. And when I was having this panic attack backstage, basically I saw the audience interact with him in a way that I had never seen before.

    And I snuck over to the side of this room divider that they used as this backstage area. And I honestly got really envious and really jealous. And I thought to myself, I could do exactly what he’s doing. And I started to make a checklist of like, oh, what he’s doing with his hands, what he’s doing with his space, what he’s doing with his voice,

    who is he pointing at? How is he walking on the stage? And I started to log these things into this checklist. And then I realized that these checklists were going to lower my anxiety considerably. And I just made checklist for everything. After that, I realized that it’s more of a science and it led to creating checklists for acting, for dance for all different types of audiences and sizes.

    I used it for auditions. And then when I was 18, I was fired from an acting job for being too fat. They literally dismissed me from set because I had been wait between the audition and when we were actually filming, which it isn’t their right to do that. But it was very devastating to me. All of a sudden this fear of rejection became just rejection.

    And in that moment I vowed to never get on camera. Again. I knew that I never wanted to do that again. I, I didn’t want to feel the way that I was feeling in that moment. So I didn’t, and I stayed low for a couple of years. Then the really depressing thing about that. I went into this very deep depression.

    I had spent my whole life at this point, perfecting the art of being in front of people really perfecting it of, you know, all of these checklists of like, this works, this doesn’t in front of these audiences. You move this large and in front of these audiences, here’s what you’re supposed to do. And you know, an auditions. And then I wasn’t using the skills that I built over,

    you know, my entire life. And within a couple of years I had somebody come to me and asked me if I would help then with an audition. And I said, yes, under very strict circumstances, because I didn’t want to be the reason they succeeded or failed. And I told her that I would help her as long as we did it before after video.

    And if I could prove that I made a difference, then yes, we could do it again. I could take her money and we can move forward that way. And I just taught her some of the checklists that I had really never verbalized out or verbalized yet outside of, of my brain. And it worked in a very real way. The before after video was insane,

    which led to my whole first business, which was helping entertainers basically be better in front of people. And then about a year and a half ago now I went to funnel hacking live, which is a big internet marketing convention. And I just went to see my sister-in-law speak. She was speaking. I knew it was big deal for her, but I knew nothing about the internet marketing world.

    And as I looked around, I started taking notes of all these entrepreneurs that when they would come up to me, they would light up and share all of their solutions and the amazing things they were doing. And then we’d go five feet, you know, to the left or to the right. And they would be networking with other people and they would shut down and it would be a completely different person.

    And then I’d see them filming things for ads or joint ventures or logs. And they were just not great. They were not themselves. And I realized that nobody would ever hear their solutions. Nobody would ever listened to them. People on stage that I was just like, oh my gosh, they just had these techniques. I could help them. And as I looked around,

    I realized, you know, with entertainers my whole life, I had gone through, you know, the, that I’m going to change the world first as a performer was, I’m going to make people happy. Then as a coach of entertainers, I’m going to change the world by basically trying to help people be famous. And then as I sat there surrounded by people who had these incredible solutions that truly were going to change people’s lives.

    I realized that my impact on the world could be infinite because theirs was, if I empowered them to make people, listen to them, basically. So Prisma hacking it’s been going really well. And it’s really fun. All of the techniques that we use, like I said, have been proven. I’ve used them since I was eight years old. I have hundreds of before after videos proving their effectiveness.

    Yeah. That’s what brought us here. That’s I really, I don’t think I could do anything else. This is so much a part of my identity and everything that had been since I was a little girl. Wow. I have honestly, never heard that whole entire story. I never knew that that was your background actually in all the time we spent together on clubhouse.

    It’s really interesting what you say. So I don’t know if you knew this, but my middle son is a professional hip hop dancer. And so we have lived in Los Angeles before COVID a week, a month. He was there working. And interestingly enough, since COVID, and since he’s kind of not currently dancing right now, but in some of them,

    some of the, the wave that you were sharing, like about viewing yourself and how you show up. I see some of that. I’ve seen some of that in him and some of those same challenges actually. And so it is really, really fascinating to hear that. And just being like a mom in that industry, there is nothing like that industry.

    And how cool is that that absolutely a completely, perfectly positioned you to help other kinds of stars, people that have amazing solutions for businesses, but actually utilize what you know, from the entertainment space, because it’s like, what does that reminded me of gladiator of Russell Crowe when he’s like, are you not entertained? You know what I mean? I just think that’s such an amazing story and absolutely you’re the perfect person to give this solution to people.

    And you know, me being in the entrepreneur space, my whole life you’re right. I see so many people that have these amazing solutions, but yet it’s not getting out. There’s like a block of some kind and you have the gift to see that. So I’m so excited. You’re on the show today. We’re going to talk about your framework that you’ve developed,

    literally, since you were eight, this genius started following your framework that people need. And when we give people frameworks to build their own genius within that’s when we truly created something, that’s amazing. That’s going to, like you said, your one framework impacts literally a magnitude and a multitude of people. Let’s talk about what does this look like? Like,

    first of all, when people say, what is actual charisma hacking? Like what actually is the definition of charisma hacking? Let’s start there. Absolutely. So I defined charisma a little bit different and I will tell you why. The first thing that I feel like people define charisma as is like what the masses consider high energy. And they’re like, oh,

    they can command a room because they’re this very specific personality type. I do not define charisma that way with all the research that I’ve done with all the clients that I’ve worked with. And with my own experience, I defined charisma as making strangers trust you and making those who know you aggressively devoted to you, that does not matter. And it’s not dependent on your personality type.

    It only matters the level in which you communicate with people. So for me, you know, it’s exactly what you said with the entertainment industry. Everything is about rejection. You get so many more rejections than you actually get jobs, really. And you know, people who like you or dislike you and people are picking apart every single part of your personality.

    And for me, you know, growing up a lot of times, people wanted me to be something different. And because I was an actress, I could do that. I had a very specific skillset that any time somebody didn’t like a very specific part of my personality, I would change. And a lot of times they wanted me to be sexier or I was called step Ferdie.

    Once some people have told me that because I am bubbly, they thought I was stupid. Like, there’s so many different things that kind of built up this, what people want me to be, which I know a lot of times that’s how people define charisma. They say, what do people want me to be? What do they need me to be?

    And I will be that when I started charisma hacking, you know, remember I made this vow to myself that I would never get on camera again. And at funnel hacking live, I had this really interesting experience where the whole first day that I was planning, you know, creating this new business model, I was trying to figure out a way for me to do it behind the scenes.

    Cause without whole first business, I was, I was very much behind the scenes. I was pushing other people, you know, out in front of the spotlight on the stage on camera. I was the director, the producer, and I felt like I was happy and satisfied with that. So that’s what I tried to do the whole first day. I tried to figure out a way to not be on camera,

    to not be the face of my business. And I very quickly realized that that was not possible if I wanted to make the impact that I wanted to. And there was a wonderful woman who spoke at funnel hacking librarians, Heather Quizzle, she’s a friend of ours now. And I went up to compliment her on her speech and she stopped me and said,

    what do you do? And I tried on my new business title and my new business description. And she just told me it was like, she saw through me. She’s like, whatever you do, make sure the face of it, make sure that you are on every video, on every ad on everything. And it really struck me. I was like,

    oh my gosh, I’m being seen. So when I got home, I had to make this promise to myself that I made all of my clients also promise themselves that they have to be themselves 100% of the time. They cannot try to think, Hey, if I’m going to be charismatic, I need to be whatever people want me to be. Whatever people think I should be,

    whatever will attract the masses or satisfy the masses, whatever they will. Like. Instead we focus on this aggressive devote. And like I said before, that actually draws people to your specific personality. I will tell you, I am not for everyone. And a lot of people will tell you that, right? I am cooky and crazy and silly and all these.

    And I wasn’t that for a really long time. And my greatest achievement, I believe with charisma hacking is building a business around actually who I am. Because every time people watch my videos, every time they move higher in my programs or up my value ladder, they only want to get to know me more or at the very bottom. They know if I’m not for them and they leave don’t waste any time,

    I don’t spend any money marketing towards people who are not a good fit. So with this, when we put it okay, charisma hacking, right? We make people themselves and we make them not only themselves, but that version of themselves, that level of themselves is the very best person they can be in their business and for their clients. So when I said like,

    I didn’t want to be the face of my company or led me to taking all of these amazing things, all of these things and really breaking down what was important, how do we make you yourself? Because the frightening thing is you absolutely can build an audience if you are not being yourself. And that should terrify you because all of a sudden you’re creating a new problem.

    You are building an audience for a person who does not exist. If you create an alter ego and a character that you feel we’ll help you be less nervous and you just no put on your Sasha fierce face and you go on camera, you are building an audience for that person. They are investing in that version of you. That is not sustainable. You can build an audience that way,

    but you will spend time and money acquiring an audience, acquiring a customer that is not a good fit for any of your higher programs, especially as a coach, because the closer they get to you, the more they will realize. First, you create distrust. You create a sense of discomfort because they realize you’re not the same person and they leave, right.

    So instead we say, okay, you’re going to be the face of your company. You’re going to be the same 100% of the time so that we can create trust and we can make them aggressively devoted to you by being the face of your company. So I know we have a big face framework that we’re going to go through too, but that’s the core Prismic mapping.

    And that’s a scary statement to hear for some of our listeners. And I am so glad that you said that the fact that you are literally building an audience around somebody that doesn’t exist, because it isn’t you and you aren’t showing up authentically to who you are and who you’re going to be after they buy you and, you know, refunds and, you know,

    disgruntled people. I mean, that’s all part of what happens in that. And so it’s so important that you said what you said, but I also think it’s pretty sobering in the fact that you said it as clearly as you did. And so I also know that, you know, we have a lot of listeners and with the process of where they are in business,

    when you are starting to launch, I actually think that in my experience, in coaching businesses, through the development and growth phase, the launch people, surprisingly, they, yes, they deal with kind of struggling with this so much. They actually are pretty good at being themselves. It’s after they start getting a little traction, I have seen them go to this next point of saying,

    oh, but I’m not enough. Oh, now I need to become somebody different in order to actually keep getting a little bit more attraction. This is usually like in the first 18 months, sometimes I see that transition. And so I love that you said that because eventually that’s going to be a brick wall for them. And thank you so much for speaking the truth.

    And that’s what we do here on this show. And I know our listeners really want and need to hear it. So let’s talk about this face framework. What is it, why do people need it, break it down for us? Absolutely. So with the space framework, what we are really assessing is two things. So it’s your personality style or type,

    or your charisma style or type that’s one side of it. And the second side of it is the level, right? So the first thing that we establish is making sure that your personality type is right, or we can even say is true, right? And I’ll break down the different parts of your personality that we make sure that we assess the second part of that.

    It never changes your personality or charisma type never changes, but the level does as you get more competent or more, you know, at an expert level on video, these very specific things are going to level up, but who you are and your personality type doesn’t change them up super important. So we go through F a C E so F is the floor,

    or we can save a level. We can call it the Flavell level if you want. Right. And this is where we assess how competent you are or how effective you are at making sure these next three, the AC and E are the right type and what level they’re at. So Fs floor. So we’re going to assess the level a is authority.

    C is and E is entertainment. So with all of our research that we’ve done, you know, not only over the last year and a half, but obviously for the last, you know, 20 years, I have found that you have to have these three things in order to fully connect with a human. Now everybody has them within their personality. So it’s really important that on-camera,

    we make sure that all three of these things are present in very specific times. So authority makes people act, it makes people buy. And I’ll tell you how we measure that in just a second. Compassion makes people confess. It makes you safe. It makes them engage in the comments. And I’ll tell you how we measure that. And then entertainment makes people watch,

    right? So with each one of these things, we have a way to measure, not how you are in person, right? What we’re saying is we have to make sure how you are in person when you are with your very favorite person in the world is the exact same person. We call this emotional accuracy as you are on camera. So we look at these very specific types of your personality or parts of your personality.

    So authority would be like, when you’re in charge of something, when you are in your element, teaching something, how do you act when you are with your very favorite person? We have very specific ways. We measure that with compassion. It’s when you’re being empathetic with people, when you are counseling them, when they come to about hard things or when you’re being vulnerable,

    how are you sounding? Right. Voice face, body language, right? How do you sound? How do you move? How do you speak when you are actually doing those things with your favorite person in real life? And that entertainment is when you are goofing off, when you are being lighthearted, all those different things. Now, each one of these things are going to look very different for different people.

    Some people’s authority is based in strength and empowering, and it can even feel a little bit aggressive. Some people’s authority is very much based in patients and making sure that people know that they know what they’re talking about by being very patient with them, right? Compassion, same thing. Some people are like, Hey, I’m gonna kick you in the butt.

    Like we got to go. This is how I’m being compassionate. And other people are deep listeners. And they want people to feel very seen entertainment. Some people are dry, some people are bubbly. Some people are, you know, the kid in the back, coroner making jokes under his breath, right? There are different types of all of these different things.

    So making sure that you assess how you are when you’re with your very favorite person, once again, I’ll give you the ways to measure these. You say, how is my voice? Right? The most common thing that I see with my clients is when they’re on video with me and they’ll be like, oh my gosh, I’m so excited. This is so great.

    And then they get on video when we’re filming now. Like I am so excited to be here. And I’m like, okay, well, if your voice like this, we’re actually excited. And then you sound like this. When you’re on camera, when you’re excited, it’s not emotionally accurate. Right? A lot of people say the word authentic. I don’t actually like to use the word authentic for this very specific reason.

    I like systems. I like to measure. I like to be measurable and repeatable. And authenticity is just a little bit vague. Right? I know what they mean. And I, I think that that’s fantastic, but emotional accuracy with exactly what I just did with my voice, we can say, is it accurate? Or is it not? Is that actually how you sound move speed when you’re excited,

    when you’re being compassionate, when you’re being authoritative or not. Right? So we dive into all these different things. So now with the level, so once we find the type, once we find your specific personality type, then we assess the level. And as you go up in level, you are able to retain attention more. Your watch times go up.

    That’s the entertainment part. You are able to know pain points, objections, and get more comments and engagement because your compassion is higher and you are able to move people to action in very real ways, any call to action that you give them, whether it’s by opt in, watch the next video. If it’s in a course, it’s very effective. And people do what you basically tell them to do,

    right? So we have your type and then we start moving up your level. So within the authority, I’ll give you this. And then I’ll tell you a quick story. So within authority, we have five different levels. Only the top three, make you any money. The bottom two do not. The very bottom level of authority is the level of authority where,

    okay, have you guys ever watched somebody and thought they have no idea what they’re talking? Right? You watch them in your life, their stuff, or associate my business with them. It would do bad things to my business. It would not be a good idea, right? Yes. Bottom level of authority. The next level is the most interesting level because it still does not make you money,

    but this person is very likable. You watch their stuff, you share their stuff. You like route them on from the side, but you would never pay them money if you will watch them. But you’re like, oh my gosh, they’re making their dreams come true. This is so great. I would never hire them as a coach, but I would totally,

    you root for them, right? I’ll share their stuff. This is great, right? Still doesn’t make you money. You can be the most likable person in the world have the most views in the world. But if you’re missing that authority, you still aren’t making any money. The next level up from there is employee authority. What this means, we’re basically saying how much control will somebody give you of their business?

    Right? So with employee authority, somebody would give you a checklist. They would feel, and a lot of coaching clients, guys, if you are a coach and you get clients that feel like they will give you the checklist of what you’re going to do, you have employee level authority. Even if you can get them to bring you money. At first,

    it is not a good client for you, right? Because they feel if they gave you a checklist of exactly what to do, you would be competent to accomplish it. The next one is contractor level authority. This is the good, because of the glides who feel like every single thing you do is up for discussion and that they can decide which actions they want to take.

    And not because with contractor level authority, they trust you in one very specific area, but they don’t trust you with steps. They don’t trust you with direction. These are things like funnel builders, where we say, okay, you know, I am in charge, but I trust that you have expertise in building this funnel. But every single thing we do is up for discussion.

    And in the very top level of authority is coach level authority. When you get to this level of authority, not only will people pay you and see you as a coach, but when you get coaching clients, you have been given control. They do what you say. They trust your expertise in your area. It’s something where you can give them steps and direction.

    And they are ideal clients. They pay you money. And then they thank you for taking their money because you have this level of authority. They don’t question that, which is really great. So with all these things, like I said, I have not said anything about some personality types have more authority than others, right? Every single personality type, regardless if you’re introverted,

    extroverted, loud, quiet, whatever, right. Every single personality type goes through these levels. Right. And the way that we measure, if you’re being effective in this is do people move to action, right? Do they buy, or do they opt in or whatever your call to action is at the end of your video, if they don’t, you know,

    your authority is probably down in the second from bottom level, right. They probably like you, if they’re engaging with you and be like, oh my gosh, I’m being myself. Right. But they do not see the authority enough to buy from you. Go ahead. Given you so much. So yes, obviously so much to say, I’m sure our listeners are like,

    oh my gosh, okay. I’m like, I’m not taking notes by the way, side note, Macola and I are always co moderating clubhouse rooms. So just join us in a clubhouse room and, and McCall, and even expand on this for you personally as well. So this is really interesting as you were breaking it out. One of the things that I,

    from like the offer development side of it that I see as I see like level three and four, for those businesses that do like the done for you or the done with you type services, which is interesting because some coaches obviously also have another separate of their division of their company that is like the build-out or, you know, whatever that is the done for you.

    But one of the things that I coach my clients on is you’re not the person that does that. You’re the coach. Like you have to have a separate team to do that, that works with that client to actually implement that. That is a way to grow and scale your business. But I’ve never clearly, I like the way I’m communicating it has gotten through,

    but the way you communicated, even now, I’ll be able to say yes, because that’s a different level of authority in taking your coach authority and bringing it back down to the contractor or that employee authority is actually reducing your expertise and bringing you down a scale after they have paid you top dollar or whatever it is that you do. And so, as you were saying,

    all of that, that’s immediately. What I was thinking is these entrepreneurs that are listening to this show, small businesses that are listening to this show that have the coaching authority, but also this separate, oh, I’ll do it with you or I’ll do it for you after I coach you and strategize how to do that. It’s a great business model. It’s a great way to scale and grow your business.

    Like we even have a separate design division of our company, but I don’t do it. And so it’s just really interesting that you were saying that. So getting back to these coaches though, what do they do? McCall, if they are like, oh my gosh, I think I’m at this. I’m looking at my notes here. And like millions of McCall notes behind the scenes and with a pencil because my children steal all my pens.

    It’s all we have left in the house and you know, like, what is the deal? If they’re like, oh my gosh, I met this employee level. I’m not showing up with confidence. How do you get them from where they are now to that level five that I have the authority here. I know what I’m doing. You know, me,

    I’m like, I have a framework. Everybody has to have their own framework or method. How do we help them? Absolutely. Such a good question. So the very first thing that everybody needs to do is they need to make sure that their type is correct. Right. So you can be very competent. And if you’re trying to, you know,

    I don’t know how many of your listeners know who Garrett J white is, but if Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, right? These are two internet marketers in the online space. If Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, or let’s say Tony Robbins and Bernay brown, or Marie Forleo, if they tried to use the same tactics, they would work for one of them.

    And they would not work for the other one of them because they’re very different people, right? So if you look at Marie Forleo, the way that she entertains is very authentic to her, right? He uses her voice kind of like this, and she’s kind of spilling all over the place with Bernay brown. If Bernay brown, tried would be Marie Forleo,

    it would be a disaster. And Renee brown people would be like, I don’t buy it. I don’t buy, it would not only like lower her entertainment level, but it would also lower her authority level. Right? The first thing that people can sense is just a yes or a no, they just say is something off here, right? Is something off.

    So the first thing that you want to make sure that you do is we’re going to find emotional accuracy in all three of these areas. I’m going to give you a very specific thing that you can do in order to do that. Because being emotionally accurate first, then you can actually be likable, right? As soon as you’re likable, we can start to increase your authority with very specific things as well.

    So the first thing that you’re going to do, I’m going to tell you a very quick story. That’s going to make sense of how to do this. So we’re looking for emotional accuracy. So when I was a voice teacher, voice acting performance teacher, I had this wonderful nine-year-old student named Beck. He was incredible, was like a bounce off the wall,

    kind of spastic kid who seriously, it was one of my very favorite humans ever. And I had taught him singing lessons, voice lessons for the last six months. But this was the first time he wanted to try acting. It was big audition coming up. It was this all male version of Annie, which was really interesting. And he had a three line audition.

    He had a script that gave him three lines and a description of how to say it. And he memorized his script because he was a go getter. And remember, my whole first business was before or after videos. So he comes down to my studio and he’s all ready to go. And I’m taught him singing any hard to get him to stand still.

    Right. And I read this description. I like, he hands me the script. I read this description. It just says very excited, basically excited out of his mind, there’s boats in the Harbor. He’s never seen boats and it’s, it’s supposed to be really exciting for him. And I was like, oh my gosh, he’s going to nail.

    This is going to be thing. So I’m like, okay, back, we’re going to do your before video. Are you ready? He’s like, yeah, I’m totally ready. And you kind of see him, like looking off to the side to recall his script, that he’s memorized. These three lines. I was like, okay, ready? Action.

    And he goes, the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. And they were right there. I was like, yeah. Okay, cut. Let me kind of like bounce around. He’s like how’d I do all day. Well, I was like this time. I just want you to be excited about the boat. Right.

    We just need to be excited about the boats. Oh yeah. Okay. Okay. Okay. I’m like, okay, ready? Action. He’s like the boat’s mama. You were holding me up to see the boats and they were right there. I was like, okay, let’s try something different. So Becca wants you to tell me about your very favorite thing in the entire world.

    My puppy snickerdoodle it was the best puppy in the world. When you tell her to sit, she sits. And when you tell her to stay, she stayed. I was like, okay, here’s what we’re going to do. I want you to talk about snickerdoodle. We want to be just as excited as we are when we talk about snickerdoodle. But instead of saying snickerdoodle we are going to talk about the boats.

    You understand? He was like, oh yeah, totally. I was like, okay, ready? Action. Just like the bumps, mommy girl, you have to see the bumps. And I can see the bright there. And what I understood in this moment with this wonderful nine-year-old is he didn’t have any emotional context for his copy. He had memorized it,

    which for a lot of people, if they have something memorized or scripted, they feel like they are doing it well, when instead that accuracy was not there, he knew need to have something in his life that was emotionally accurate for the emotion he was supposed to be on camera. And then he just had to make the match. Right? Coolest thing.

    I’ve had people when I’ve done this in trainings before say, well, what if I’m not like that? What if I’m not bouncing off the walls? Right? What if my snickerdoodle story? Cause this is what we call them. Sounded like the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. I can see them right there. That’s perfect.

    Right? Because then the way he talked about snickerdoodle will be, you know, my puppy snickerdoodle, Snickerdoodles coolest. As long as it’s emotionally accurate, it’s effective. Doesn’t matter what personality type. It just has to be accurate, has to be emotionally accurate. So with which one of these things we want to create or have snickerdoodle stories for authority, compassion,

    and entertainment, right? These are going to be, our triggers are trigger snickerdoodle stories. So when you are authority, when you’re in charge, when you’re in your element at home, right. With your friends, when you’re giving advice and you’re making sure that they’re moving to act in the way that you tell them, right. As a parent, whatever,

    as a teacher, right? In person, what are you like when you are doing these things? Things, how do you sound? Next voice was different. It was from the boats, mama snickerdoodle to the boats, mama. Right? Don’t let that happen. If it’s snickerdoodle, then it needs to be the boats. Right? How do you move when these things are happening?

    What do you do with your arms? What do you, how do you speak if you use very formal language online, but you will never use that in person. It is not going to translate very well. Right? So you need snickerdoodle stories for all three of these things. Once you find your personality type, you also can start to charisma that other people who have the same personality type in one of these areas,

    but a higher level than you, right? Easiest way to do this, find somebody who you feel you can. I can see yourself in and pay attention to how they communicate with people, pay attention to what’s effective, take notes, see what they’re doing with their voice, with their face, with their language body, right. You can say, oh,

    I like this person. They are like me authoritatively, but there’s so much more effective. Okay. I’m going to, I’m going to charisma, hack those things. I’m going to write them down. And I’m gonna use that. If it’s somebody who has a different personality type than you, like I said, Renee brown can not be Marie Forleo. If they tried to be something different,

    it would be a disaster. Right? So find your personality type. First with authority, we have content strategy and we have charisma strategy, right? Making sure that we have emotional accuracy. And second it’s making sure that you’re hitting very specific things in your content that lead them to buy before you ever to what all of my clients called the pitch transition.

    If you’re doing it right there, shouldn’t be a transition, right? The entire time you’re pitching or telling a story, you’re establishing your authority in a very specific way so that people ask people, ask for your programs. So when you get to the call to action, it is so easy. All of a sudden they just buy. They just buy from you because you have highlighted their pain in very specific ways.

    You’ve highlighted your solution in very specific ways, right? The way that you deliver it and the content that you bring to the table, the way that you structure your own frameworks that I know April has helped you with. Cause she’s a genius. That’s what I would say. That’s where I would start. Oh my gosh, the sneaker, everybody needs a,

    here’s my notes. This is what I wrote down. That we all need a snicker doodle story for each one of these areas, authority, compassion, and entertainment. So, okay. Next question. So when we are speaking in authority, when we’re speaking in compassion, when we’re speaking with the entertainment component, I know it all comes together into one video.

    What if those different stories bring up like another part of our personality? Does that make sense? Like what if like when you’re talking, like some of this is like, this is really serious and blah, blah, blah. But then it goes into my, but like, does that make sense? Am I making sense? Like if part of when somebody is on video,

    if the flow of the stories brings them through experiencing multiple, I don’t want to say multiple personalities. Cause that’s not the right word, but multiple emotions from me or whoever’s making the video. What about that? Like we’re taking them through a wave of different types of experiences through that. Is that okay or not? Okay. So you’re a genius because that’s what we call emotional mapping.

    That is 100% of thing that we do in everything. So with very short videos, usually you will have one snickerdoodle story, right? Very short videos. You have one emotional point that needs to get across. That is one, but with longer form content, right? We have what we call an emotional map with every single part of your speech, of your life,

    of your webinar, of your ad, whatever it is, right. If it’s long form video, then you are going to map out the different emotions that people need to feel. And then if you have a script you’re going to color coordinate it, right? You’re going to color code it. If you have bullet points, you’ll color code those, right?

    So you’ll have a color for entertainment. You’ll have a color for authority. You’ll have a color for compassion. Now, every single video doesn’t have to hit all three, but your audience has to see all three in order to fully connect with you. A lot of times, compassion isn’t introduced into every single video, right? Deep compassion, vulnerability. Sometimes you don’t see that in an ad,

    right? You only see entertainment and you only see authority, right? A lot of times when we get to sales calls, because those are also on video, compassion is extra high. You need people to confess their pain to you in very specific ways. So that compassion piece needs to be higher. So as you map out your video and you map out these snickerdoodle stories,

    you’re going to emotionally map it at which points do they need to make sure that they are feeling very specific things. Now, what I have my clients do is write out, post it notes and just stick them to your computer with those snickerdoodle story triggers in them. So when you get to those stories, you can look at your trigger and you can say,

    oh right, that’s the emotionally accurate thing. The other thing I would say is before every single video, we call it a cold open versus a warm open. You have to make sure that you get into that snickerdoodle story that you get emotionally accurate before you ever push record. The analogy that I like to use is imagine you were an Olympic sprinter and you decided,

    right. You’re like I got this or you were nervous and you had a 400 rates, right? Four times around the track. And you decided that because you got it or because you were nervous, you were not going to warm up. The first lap of your race would be your warmup, right? Either your warmup is chosen for you or you choose your warmup,

    right? So you would hit your stride after that first lap, after you’ve warmed up. Same thing with video. So many people push record. And then they’re like, well, five minutes into the video, I really get to be myself or like eight minutes into the video. All of a sudden I hit my stride. It’s because you are not in an emotionally accurate place before you hit record.

    Instead you push record. And then you’re like, hello everybody. I’m going to try to do this right. 30 to 45 seconds before your video starts, before you push record, before you start a clubhouse room, before you start your podcast, before you start whatever, speak out loud, your snickerdoodle story. But we turn it into an I M phrase,

    if your snickerdoodle story is all about, okay. Yeah, my entertainment, oh, that is silly. Right? Then you say, I am silly. I am silly. Right? Whatever this snickerdoodle story puts you in the frame of mind to write voice-based body language, right? You say, I am silly. I am silly until you get to the point where it is emotionally accurate and say other things out loud as well.

    If it’s authoritative and you’re like, I am empowering. I am empowering. So then when you start your video, you’re not like, hi guys, I’m here. You’re like, hi guys. I’m here. And here’s what I’m going to do. I’m an emotionally accurate person. Who’s being authoritative right now. Instead of having to warm up, having that time and losing people at the beginning of your videos.

    So you have a snickerdoodle story for each one of them. You map out those points. If it’s a long form video. And before you ever start those videos, you warm up, you do a warm, open 30 to 45 seconds before you get in that emotionally accurate place that we practiced with those snickerdoodle stories. So that it’s effective from the time you push record.

    Amazing. You guys, this is so much more McCall, just poured so much more into us. And we discussed before we started recording that she was going to talk about on this show. So as usual you have shown up and delivered and supported our listeners and you are freaking amazing. It’s just, it’s super unique in what you do. And I love that you have found your stride and your super power that is so different from everybody else’s out there.

    And it’s such a pleasure to work with you and to know you and do fun collaboration stuff with you. It’s just, it’s just always a blast. And I appreciate you so much. So this is ton of great information, and I know our listeners are going to go and really start applying the actionable steps that we talked about here. But like we have tomorrow’s next level entrepreneurs to listen to this show.

    People hone in here because they want to know that they’re getting trusted business advice, not just anything it’s really proven and trusted by us. And so we also have people that are action takers here, where they know if this is something that you guys know that you suck at this, that this is something that it is like, this has been it everywhere else in your business.

    You might be nailing or maybe you’re even not there, but you keep trying and trying and trying. And there’s just something off about the way you’re showing up. Then I want them to make sure that you guys know how to connect with McCall. In addition to our clubhouse rooms, in addition to the places where I would highly, highly recommend that you follow McCall and clubhouse,

    and that you do join our rooms, because we talk about these things, she’s goes in there and workshops it, all these things and helps. But like what would be the first step for somebody who is thinking, Hey, listen, I am really struggling with showing up authentically. I have tried. I want to be myself. I want to be true to myself.

    It’s deep rooted. I really want to be what I know that I am to my people, but I can’t figure out how, how do they work with you to start going through that process? Yes. The first thing that I want to be very clear on is most of my clients. So yes, absolutely showing up authentically. We work on that,

    but a lot of my clients feel like they rock on video, but their sales are not great. Right? They’re like, I am very likable. I am myself, but I am not selling right. Or they are rock stars. 90% of my clients speak in front of audiences of hundreds, of thousands of people in person. But for some reason can’t sell on video,

    right. Something doesn’t translate. So the way that you guys can work with me. I know that April’s going to put all of the links in the show notes that you guys can check out all the things, but I felt like the very best thing that you can do. I have a free thing for you. It’s charisma vault.com on charisma vault.com. I break down five days a week on Facebook live,

    and then I put them into this vault different personalities using my charisma hacking tactics. So you can see people of all different personalities, all different levels broken down using these tactics so that you can find those people who have the same type of different levels@charismavault.com. When you sign up, you get an email that literally says, be my friend. And if you want to work with me,

    you book a call. When that comes through to be my friend and we can bond and you can hire me as a coach and do all the things you also will get the free thing. No, you signed up, you get access to every single episode. There was like 120 episodes in there separated by different people, different personality types, different video types,

    whether you’re wanting to do ads, whether you’re wanting to do Facebook lives, YouTube webinars, live presentations on stage. Any of those things, they’re all broken into different categories and really, really easy to find. Wow. Thank you so much for sharing that. That is incredible. Charisma, vault.com. You guys. All right, Ms. McCall, we really appreciate you.

    Thank you so much for your wisdom and pouring into our guests today on the show. Super pleasure. Hey guys, such a great episode. I love that McCall was here and she spent so much time with us today. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about can be found by visiting sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And this is episode number 233.

    Thank you so much for hanging out with us. Please take a screenshot of this episode, tag me at April beach life and tag McCall Jones in it. And let us know your favorite part of this episode and how you’re going to apply her charisma hacking formula. I can tell you right now, I literally have two pages of notes from everything we talked about and I get to hang out with a McCall all the time.

    And I learned so much on today’s show and I really trust that you did as well. Thank you so much for tuning in here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast and sharing this episode with your friends. We really, really Appreciate you. You guys have an awesome week and I will talk to you again.

    Episode 231: Getting Over The Fear of Hiring – with April Beach and Theresa Loe

    Theresa Loe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join us live in Clubhouse and bring Theresa your questions! 
    June 16, 2021 12:00 ET
    Follow the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club to get the notification and exclusive room access 

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and who are ready to grow to the next level.

    Summary:

    You know you need help. You’ve been doing most of the work in your business and it’s time to move your valuable time to the CEO role. To do so, you need a team, or at least one person to begin your delegation process. But you haven’t moved to take action for a variety of reasons but they primarily all come down to mindset. And, you’re probably thinking one of these thoughts: 
     
    “I can’t afford to hire help.”
    “I’m uncertain of which role to hire first” 
    “I don’t have systems in place yet to delegate to someone else”
     
    If you’re thinking one of these things, you’re not alone. You should already know these are very common issues for many leaders… or we would not dedicate a whole show to discuss it. You’re in good company, but let’s get you into the right company with next level leaders who know how to manage their high-value time, delegate tasks to others, and give you the steps to find the right people to bring on board. 
     
    In this show, Theresa Loe, founder of streamlinedandscaled.com, talks you through proven solutions to overcome hiring hurdles so we can take your business from 6 to 7 figures. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the most important mind shift you must make – and by doing so, everything falls into place
    2. Know how to hire the right person, not just any person with a skills

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate Friends. Thanks for tuning. In this episode, you are listening to this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. As my friend, Alexa, so beautifully introduced in our intro for this show. I’m April beach,

    the host here on the sweet life podcast. And thank you so much for being listeners big announcement. I can’t believe I’ve been forgetting to tell you guys this for the last, actually couple of weeks on the show, I was just named one of the top 50 moms in podcasting. And I just want to say, thank you so much to all of you guys,

    because you are the ones that made that happen. So many of you voted so many of you voted for me and voted for this show. And I just wanted to say, thank you so much. I appreciate you guys so very much for being honored out of all the moms to be in the top 50 in podcasting, you know, this isn’t a moms podcast,

    but having somebody recognize that it is hard to be a mom and run the businesses that we do and produce a show, especially for so many years consistently. I just want to share that with you guys and share with you. It’s all because of you. And I just thank you so very much. So just had to take a moment to appreciate all of the listeners here on the show.

    This is episode number 231, as I said, and today’s guest is somebody who’s going to really help you get over the issues that may be in your way from scaling and growing your business to the next level. Today, we are talking about getting over your fear of hiring people. So first of all, let’s talk about why the heck this is a fear.

    What is the deal? What is the matter with us? Here’s the issue as an entrepreneur, we have amazing ideas in our mind. And I’m saying, we, because this is definitely me. You guys, I have struggled with management over the years. It’s not my strength. I have had to work very hard to learn, to become a better leader and manager and delegator.

    And so we have all these ideas in our head and we think it’s so much easier. It’s so much faster if we just do it ourselves, but I’m going to tell you that. And I learned this the hard way your business is not going to get to the next level until you know how to create systems delegate. And most importantly, find the right people find the right people.

    You know, you need help. You have probably been doing most of the work in your business, and it’s definitely time to move your value time. Your dollar, your time is high is worth higher dollar, and we need to move you to that CEO role and to do so. You need a team or at least one person to begin your delegation process.

    But if you haven’t moved yourself out of a mindset blockages to the place of taking action for a variety of different reasons and you know, that it’s time to do so then this particular episode is definitely one that you want to hang out and listen to. You might be saying things to yourself, like I can’t afford to hire help, or I’m uncertain of exactly who to hire and what role they should fill,

    or you might be thinking, wow, I don’t even know how to help them onboard. I don’t have any systems in place. This is not just a beginner, entrepreneurial problem friends. We have so many clients that we can’t scale you guys into higher level online services until your delegation is in place until it’s not going to be a bottleneck. When we bring more clients into your business with higher level amazing programs and offers,

    this is a problem that my multiple six figure clients face as well. It definitely something, as I said, that I have struggled with over the years and I’ve had to force myself to work through and you’ll hear a little bit of kind of some of my struggles and some of the things I do behind the scenes when we talk about this episode. So if you’re thinking about these things,

    you are not alone. That is why we are recording a podcast this week about it. So let me go ahead and introduce you to our guest expert today. Her name is Theresa LOE and Theresa is a leadership and business coach for overworked entrepreneurs. She helps them streamline their operations to build self-managed teams so they can finally get their time back in scale with ease Theresa guides,

    people through that sticky transition from wearing all the hats. Raise your hand if that’s where you are right now, to just wearing the most important, how to evolve the CEO in the visionary hat. Nobody else can wear that hat, but we can help you get some of the tasks off your plate with other perfect people. And Theresa specializes in cultivating small,

    but mighty teams for online course, creators, coaches and other creatives. She’s amazing. And we’re going to be diving into all of this today here on the show. In addition, as you know, now, Theresa is going to be live with us on Wednesday, June the 16th, taking your team building questions in clubhouse. So join us under our club for this podcast.

    It’s called sweet life entrepreneurs, of course, and join us at 12 o’clock Eastern time on June the 16th, 2021. If you’re listening to this show live this week, and we’re going to roll up our sleeves with you. And so what we’re talking about here on the show, then we take it on to clubhouse and we workshop it with you. That’s what we do here on the podcast to really make sure that you are getting implementation for the business strategies here on the show that you know,

    you can’t take to the bank. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode with Theresa Lowe.<inaudible> Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 231. My friend Theresa LOE is with us today. And you guys are in for a huge tree, especially if you are to the point where, you know, you’re ready to grow, but you felt like you have this bottleneck.

    And the bottleneck is, is that, you know, you can’t do everything. You know, you need to hire help, but there are some fears around that and I can personally attest to these feelings. So I’m so excited that Theresa LOE is here today to help you streamline and scale your business by growing your team by overcoming these fears, Theresa, welcome to the show.

    Will you please share everybody your background and a bit about you and how this became your area of expertise? Absolutely. Well, first of all, thank you so much for having me. So what I do is I help people, entrepreneurs who are overworked, they’re stressed, they’re stretched to the limits. I help them streamline the back end of their business so that they can get their time back.

    But also I help them build self-managed teams. And it doesn’t matter if you are just starting out or you are multi-six multi seven multi-age you always want to have your team be self-managed so that you’re not doing all the managing and you can, instead of wearing all the hats, you’re just wearing the most important hat, which is the CEO hat. And so I work with people at different levels because the sooner you can start this the better.

    And the way I got into this was I was a co-executive TV producer for nine years for the top organic gardening show on PBS. And as the co-executive TV producer, it’s what we would call in the digital industry and integrator or a chief operational officer. So I was second in command and I had to run multiple episodes at the same time. So it was a very project management heavy,

    but at the same time, I had to have teams filming around the country and they all had to be completely self-managed. They had to understand what their jobs were. They had to be able to get all the episodes out the door, which is like little mini launches in our world of digital marketing. And so when I started my own business, six years ago,

    it took off really rapidly because I started getting a team right away. And as I started coaching other people in the industry, I realized that team was one of the things that was holding people back, though. We all start out with our laptop and a dream, and we start out doing all the things and wearing all the hats. Well, the sooner you can bring in a supportive team and not just anyone but a self-managed team,

    and you can have everything streamlined and clean on the backend that allows you to scale. So I help businesses scale with ease by streamlining and having self-managed team. Wow. And you’re right. I mean, I can imagine just the thought when you said that of all these little mini launches just gave me like a little like, oh my gosh, that sounds,

    that sounds terrible. To me, 96, We did 26 episodes a season. So it was A lot. Oh my goodness. So you’re constantly living in this mode of like getting this produced, making sure our systems are streamlined and that people are doing what they’re supposed to be doing at each phase along the way. And I can only imagine how many different moving parts that that would take.

    Yes. So you and your history, your experience, your expertise coming into online business totally makes sense. Why you can see things that most online entrepreneurs can’t in a way that it can make it completely easier. And I imagine really simplified compared to your project plans that you were managing and what you were doing. So one of the things that oftentimes we run into with new businesses is the fact that they either don’t know when it’s time to hire,

    or they think that it might not be time to hire, but they’re really dealing with some mindset issues around hiring. And we talked about this a little bit behind the scenes and how I personally struggled with this for a very long time. But talk to us about what are some of these mental blocks? What is the mindset of an entrepreneur who’s ready to scale?

    Absolutely. And before I even dive into that, sometimes like what you said, how do people know that they’re ready? So let me just address that. You know, that it’s time to get help when you are stretched too thin, you’re overworking, or you’re sacrificing yourself for the business. You’re sacrificing your time, your health, your marriage time with your family,

    your weekends, your evenings. We all have these ups and downs in our business where it might grow. And we have little moments of that. But when it goes on for long periods of time, that’s when you absolutely need to get more support and structure in your business because you didn’t start the business to be working 18 hour days. That was not your goal or your dream.

    And yet we can get stuck there because we don’t know how to fix this. And one of the things like you said, it’s a mindset issue. And I should also probably say right off the bat, that it doesn’t matter what level we’re going to be talking about, what the different things are that you can do in your business to get help. But it doesn’t matter if you’re just starting out,

    there are different ways to hire. So you can hire someone overseas. If you are really strapped on money, you can hire a virtual assistant that’s part time. It can be a working mom who maybe used to work in corporate and has incredible skills, but when her kids are in school or go back to school and aren’t, she’s no longer homeschooling, then she was going to be looking for something that she can do in those other hours.

    And so you can bring in someone part-time, but it can also mean when you are a multi-six multi seven multi-asset that you’re bringing in a full-time employee. So what we’re going to talk about here happens at all levels. So the first thing that happens with most people is they get stuck in a solo preneur mindset, and it doesn’t matter how much money you’re bringing in.

    You can get stuck thinking too small. And so what I mean by that is that they’ll say to themselves, when my business gets to the next level, then I will bring in the next help that I need in my business. And then my business will allow me to be a higher level CEO. And what I want you to do is flip the script on that.

    The truth is that you’re never going to feel ready to take it to the next level that doesn’t just magically happen when you wake up. So you have to start thinking differently. You have to step into your future self and start making strategic decisions. And so the truth is that when you start acting and making decisions as a CEO, then that means you would realize that you need to bring in help.

    And that is actually what gets your business to the next level. So rather than just waiting for the next level to happen and then bringing in help, you need to bring in help to get to the next level. Can you Say that again? Yeah. Say that again. This is really please, as you’re listening to this, you guys are, you know,

    hit, rewind on this or just hit pause Theresa. I want you to say that again in the reason why this hits home for me and I, I just appreciate it so much learning from you on the show as our listeners are learning right now is because I literally have on a whiteboard. I have my very own little whiteboard of what I’m eating each day and today’s intentions and kind of little notes to myself.

    But on that whiteboard, just like two weeks ago, I put on there for my things I need to do each day was millionaire mindset. And I realized this. So I have built a 7, 6, 7 figure business in the past. But this company that we’re working with right now, the Sweetlife company is on our way to seven figures consistently. And I realized that this was,

    I was not having that mindset. You guys, this is so important. And since I wrote this on the board, like Theresa is saying, and I’ll go and look at what I’m eating every day. And my goals, my workout plans, it’s all right there. That’s what I wrote. And I think that people think, oh, well, that’s just like a weird note thing,

    a weird mindset thing, but it has shifted my activity significantly in my business over the last couple of weeks. So can you say that again? So people hear that. Absolutely. So what we’re talking about here is the be, do have model. And that means that you need to be the CEO of your future and do activities that they would be doing in order to have what your goals are,

    your business that you want. Right? So people go, okay, well, how do I do that? Here’s a real, simple thing. Every single morning. When you’re looking at your list, I want you to ask yourself your, to do list. I’m talking about when you’re looking at your to-do list, I want you to ask yourself, what does my business need from me today?

    Who do I need to be today? And which activities on this long list are going to get me to the next level that I’m trying to get to, rather than working in those smaller activities, those things that you could actually hire out for it makes you realize that you’re spending a lot of time in the mundane and not in the 20% that moves your business forward.

    In fact, you’re so busy. You have like a 1% little sliver that you’re trying to fit. All those CEO activities in and the rest of your day is taken up with other things. So that’s why I started with this one. You want to be the CEO of your future. And so everything that you do needs to be aligned with that so that you can reach your goal.

    Yes, Yes, yes. And you should see my notes behind the scenes. You guys like a million million Teresa low notes already from this episode. And I think that, you know, people look to strategies, they look to benchmarks to accomplish. They look to be able to check off this list when in fact doing exactly, as you say is going to then reverse engineer what those activities are each day.

    And it’s just such a powerful thing. So I just wanted to pause there for a second. It’s a good one. Okay. Like this is not like, woo you guys. This is like, this is a set solid strategy. That is very important. And I can personally attest to it. So what’s next after we do that. So another belief that can hold people back,

    because we want to hit people from all different angles. Maybe that was it. Maybe they were waiting because they’re waiting for their business. A lot of times we’ll say, and this is probably the most common one. They’ll say I can’t afford to hire anyone. Right. It doesn’t matter what level you’re at. You might say, I can’t afford to hire the next person or a high level person.

    And so the analogy I like to give here is if I were to come to you April and I were to say, I’m going to open a hotel and I just want to tell you all about it. And you’re like, cool. Tell me all about the hotel. And I said, well, I am going to be the person who checks people in at the front desk.

    And then I’m going to help everyone carry their luggage up to their room. I’m going to be the maid. I’m going to do the cleaning. And then when they come back down, I’m going to be at the restaurant and I’m going to take their order. And I’m going to cook the food and deliver the food and then run back out to the front desk for the next person.

    You would think I was a nut. And you’d say, you can’t do all those things well, and you can’t grow. And yet that’s what we do in our businesses, because we started with just us. And we were doing all the things and we kept getting spread thinner and thinner and thinner. So when you’re saying, I can’t afford to hire a team,

    what you’re really saying is that you aren’t putting yourself first and you don’t want to grow. And what I want you to do is realize that there are different ways to hire at different levels. So if you are just starting out, you can hire someone part-time. If you already have a business, then you can hire someone who is virtual, but maybe works more hours.

    And if you’re at a higher level, you can bring in someone as an employee. But the truth is that you can always hire. It’s a matter of finding the right person for the right seat to do the right things so that you’re not wasting your time or your money. And we’re going to talk more about that as we go through the other ones.

    Great. Thank you for that. And that’s a great analogy. So after this is established, right, we’ve established that you absolutely cannot grow without help. And this is very important. And certainly there are, some of you are listening who want to be solopreneurs. And this episode probably is not for you when you are ready to grow this, isn’t it.

    These are important strategies. So what comes next, Theresa, after we have gotten over these mindset hurdles that we’ve discussed so far, Right? So then the another thing that can hold you back is that you’ll say, well, good. People are hard to find. So let’s talk about that piece right there. Because if you are holding yourself back, because you think you can’t like,

    okay, maybe I understand that I will never feel ready. Maybe I understand that I need to hire, but I don’t even know where to start in hiring. And what I want people to understand is that there are good people out there. The trick is that you have to hire the right person by looking at character over resume. So a lot of people teach how to go out and hire,

    and they’ll tell you to put a post out a job listing, and then you bring in the person and you’re just looking at their resume to see if they have experienced. And I actually teach hiring in a very different way. I want people to be really, really clear on the type of person that they want to bring in. And I’m talking about character,

    what type of person do they need to be? Because even if you only have a team of one other person besides you, you’re building something here. So you want to start doing that right out of the gate. And as you get bigger, you want everyone on your team to have a certain character level. So when I’m hiring, I’m looking at character because the truth is that if I can get someone who’s a go getter,

    a problem solver, they’re excited about my work. They’re excited about my mission. I can teach them anything. They don’t even have to have the experience on their resume. So when you are going through the hiring process, be looking for the type of person who can grow with you and can learn, even if they don’t have experience, if you just feel right about them,

    because they’re like pumped and excited, then you were hiring more to character than to resume. Hmm. That’s such a good point. And that is, that’s how I hire is with, with an established skillset. But one of the greatest things that I, if I can just share for those of you guys who are listening, one of the greatest things that I have,

    I decided to do about 10 years ago, when hiring was, I decided to hire people that wanted to see their future in my business as well, could see their own, what, anything they’d life they wanted to build the time they wanted to be working, the kind of work that they were fired up. And although it might not have been the actual activity that they wanted yet,

    what was really helpful and how we’ve grown. Our teams is listening to them, trying to figure out what they want to do. What are their big, huge moonshots? What are their dreams and how can they accomplish those dreams underneath our brand. And I think that that’s why we have had a team who’s worked with us for so long is because of that now definitely skill set as well.

    But then I will also pay to have the right people trained in this skill set. So I’ll pay to have the right people in my team learn a skillset that I want them to have, even if they were just totally clueless, because it’s more about the person Kelly Buckner who’s our director of operations is that she is like my dream COO. And I just don’t know where I’d be without her,

    but the things she’s doing, don’t always align with her biggest dream, but she knows her biggest dream is within the future of our company. And so just wanting to kind of add that in there, as it is an example, for those of you guys who are listening. Yeah. Having lifelong learners is one of our core values. So we do the same thing.

    I have had different members go through courses so that they could get up to speed and it’s a game changer and they feel even more committed to you because now you are helping them grow as a person. So we’re all about growth and stepping into a bigger you. And sometimes someone on my team will find a course and they’re like, I really think this would be helpful.

    I would love to take it. And I’m all for it. I will pay for them to take that class. Yeah. Yeah. I love that. And, and I think that what we’re talking about is the future of culture of small and micro sized businesses. And it really is true that so many people look for the skillset we’re in clubhouse rooms.

    You and I both are in clubhouse rooms all the time where people are talking about how do I hire and how do I do this? And how do I do that? And they’re getting great advice. Like, we’ll go to this and search for this skillset, but I love a warhead, the conversation we’re having here too, because you can have a person who’s really great at something,

    but doesn’t fit into the culture in the future. And, and I think the hardest thing, and I’ll just share kind of this fear since we’re talking about the fears of hiring, one of the hardest things that I had to deal with before I really started hiring for the right person, rather than the skillset was hiring somebody, training them, investing that time.

    And then they leave and being so fearful of so much time lost. And I know this isn’t just a, an April problem or a Teresa problem. These are problems that corporations deal with, you know, at this replacement costs in this replacement time. But I just, I remember feeling so fearful of going, gosh, I’m going to invest in this person and they’re just going to ditch me,

    You know? Yeah. And will, that can happen. And so one of the things that I work with people when I’m, I’m helping them streamline their business, there’s really three pillars we go through. And it’s the structure, the support piece, which is what we’re talking about here. But what you’re talking about is the scalability piece and that is having contingency plans.

    So that’s really having the structure behind the scenes so that if someone steps out, someone else can step in and having systems and processes. So that, that happens. But absolutely, we are also investing part of our heart when we bring someone in because we’re small businesses. So it’s a very small but mighty team. And there’s a lot of heart that goes into bringing someone in.

    But here’s the way I like to look at it. When someone is leaving for me, it’s happening for me rather than to me. And I want them to grow and go find a better fit because something that was not a good fit for them. And if it’s not a good fit for them, they’re not going to thrive. Just like if we take a flower and put it in the desert,

    that flower might be beautiful somewhere else, but in the desert, it’s going to wither and die. Right? And so if we have someone on our team who really is not aligned with staying with the team, it’s better that they go sooner rather than later. So sometimes we’ll have signs. And that’s some of the things that I coach people through. There’ll be little signs that we missed or along the way that we weren’t really paying attention to.

    But when someone is going to leave, I’ve had people leave to go on and start their own business. And I actually give them some of my coaching programs because I want them to do well because we’ve built a relationship. But if someone is stepping out, it’s actually happening for you because there’s going to be someone else that can step in that will take you even further than that person ever could.

    What a great set mind you have to read it. Yeah. Mindset is like everything. Yes. Thank you for sharing that. That is an amazing different viewpoint on that. Thank you for sharing that. I think that’s so incredibly powerful. So let’s get back to some of these fears that our listeners might be feeling. Some of these, almost like we could have named this like that,

    the four, the five lies you’re telling yourself, but you really need to be hiring by now. You know, what are some of the, what are some of these other thought processes that people need to overcome to really get into this let’s scale? This business let’s hire I’m ready for the next level. Absolutely. So one of the other roadblocks and this actually tends to happen with people who have,

    are already a little bit more further along is that they worry that they have to manage the team, or they are currently managing the team. And that’s why I specialize in self managed teams. If you are managing the team, as the CEO, something is wrong, you should never be managing the team. You want to be bringing in people who are in the right seats,

    doing the right things. And they are self-managed. So the way that you can tell if you are in the management, rather than the CEO role is if you are helicoptering them, right. We know we all know what a helicopter parent is. There’s also a helicopter CEO and it’s where you’re hovering. Like, are they doing it? Are they doing it?

    Are they doing it right? And some of that can be your systems that you have set up. Like maybe, maybe you don’t have touch points where you can kind of keep your finger on the pulse without being in the weeds. That’s something that I help people set up so that they don’t have to be in the weeds to know what’s going on. But sometimes it’s really a matter of learning to let go and let go in the right way.

    So what I want you to realize is that what we want to do, what we want to be stepping into is mentoring our team, not managing the team. This means having real clear expectations and results that we’re looking for. So they have a very clear lighthouse and we can have like, you know, 30, 60, 90 day check-ins and be able to say, okay,

    you know, we’ve got a little off track here, but as long as they know what lighthouse is, we shouldn’t have to helicopter them. They should be able to figure out how to get there. Does that make sense? Absolutely. Helicopter CEO. I’m definitely, I’m definitely writing that down. It’s so it absolutely makes sense. It was a great analogy.

    Yeah. And this is a random question. Just putting you on the spot here for our listeners. Is there a favorite team software for communication that you have that you like to recommend to your clients? Absolutely. So most of the industry uses a sauna and a sauna is great. I have used a sauna, but for project management, I really like monday.com.

    That’s actually my favorite. And the reason is because not everybody adapts well to a sauna and monday.com is much more visual. And I find for entrepreneurs, they’re very creative and they tend to have a lot of creative people on their teams and the team. If you have never used any project management software, and you currently have a team, it’s a much easier transition onto Monday than it is to a sauna.

    Now that said a sauna is great. I’m not saying a is bad. If you’re already using a sauna, don’t switch. If you love it. And it works for you. Great. But if you’ve never used project management software or you’re intimidated, or your team is Monday works really well. It also is very intuitive. And so it makes it easy for the team to,

    to adapt to that. If that makes sense. It does make sense. Thank you for sharing that. Our listeners always want to know everybody’s software stack of what we’re using. And I know a lot of our listeners use Trello air table is where we manage our, our podcast production. But back in the day, we used to use Smartsheet and Gantt charts and all these things that were just not user-friendly at all.

    And they were so detailed that we would send it to people and they would just be like deer in the headlights. And they’re just done. What is this? W w what is this? And so I absolutely loved Monday. We’ve had a guest recently who is talking about, is it like click up? I mean, whatever works for you guys. And I think that is the thing here,

    but I’d love, you’re an expert in this. And so I love hearing of what, what you recommend and what works for you. So thank you for sharing that. And any, yeah, go ahead. I was just Going to say what’s most important is that, is that you use it. So if you try something and it doesn’t work, try something else because everyone’s brains work differently.

    So it’s okay. If something else works for you, right. Perfect. Yes. The great advice. And then any final thoughts to, you know, this hesitation to hiring that you want to leave with our listeners, any like actionable steps. You’re saying, okay, listen, you’re listening to this episode because you know, you need to be hiring,

    but there’s a wall. There is a mindset shift that needs to happen, but there are actually things that you, as a leader are putting in your own way. And those are the things we talked about today. Like, I can’t afford to hire a team or what if they leave, or, you know, how do I actually go through the process delegation?

    And you shared some really important thoughts that people are already having. I know our listeners are hearing being like, oh yeah, that’s me. I’m thinking this in this process, what do they do now from this episode, from listening to the show, what are some actual actionable items right now where they can leave in that they can start fixing this problem today.

    Right? Well, if we circle all the way back to stepping into being a CEO and thinking like your future CEO self, what I want you to do is start doing a time audit. Now, when I say time, audit people’s eyes glaze over and they go, oh, that sounds so corporate. And I have to write down all the things I did all day,

    but here’s what I want you to realize. You may think, you know what you’re doing every day, but you’re probably doing some things you shouldn’t be doing, and you don’t even realize it. And you keep thinking, oh, I’ll just do it real quick myself. And it ends up taking an hour, or I can just whip this together. And you end up your whole day is totally shifted because you got down a rabbit hole in Canva or something.

    So what I want you to do is to do a time audit on yourself so that you can see, where am I currently spending my time and then put on your CEO hat and take a hard look at that. Are those the things that I should be doing? Which of these things do I know I just shouldn’t be doing, or I’m not very good at them?

    Which of these things could I hand off to a current team member or do I need to bring in a team member? So really doing a time audit should be your very first step. And then absolutely every single morning looking at that to do list, do I really have to do these things, which of these things are going to move the needle the most in my business,

    which of these things are the moneymakers, which of these things are driving me to my goals and make sure that you’re working on the right things, because we can very easily get busy, busy, busy doing the wrong things, and nothing can slow down your growth faster than doing that. Great. Teresa you’re you are so wise, thank you so much for your leadership in this.

    And you coach entrepreneurs who are in six figures, seven figures to eight figures, and you have a couple of different programs. So if you guys are listening here, you know, this isn’t a podcast where we sell you anything. We don’t even accept advertisers on this show. The deal is, is we want you to have the next steps to take action.

    So Theresa, can you tell people how they can connect with you and based on where they are, what phase they’re in, what do you have available to get them to that next level with their teams? Absolutely. So where people can connect with me is streamlined and scaled.com, all one word. And on the website, I have information, lots of free resources.

    What I have in the way of programs is if you are just hiring your very first team member, or if you have just hired poorly and you need help hiring the next team member, I have a program called team up like a boss. It’s a very low, very inexpensive program that has all my templates and processes my whole methodology for hiring to character first.

    Okay. Then the second program that I have is a group coaching program, multi multi figure, and multi seven. And that’s where we streamlined the backend of your business and get your team to be self-managed and make your set you up to be scalable so that you can scale with ease and have your time back. And that is streamlined and scaled. And then I do consulting for multi eight figure businesses who already have major teams and headaches going on,

    and they need someone to come in and check out where are the issues? And I do that as well. Theresa, thank you so much. So based on where you guys are, there is a program, there is a solution start like Theresa said with going through your activities today, really focusing on the things that only you, and you can only,

    you can do, maybe like me write on your whiteboard or a sticky note or on your mirror and lipstick or whatever it is that you need to be honing in on the millionaire activities in your business. And that is, it starts, it sounds very basic, but this is truly, I can personally attest to this. This is truly where it all starts rolling from there.

    And we do have a very special tree for you guys, as you know, that we promote and share in network with you and help you link arms with you and coach you in clubhouse now. So if you’re an active subscriber to this show, that means it drops on Monday. This particular episode is dropping on Monday, June 14th and Theresa and I are going to be live answering your questions workshopping with you,

    taking your specific team, building questions, helping you strategize through the struggles or your concerns or your fears or your issues of growing your team on Wednesday, June 16th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. It’s totally free for you to be in there. If you’re really ready to take your business to the next level, it starts by taking action. And that starts by joining us at 12 o’clock on June 16th in our clubhouse room about this topic and to find the clubhouse room,

    you can very simply follow our club, join our club, even all you Android users now, by going to sweet life, community.com, again, that Sweetlife community.com. You can talk to Teresa, she’s there for you, and we’re, we’re all here to support you and all of the show notes of course, to reach Teresa beyond. What we talked about here will be in the show notes for this episode.

    This is episode number 231. Thank you so much Theresa for your time and your wisdom and your expertise and pouring into us on today’s show. We really appreciate You. Thank you so much for having me. It was fun. It was fun. Thanks.

    Episode 230: Simplified Systems To Scale – with April Beach and Brittany Keeling

    Brittany Keeling SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join us live on Clubhouse to get your questions answered. 
    June 2, 2021 12:00 ET

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who are ready to scale and grow, but lacking systems to make it happen. 

    Summary:

    It’s time to scale your business, and you know that systems and SOPs need to be in place. But, if you’re like me, the thought of sitting down and documenting your tasks sounds as fun as having teeth pulled. Thankfully Brittany Keeling, our guest expert, is sharing practical ways and clear, simple systems you can follow to start scaling now. 
    In this show we’ll also cover the difference between a platform, a system and automation. These common terms are misunderstood but important to understand. Stick with us and join us live on Clubhouse to meet with Brittany personally and get your questions answered after listening to this show. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Brittany’s 5 Steps To Scale
    2. How to create SOPs without crying 
    3. The importance of choosing the right platform to make your business easier to manage

    Resources Mentioned:

    ClickUp (Brittany’s Affiliate Link)


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. We are so excited to dive in depth. So number 230 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, and today’s guest is simplifying your systems and helping you put standard operating procedures in place so that you can scale your business.

    And this is why this is incredibly important. We have so many companies that come to us and they want to launch courses and masterminds and memberships, and they want their suite of offers created. But oftentimes when we do a really good job launching scalable online programs, there are some systems that are missing in the backend. And when these systems in the backend are missing, then what happens is a bottleneck. And you actually can’t even absorb all of the money and the clients and the hard work that you’ve gone into in order to actually launch and reap the benefits of the hard work. And so today on episode number 230, we’re diving in with Brittany Keeling, she’s the CEO of be elevated a business operations and launch expert. And she’s going to take you through the processes of how to really simplify your systems. Now you’re going to laugh. I am being really transparent about how I hate creating SOP on this. So if you’re like me, you’re going to be able to relate real well to what Brittany’s saying. And we’re going to give you some amazing strategies to get through that today on this episode. So this is a great show for those of you guys who are in phases two through four of my Sweetlife business roadmap, that’s the startup to scale up system that we’ve created. And in order to figure out what phase of business you’re in simply go to sweet life co.com board slash quiz, and you can take a very short self-assessment. So this episode, this business training that we’re talking about is specifically for those of you guys in phases, two, three or four of that business system. What you can expect at the end of this is to first of all, know the most common standard rating standard operating procedures that should be in place for your business. You’re also going to get tips on software that can simplify your processes. And you’re going to know how to use the way that you work as a leader, as an entrepreneur, in order to put it into systems in a way that is actually going to happen for your business. So I’m so excited to dive into all this. And of course, Brittany will be with us live on clubhouse, the Wednesday that this show drops. So if you are not a member or following the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse, please make sure you search us on clubhouse life. One word, just like this podcast. And you’re going to get access to that room where Brittany is going to be able to take your questions. She’s amazing. And I’m guessing you’re going to want to have somebody like Brittany workshop with you, and that’s what the clubhouse is for. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. All of the show knows everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting our website@sweetlifeco.com forward slash two three zero. Oh, wait. I lied about that. All of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life coat.com and then you got to click on podcast, but then it is episode two, three, zero. All right, you guys, I can’t wait to dive in with you. Let’s do it. All right. You guys welcome to episode number 230 here at this sweet life entrepreneur business podcast. I am joined by Brittany Keeling and yes, you’re probably getting entired me saying this. I met Brittany on clubhouse, like all of our guests, like lately, all my new clubhouse friends and she is amazing. I was in a clubhouse room with Brittany and she said three words that I was like, oh my gosh, I need this woman to come and talk to us and really simplify and clarify these three terms. And you’re going to find out what they are here and just a little bit on the show, but, you know, Brittany is a scaling with systems expert. And so that’s what we’re all about here on the show, giving you tools and strategies to move forward and scale your business. And so here we are, Brittany, thank you so much for joining us. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself and how you became such a systems ninja. Yeah, I’m so excited to be here. So I have a really sort of unconventional background. A lot of people get into this space from, you know, they were in the corporate world and they decided to go off on their own. And I actually started my first business straight out of high school. So I was a serial entrepreneur for a few years, with a few various different businesses. They were actually all online businesses as well. So been in the space a while and towards the end of 2018, I was feeling really burnt out with what I was doing. I wanted to change it. I just didn’t know what to do. And so I started asking people who knew me like, Hey, what do you think of when you think about me? What am I good at? What are my strengths? Literally, everybody came back and was like, oh, you’re type a you’re detail oriented. You’re great at like being productive and helping people reach their goals. And I was like, okay, I can do something with this. So heading into 2019, I started trying to like make that shift. But right at that same time, my dad who was a business owner actually passed away unexpectedly. And so I took over his company the day after he died. So yeah, I put my business hold and took over his company. I was 21 and it was a mess. He did not have. I mean, obviously I was grieving, but also he didn’t have anything documented. He did not have, you know, a second in command. It was basically two months of me being on the phone all day, every day with clients saying, sorry, he’s not here anymore, but we’re still business as usual. It was very weird. But another thing that we ran into a lot was like the questions being asked and us not having answers. And that didn’t feel good for anyone. Of course, we didn’t want to say, sorry, we don’t know the answer to that. But at the same time, my dad kept so much in his head, in his head and all over his desk. I mean, papers everywhere. So it was just really hard to try to run once he was gone. And thankfully we did end up selling that business four months later. And at that time I had planned a move across the country for like a month later. And I was like, oh, I have now no income and no clients and no business, I should do something. So I relaunched my business and I went like full force headfirst into the deep end as an online business manager. And so at that time, this was like August of 2019. And I just dove in, I invested in a mentor and I was like, you know, I’m just going to help other entrepreneurs create something that actually can outlive them. For me. It grew really quickly. I’ll give you the cliff notes version here, but essentially I created a bit of a monster that was doing for me the opposite of what I was trying to do for others. And so I ended up restructuring a bit around this, actually around the same time, last year. So around like August, September of 2020, and now we work with clients in either one day or one week and we have a few leading offers, but we really essentially help them either get their systems in check, do like an overhaul, get them things simplified, make it make sense for the long haul for them. Or we help them have a large-scale launch of a digital product or service in a short timeframe. We do like a seven day package for lunches or a one day for one week package for systems, depending on how robust it is. And clearly to have that done. We have to have a lot of really clear systems internally as well. Yes you do. Oh my gosh. So first of all, congratulations on all your success. It’s so hard when you know you’re doing something well and all of a sudden it’s running your life. I love how you have modeled. We talk a lot about life, first business modeling here on this show, and I love how you’ve modeled your offer to actually deliver that time in life that you want. Secondly, I’m so sorry about your dad. I lost my dad a couple of years ago and that is it just really hard still sometimes today I’ll like forget, and I’ll go to pick up a phone and call him and it’s just this weird thing or I’ll think, oh, I can’t wait to tell dad or whatever. And so I totally get that. And I’m so sorry about that. Your dad also was a total entrepreneur like that entrepreneur brain, like the notes everywhere, papers everywhere. I’m literally not going to turn the camera. You guys, before this, behind the scenes, you were typing something out to think like that’s way out. I need to write in order to think and process in. But because of that, then I have a million pieces of paper. And so your dad sounded like amazing man and very typical classic entrepreneur. And then the last thing, you know, I love how you have always been an entrepreneur out of high school. Like we have very similar stories. I absolutely love that. And so I’m just so glad that you were here on the show. Now what you’re talking about from a business sense, first of all, it’s no surprise that you are so successful because what you need are what people need are the tactical things that you actually deliver. It’s the not sexy part that everybody desperately wants and needs. They’re the systems and that like the SOP and the client pipelines and the launch plans and the content plans and all those things. So I’m so excited to talk about what we’re going to dive in today. And I know our listeners will be like, okay, bro, gen up so we can hear her talk. So, so like, so this is very exciting. And so I’m really, really excited about what you’re going to download for us today. So one of the things that we find as a company is a lot of companies come to us and they’re like, oh, we’re so excited to scale with courses and offers. And all these things help us design them, but it’s like, let’s stop because they don’t have their systems and processes in place. Yet. I was actually in a clubhouse room last week when I was saying that to somebody and the woman ended up DME me on Instagram saying, so you said I shouldn’t do this yet until I have systems in place. What are the exact systems? People don’t know, like you were saying before we started recording what they don’t know. So can we first for our listeners who might not be familiar with that, we first talk about what systems should you actually have in place before you start really scaling your business. Yeah, 100%. And I love that we’re talking about this because every business I’ve ever worked with that has overlooked these steps in the beginning has had to spend more time and more money and more energy backtracking to redo the things that were not done properly. So my hope is that if you’re listening to this, you will not get in that position. It is never too late to start creating systems. And just like April said, it is not at face value, super sexy to talk about, but it is super sexy when you get weeks of your life back. So, yeah. So I have sort of a top five systems that I like to focus in on whenever talking about like getting started with systems, mind you, there are a million systems in the world and I totally understand that, like can be really overwhelming. So I always just suggest starting with these five. And if I feel like too much, start with one, like just do one at a time because it’s going to be better than nothing. Okay. So let me make sure you guys heard this before. She says this. When you walk away from this show commit to start with one, if this is an area you need to grow. So sometimes when we hear all five, it is overwhelming, but Brittany is going to download you on what they are. So I’m really excited about this. Okay. What are they? Yeah. So quick overview of the five systems I like to hone in on are a task management and project management system. So this is where you can keep all of your ideas. So instead of having 12,000 places to look for things, it’s all in one place, an SOP standard operating procedure creation system. So you may or may not have heard of SOP before. And if you have heard of them, it may be in a corporate setting or it may just be like, sure, I’ve heard of it, but I don’t know what to do with it. How do I create them? Having SOP are important, but you need actually know how to create them. So having a system for creating new SOP is on an ongoing basis is going to be huge. The third system is a content planning and repurposing system. Let’s be real, pretty much all of us are marketing through social media. So we probably need to have a system there so that we’re not having to spend hours every single day typing up a last-minute caption just to get it off the door. Right then the fourth is a client management system. This one is huge, huge, huge, I’m such a huge fan of white glove experience and really kind of going above and beyond with the client experience because we want everyone in our sphere to feel really valued and a huge way you can do that is with your client management system. And then the fifth and final is email marketing. And if you’re like, well, maybe I don’t have a list. This is fifth for a reason. It is very important of course, but you don’t have to start with this one if it’s not the easiest one for you to dive into, but we can keep it super simple. Maybe you have an automated welcome sequence or some sort of automated email marketing in place. But even if you just have some sort of system for showing up regularly in your email marketing, like a task for yourself to write a new email once a month and send that out, it’s so much better than nothing, and you’re still going, nurturing your audience chat. Okay. So let me state those again for our listeners. And then we’re going to move on. We’re going to dive into a couple of those today. So the five systems you recommend people have in place to start our task management, SLPs and a process for actually creating SOP and an SOP. If you’re listening in stands for standard operating procedures for any of you guys that didn’t know that number three is a system for content planning. Number four is the system for client management and number five, it’s a system for email marketing. Is that right? That’s right. Okay. Let’s kind of pivot in. Let’s just focus in actually on those first two things tax management and SOP is here on this podcast. So when we’re talking about task management, there are so many things that businesses are doing on a regular basis. And oftentimes companies that are looking to scale, you have just very few people doing all the things, talk to us about how you recommend and how you really kind of lasso all of these things that are happening in order to get them into one place. Yeah. So I think the biggest thing is like, you know, there are first of all, so many ideas in our brain at any given time. And even if we just think about the ideas alone, not even the to-dos, it’s like you could have a million dollar idea, but if you write it on a sticky note and forget it exists, there goes your million dollars. Right? So I’m a huge advocate for getting things in one place. So initially, I mean, I would start with hunting down all the things you have all over the place. If you’ve got just tasks and ideas and to do’s everywhere, get them all streamlined in one place from there, you can probably then start diving into breaking things into categories. And again, this can be really overwhelming. And like a lot of times people are like, well, I just have one big list. What do you mean I need categories, but we can structure things very strategically when we are intentional about it. So if you zoom out of the day-to-day of your business and actually look at everything from a bird’s eye view and look at all of the tasks on your list, look at everything that’s popping up. Do you want assessment of what do I, and if I have team members, my team do on a daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, so on and so forth basis. And what maybe aren’t we doing that needs to be done more regularly and even seeing like what tasks have popped up that are not recurring tasks, but you’re noticing them coming up more and more often that can really help guide you and figuring out what the departments of your business really are. So being able to identify it, doesn’t have to be like 18 departments. You don’t have to have a whole marketing team to have a department for that. When I say departments, I’m really, especially for small business owners, mostly honing in on the fact that like, there really are still segments of our business, where if we were to scale to a much larger level, we’d likely be outsourcing those two different team members. Yeah. And that’s usually where most of our listeners are. They’re like really ready to the point they want to scale. They have all these things that are happening. And many of them have even really started building their teams. But yet they’re not exactly sure. Also with that being said, many of our listeners are to this point where they also have a, just a ton of, VA’s doing a couple little things for them at once. So as they’re listening to this, I’m guessing you’re the expert here in this process. You also really recommend that even all these little pieces, even if it’s somebody who’s only working a couple hours a month doing a task for you that you develop SOP for that as well. Correct. 100% a gauge that I like to use is like, okay, if you were to take on 10 clients tomorrow, would you be ready? Yeah. My business mentor talking more says that all the time. He’s like, you know, it doesn’t matter if we get you all these clients in here, he’s like, you know, it can be like, it’s like a fire hose. If you do not have these systems in place, like don’t go out and grow. Right. Oh, that’s so good. That is such a great analogy. Oh my gosh. So you’re just going to lose them. All right. And that’s why when companies come to us and they’re like, we want to develop our leading offer. We want our leading courses or masterminds. We’re like, okay, are you going to be able to handle it? Because if you can’t then literally everything. That’s like an overflow out of the top and you know, let’s make sure your stuff is in place. And so I love this conversation we’re having. So in the process and behind the scenes, you were sharing how you guys go about doing this. You have a software that you love, and I’m just going to say out loud, you know, Kelly Buckner, our director of operations for our company is going to geek out when she hears this episode. Because I think that what you’re talking about is like right along the lines of something that she would love to look into more. So talk to us about how you go about this process for people. And, and also, I mean, they are in a million different places. All these things are in a million different places. Let’s talk about simplifying software for a minute. Yeah, absolutely. So a lot of entrepreneurs are, and you know, we’re in 18 different softwares when in reality there’s probably one or two that could replace the bulk of them. And I think, you know, at the end of the day, maybe you’re going to pay more for one software, but then you’re going to be able to let go of three others. And it’s so worth it. Now, if you’re using six softwares and it’s like, you know, you don’t have any problems and it’s working well for you and future casting. You’re not going to have any problems. Great. If it’s not working or if it is working, you don’t need to necessarily change it. But if you’re starting to grow and you’re ready to scale, and you’re like, you know what, being in all this software is just really not working for me. Then. I mean, something that my business does all the time is like helping businesses get streamlined into less software or at least suffer. That makes more sense for them. And so one of the things that we do is we utilize click up and this is where we use like our task management and our project management. But also we use this as like the one-stop for the whole business. And we do this with our own business, as well as for our client’s businesses. Because if you’re listening, I can almost guarantee if you don’t have some sort of system in place, you’ve probably got your Google docs, a hundred different docs or folders in your drive. You’ve got your handwritten notes, sticky notes, your whiteboard, your mirror, that you’re writing on your, your, everything, just everything notes on your phone. You’ve got your, your 18 journals on your desk. Like it’s just all over the place. And so being able to create an atmosphere where it doesn’t feel like, oh God, another place I have to look every day and instead positioning it in your mind. And also in the way you structure it as the only place you need to go and look at things every day, it really is a game changer because instead of waking up, you know, three hours into your slumber, remembering that you forgot to do three tasks that are like really important, and now you’re going to be panicking about it. You can have one place to put them all as soon as they pop into your head and then literally forget about it. Like you can just forget about it and come back to it later. Yeah. I love that. And that’s so important for entrepreneurs like me too. Not officially, but pretty officially have ADHD. And so this process of going through and understand like the tasks, changing task management, having things in one place is, is really, really, really important. And another thing you said just triggered something that I like to tell businesses all the time. And this is what Brittany is talking about. This is why this is important. I like to say, you know, how would you carry your business today? If you were already a millionaire, you’d already have these systems in place, and you’re never going to be there until you have these systems in place. This is the bottleneck. And this is so important. And you know, we’re not saying you have to use one software or another, like you can do it whatever way works for you. But the reality is, is simplified systems scale. They do simplified system scale. And so this is so incredibly important. Okay? So in this process you’re going through and people have all their ideas and they’re bringing their, all their ideas together, taken all their sticky notes and their pieces of paper. And they’re getting it. Like you guys use click up for this. How do you recognize, are there like certain departments of a business that are standard or typical for, you know, service-based businesses and online entrepreneurs where you tend to group together type of department. So you sort of, our listeners can kind of at least clarify their mind and start heading in one direction of how to organize their stuff. Yeah. Such good question. So some like standard departments that we like to utilize are like your headquarters, right? So for us, at least in here, we house various things like our capacity so that anyone on the team can come in and see what we’re working on. Like what big package, but also what’s coming. We have like the next several months booked out and we can all see it and be prepared. And then also if I’m on a sales call, I know what’s available and what’s not I’m meeting notes, go in there, employee onboarding various things like that. Team resources go in there. So like SOP is our brand kit, affiliate links, testimonials our team agreement. So we have like, all the team has come together and agree. Like this is our way of working so we can all reference that. And then another department is operations. So you’re going to have your recurring operations more than likely that may be broken down into various things like social media. So Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn, so on and so forth. Maybe your email marketing can go and hear your metrics management. So if you’re needing to check on your numbers weekly, the list, of course. Yeah. Right. I mean, I’m thinking in my mind, I’m like podcast processes, like for us, you know, podcast processes, you know, PR speaking, client management. So as you guys are listening to Brittany talk, just think about like the grouping of repetitive tasks that you’re doing in your business and start to figure out what falls under each one. And then take an opportunity to understand that for each one of these, you need to develop these standard operating procedures, which brings me to the next question. So we hear this all the time and I’ll be really honest with you. Especially somebody that’s like always in all directions. I own four companies. I have three kids. I’m always on an airplane somewhere when somebody tells me and it’s okay if you have to tell me this, but let’s just keep it real here. When somebody tells me that I have to sit down and document every single thing that I’m doing in some capacity or some way for like a week straight, first of all, I’ve never, ever, ever done that. I can’t think of anything worse than doing that. And so what I ended up doing, and this is why, if you’ve also listened to the show before, I’m like not the best person to work for. I mean, I have an amazing team, thank God. But you know, it, it’s kind of hard. So it literally, I’m not kidding. You it’s taken me 25 years to get through. And so when I go down and I document like an SOP, it is usually like in a scrub, like we’re working on a project like that day. That is my work I’m going to do. But going through my everyday, you know, week just kind of documenting my time and managing my time and stuff. You couldn’t actually, I’m being so honest. You’re going to like school me here. Probably like you couldn’t pay me to do that for my own company. Like I am Wade. I’m like all off in a role. Is there any other way to do it? Yeah, totally. Okay. Good. Cause that way sucks. Right? At the end of the day, it’s like we’re busy and the thought of creating a whole system and process and documenting the SOP, Internet’s going to take me three hours longer than if I would just do it all myself and then never outsource it. Right. Right. But of course in the long run, we know that’s not true, but it doesn’t make it any to do in the moment. So I do have a philosophy that I like to follow a system. I like to follow with creating these because most business owners are very similar to you. Like I can’t say that I have a lot of fun sitting down and creating all of SOP for my business. And so if you don’t like it, then that’s yeah. Then they really are tough work. Okay. Right. And any, you don’t have to do it alone. And it’s actually to be so much easier than we think. So here’s what I like to do. And here’s what I tell people to do. Start identifying what needs to be documented. Right? So obviously your recurring tasks, easiest thing to start with, you know, it’s going to happen on a recurring basis. So start there. And once you’ve identified, this needs an SOP, take a loom screen recording. The next time you do the task, you can literally do the task, the exact same way you would without documenting anything, but screen record it and talk through what you’re doing as you’re going. And then if you have a strategic and like, well put together template for the written SOP, you can then give the loom or whatever kind of screen recording. You utilize to another team member. You can give it to somebody else and they can build out the SOP, the written version. They can include the video version in there. They can plug it into whatever. You know, if you’re using a task management software, get it in the right places, create templates within that. If you want, it can get really nice and crazy robust, but it doesn’t have to. And even better when you do it that way, you now have a video, an audio with your video and a written. And so no matter what kind of way somebody learns on your team, you’re meeting them where they’re at. Okay. Thank you. So I do that. I do LUME recordings and then you’re like Dropbox fanatics, and then I’ll put it in Dropbox. But I really thought that I was like duck taping the process together. And then, you know, we can get them transcribed through our Searchie and everything that we do. So thank you for saying that because I literally is like, this is just the way I work and it’s just the way it’s going to be. And this is the way I work and I just, I’m never going to change me. So I hope this works out for y’all, which, which it has. I mean, I have an amazing team, but in the back of my mind, I’m always like, you suck at doing this because you’re not doing it the way it’s supposed to be, but I know I would never, ever like literally over my dead body, am I going to sit down and write down my steps that I am doing? So, yay. I feel a little redeemed here on this show and then Kelly in the process, like she does this as well. And so like listening to the podcast, you guys all know like what we really like struggle with behind the scenes. We try to share it all with you. This is one of those things that I haven’t really liked so much. Okay. So in that process, you know, documenting it in whatever way that works. I also do audio recordings on my phone. So I do audio as well too. And that has seemed to work, you know, to upload them for certain files as well for my team and our team Dropbox folder, I should say, hopefully that’s acceptable, but it does work. Okay. So after somebody has, you know, really documented these processes, let’s go back and let’s kind of circle back and let’s talk about the importance of simplified software. Share with us more about click up, why you guys use that, why this is your chosen spot to do this in really why, of all the things out there, as, you know, there’s a million there’s Monday and Salesforce and all these other things, like why is this your go-to? And so our listeners is, is there processing can think, oh, well maybe I should check that out. Yeah. Great question. So let’s tie it in with SOP is right. If you create a hundred SLPs and they’re sitting in a Google drive that nobody knows exists, what’s the point, right? Versus if we can pull them in to a software, like click up, or if you’re using something else, you know, whatever you’re using, bring it into one place so that someone can super easily search the name of what they’re looking for, or go to the SOP folder or list and look through it, what they need to find. And you can even from there, so like in click up, you can create like a template of tasks essentially. So you could also turn your SLPs into templates if it’s like things that need to be tasked out. So if you’re onboarding a new team member, for example, that can be a template. Every time you onboard a new team member, you duplicate the template, you assign things out and boom, like you’re good to go. Okay. So this is making my mind totally gone in a different direction, which I won’t on this show, but I also teach entrepreneurs how to license and scale their content programs and systems. And every single one of them has a different place where they build those systems. And so what I’m hearing you say is it click up, could possibly be a place for those of you guys that this is really advanced scaling. But those of you guys who are listening to this show who are licensing your courses, your content, you’re creating a certification program. All of these mixed level scaling could use a software like this to really streamline the distribution of your processes and templates a hundred percent. And you can even like, you can like sell templates. You can share templates. I mean, you can do so much with it. And the reason that I really love click up above all the other platforms, I’ve, haven’t been in all of them, but I’ve been in many of them. And what I tend to find is kind of twofold. One click up is 10 steps ahead. Of many of the other platforms, other platforms are coming out with a lot of the things click up has, but they’ve had it for months. So why not choose the software that is going to be 10 steps ahead. And two, it has a very, very, very customizable interface. The aesthetic of it. You can look at it in so many ways and customize fields and can do it everything in your own brand colors. I mean, there’s so many ways to go about it. So I, I love it. I it’s just the, in my opinion, I clearly am a nerd about this platform, but I’m a huge fan. I’ve been in so many different ones and it just has proved to be the best and has the most robust options for what we need. Okay. This is, I really love this episode. Thank you so much for everything you’re pouring into us. Okay. Before we wrap this up, I do have to say, I love the aesthetic side women entrepreneurs. We really like this side. Like, I really love the fact that I can change the picture on the back of my Trello board. I mean the stupid stuff like that makes me really happy. So I love the fact that it does offer that option as well. And I appreciate you sharing this resource so much here. You guys, as you’re listening, we’ll make sure that we are going to share Brittany’s affiliate link to click up with you so you guys can go and play with it and try it out. There are three different words I would love for you to, this is the circle back from the beginning, define for us as we close up this show. And I think that the clarity and the definition of each one of these, whether whoever’s listening is new or established is going to be very, very helpful. Can you please define the difference between a platform, a system and automation for any of our listeners that aren’t crystal clear on these saints? Absolutely. And it’s really common to not be crystal clear on this because some of these buzz words right there, total buzzwords are used interchangeably when they shouldn’t be. And so it’s confusing for most people. And so what I have found is that if you’re not clear on what each of those are, it can be really difficult to know what you need or ask for help or find the right resources. So I’m really passionate about helping find clarity throughout these. So let’s start from, you know, a platform. So a platform is like a click up, right? Click up is a platform. Or of course there are other platforms like, you know, later first scheduling on Instagram or depths auto active campaign. There’s so many, right, but having a platform does not mean you have a system. It’s really how you utilize the platform that you can create systems within a platform being signed up on click up does not mean you have a system being signed up on any software does not necessarily mean you have a system. You can create systems within the platforms. Like we create systems all throughout clicker and they can go hand in hand, but they are different things. So a system is something that can actually be documented, right? A system is something we can put into an SOP that we can duplicate and do over and over again. And then an automation of course, is something that is going to be automatic. But again, it’s different. Not all of your systems are going to be automated. Some of your systems are not going to be automated and that it can still be a system. It doesn’t have to be automated to be a system and you can house. So an example here too, all three of these things can go hand in hand is within click up. There are automations. So you can have the platform I’m just using click up as an example here, you have to pay me to say this, but wish they were. So you could use click up as your platform. You could house your content creation system in here, and you can have automations in here as well to move things accordingly. So they can all go hand in hand. They are very different things though. And so I think being able to define those is really, really helpful. And being able to talk about things. Yeah, I love it. I wrote down that quote, having a platform does not mean you have a system. And I think that is so powerful and that’s really a great way to wrap up today’s show. Of course my like business coaching minus went crazy. Now I actually want you to reach out, to click up and have them sponsor a room on clubhouse in pay you to talk about it. Like, let’s get this right. So click up, we’re going to tag you in this and you need to be, listen, you need to hit Brittany up, sponsor her clubhouse rooms because it’s, it’s good for everybody. So, all right, well, I just really appreciate your expertise so much. And we are going to be live in clubhouse on June. What did we say? I think it was June the night at 12 o’clock Eastern time in the club that goes with this podcast. So this podcast club is called the sweet life entrepreneurs club. Search it up on clubhouse, hit me up, hit Brittany up, like send us a DM. If you want to know where the club is because Brittany sent me coming in live and we’re gonna be taking your questions from today’s show. And this episode is going to drop on Monday. You have two days to listen to this and come in and let Brittany roll up her sleeves with you and help you guys get your SLPs and systems in place, you know, answering platform questions, whatever it is, we are here to serve and support you. Not just listen to this show, but to implement the show and put it into action. So now you have a couple of, you have a resource as well, and I’m going to make sure all the things that we’re talking about here in the show notes for you guys. So what is a free resource you have for our listeners? Yes. I have a pretty doozy guide. It’s called five systems to take your business from scattered to scaling. And it goes a little more in depth into all five of the systems we touched on at the beginning of this episode. And then also I actually include in the guide my own SOP templates. So there you go. Yeah. I’m so glad. Oh my gosh. An SOP template. Okay. So all of the show notes are going to be found@sweetlifeco.com like on the podcast. And this is episode number 230, and everything’s going to be in there for you as well. But we want to see you guys in clubhouse, even you, Android users are getting invites now. So we want to see you guys in clubhouse. And if you need an invite, hit me up on Instagram. We have actually a lot of club invites they’re releasing to us. So we’re excited. You can RSVP for this event and we’ll get you an invite to that, Brittany, thank you so much for your time. I’d love to everything we’ve talked about and clearly appreciate you confirm me. I’m not totally crazy about the way I’m supposed to be doing things and just really appreciate all your expertise, how clearly you explained things and those you guys who are listening, please follow Brittany, pay her and follow and just thanking her for her expertise in Korean and tossed bang. It’s great. Thank you. I appreciate you. Thank you. Have a lot of fun.

    Episode 229: Creating Your Strategic Financial Roadmap For Your Business – with April Beach and Arnesha Bobo

    Arnesha Bobo SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Check out CFO for Women’s Small Business Resources

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for small business owners who are looking to scale but they’re missing the strategic foundational plan. 

    Summary:

    When it comes to entrepreneurship, people just start working. But, sooner or later when the time comes to scale, 60% of businesses realize they are missing a strategic financial plan and the foundations needed to move forward. Today’s guest expert Arnesha Bobo, Founder of CFOForWomen.com breaks down her Smart Financial Roadmap and the first 3 steps to building your strategic plan in detail. 
     
    If you don’t know your numbers, don’t know how to analyze KPIs and you want your business to grow,  this is an ideal business coaching episode to get your foundation in place.  You’ll be surprised that the first steps actually have nothing to do with your numbers at all. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have 3 clear steps to start creating a clear financial plan
    2. Understand how vision and core values must be part of your financial plan
    3. Be aware of the 4 numbers you should know every month in your company

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate This week on episode number 229 of the suite life entrepreneur podcast. We are talking with Arnesha Bobo about how to create strategic financial plan for your business. Now, this episode is incredibly important because she actually says it’s 60% of businesses come to her.

     

    Who’ve already been in business for an extended period of time and never have a strategic financial plan. So in this episode, Arnesha breaks down everything that you need to know, and the first three steps to create your strategic financial plan. So the reality is as entrepreneurs, we just kind of get in there and start doing the work, doing the business,

     

    selling the service and miss a lot of foundational steps. But when it’s time to scale your business, or when it’s time to get funding, when it’s time to apply to be a member of, of some sort of a, a board or an organization, people are going to want to see your numbers and you need to see your numbers in order to continue to be profitable.

     

    And then this is the episode where we dive in and help you really start building that out. And so that, you know, the process that you get to go through in order to fully take control of your numbers and your business. So let me give you an indication here of who this amazing woman is. First of all, yes, I met her on clubhouse.

     

    I know don’t laugh at me. We are going to be going live in clubhouse on Wednesday that this show airs again. This is episode number 229, and that is going to be Wednesday, June 2nd, 2021, 12 o’clock Eastern time. Join us in clubhouse because what we’re talking about here, I understand that you might have some questions. So it’s really important that we are then taking this from just a podcast,

     

    this one way conversation and giving you an opportunity to really workshop with our Neesha, to get your questions answered. And so Wednesday, June 2nd, join us at 12 o’clock Eastern. Let me give you an idea of who this amazing woman is. She tells her story. So I’m going to summarize this here, but our niche as a small business CFO in strategic planner,

     

    she works with women, led organizations who are ready to gain visibility in their finances and build a smart growth strategy together with her clients. She focuses on three key areas, capital structure, profitability, and growth planning. She is absolutely amazing. I know that you’re going to love her. And I’m so excited to invite you to tune into this episode. Again,

     

    as we always say, all the show notes can be found by going to Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number 229. So all these links, everything that we’re talking about here are going to be waiting for you on tap. And if you’re a new listener to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, thank you so much for coming. I’m April beach, founder of the suite life company.

     

    And I am absolutely stoked to have an opportunity to welcome you on this show. This show we’ve been named top 50 moms in podcast, but the show isn’t just for moms, all of you are welcome here. And we deliver a business strategies and trainings that other coaches charge thousands for. As a matter of fact, this podcast is part of one of the giving missions of our company.

     

    And we’re pouring into you week after week for four and a half years straight so that you know that you can take the business trainings and strategies that you hear here, here on here, here, here, here on this show, and truly implement them and take them to the bank. So thank you so much for tuning in. Thank you for being a subscriber of this show.

     

    And I appreciate you so very much. Now let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. All right, friends. We are joined by my new clubhouse friend. Yes. I know another new amazing club friend that I have met. And so grateful for clubhouse are Nisha Bobo. And she is here because of the fact that she has been in clubhouse rooms with me,

     

    literally drilling down on what women need to know about their money. She is absolutely amazing. She’s a CFO for women. I can’t wait for you to meet her. And today on the show, we’re talking about creating a strategic financial roadmap for your business. And our Nisha is going to walk you through the steps in order to do that. So, or Nisha,

     

    thank you so much for coming to the show. Thank you for spending time with me here and all the time that we’ve spent together on clubhouse. And tell us a little bit about you and what you do. Yes, absolutely. I help women become better leaders in their business by improving their decision-making women are the fastest growing demographic of business owner. Yet they are the least paid.

     

    They’re not growing in other industries. And most importantly, they’re not getting access to funding that they need to help either grow their business or expand in other markets. So I help women. We’re all things, money with all things, money. I love that. Okay. So reminds me. I was actually in a meeting a week ago with an author of a book it’s about the new entrepreneurship and he was talking about women and minorities and immigrants as well coming in,

     

    and that they don’t have funding, but this gentleman who funds a lot of regular business was saying, they’re looking at ways to create new programs to do that. So just decide now, but it was very interesting to hear and just triggered me to say that because I do think that the funding hopefully is coming around, but like what we’re going to talk about today,

     

    there’s a lot of things that every business owner needs to do to get their ducks in a row before anybody will even pay attention to fund them. And those are the things you’re going to share with us today, but tell us a little bit about you and you know, really how you got into this, why you started your company and your, your journey about getting yes,

     

    absolutely. I have a 14 year corporate accounting career. So I’ve worked with very large companies. I’ve managed multi-billion dollar portfolios. And when I first started my company, I was at a nine to five or so I was a part-time entrepreneur, like many businesses starting out. So I would, you know, work my full time job, my nine to five.

     

    And then I would go home and work on my business, five to nine, how I became a consultant. I actually work with the procurement department for some corporations. And if you are familiar with the procurement department, that’s the department you go through as a business owner to get corporate contracts. So you have to go through a procurement process, you have to register your company with them.

     

    You have to submit financial information, you have to apply. And then you start bidding on different contracts that they have. So you can do this at a corporate level, government level, city, state, and federal, but I was at the corporate level and I noticed a lot of businesses did not qualify to do business with these corporations because their business head,

     

    no proper foundation. So they were not set up correctly. They didn’t have access to financial information because they only met with their tax accountant once a year. So I found myself a lot of days working with business owners to set their foundation up just so they could do business with that corporation. I am not a gatekeeper. If there’s an opportunity for me to help you come on and come on,

     

    but I want to make sure that everything is done correctly. So that’s how I started my business is helping other small businesses get into these corporations to do business with them. And then it started to grow from there. I later joined a national organization for women. It’s called<inaudible> the national association of women business owners. And I joined to become a better business owner because I had that corporate mindset and everything was structured,

     

    but I wanted to learn how to be a business owner. So I joined this organization, you know, attended some events, was able to do a couple of reasons, patients or answer questions that event. And I caught the eye of the president at no idea that she had watched me or she, you know, I was on her radar. Well,

     

    she asked me to join the board. And as I actually, yeah, I joined the board as a financial secretary. So I was responsible for doing all of the financial reporting for the organization at our chapter level. And I started working with a lot of female owned businesses. So that’s how I, you know, that’s why my core are women because I was able to help them birth.

     

    And I’m a woman. I love women. I love to see women win mommies, aunties, everybody. I want all women to win because I coming from corporate America and just seeing the huge disparities between men and women, the earnings, all of that, I was like, oh no, any opportunity I can help women. I’m going to do that.

     

    So that’s how I kind of got started. And I actually left the organization because relocated to Atlanta. So I’m in Atlanta, Georgia, the home of entrepreneurship. And I actually joined another business organization. It’s called the Atlanta black chambers. It’s a chamber dedicated to helping black businesses grow coffee. I have the executive director of course started. So, you know,

     

    do a lot of great, amazing things. Patients with the chamber got into leadership. So I chaired a couple of committees. I co-chaired another counting the financial services committee at one event. One of my chamber members actually invited me to speak at an event because she was a program manager for a city accelerator. And I was able to get a contract with the city.

     

    So I got my first contract sole source. I didn’t have to go through a bidding process. And that’s one of the longest standing contracts that I have. So now I teach a financial consulting to new and small businesses here. Wow. That is an amazing story. I mean, your story is just amazing. There’s so many things that people can take away from that story alone.

     

    And I think that like, it is remarkable. You are clearly very good at what you do, but I love the part of it where you just did it and people recognized it because you did the work and people recognize you for just like being true, doing your skill, doing the work and connecting important into others. Yes. Thank you. If I was building a personal brand and didn’t know that I was building a personal brand.

     

    Yeah. You had no idea. That is so amazing. That is so cool. Congratulations to you. And I hope our listeners are like, okay, like I can do this. Like there, isn’t always some big, huge, hidden strategy behind it. It’s just leading with what you know, doing good work and pouring into people and you get recognized and you get elevated.

     

    You get brought up. Yes. We could just end the podcast. This is today’s lesson, boys and girls. Oh my gosh. Okay. So you currently teach businesses on a regular basis. How to get their financial Jackson row, how to get their foundation in place. You do it on clubhouse all the time. If you guys are not following our Nishawn clubhouse,

     

    please make sure you do that. Is it our Nisha Bobo? Yes. We’ll make sure that’s in the show notes for you guys as well. Plus of course our Nisha is going to be going live with us in our suite life podcast, clubhouse room though, week this show drops and you get to connect with her even more directly and bring your business questions.

     

    So that’s just a side note, those of our listeners that know that, and can’t wait to have this conversation in a live setting. So you can get a chance to really workshop with our listeners too. So what we’re talking about today is really creating a roadmap for your business. And you have a method, you have a way that you bring businesses through this and it’s so important.

     

    And when you explained it to me, kind of behind the scenes, before we started recording, I was like, oh yeah. Oh yeah, that’s really, really good. So today you’re going to guide us through really the first three steps of that process of that business roadmap. So why don’t you go ahead and get us started here for those of our listeners.

     

    You guys should have a pen and paper, please make sure you’re taking notes or if you’re driving or at the gym or wherever, you know, you can always come back and replay this. So what is the first thing businesses should do in order to really start creating a great foundation? Thank you. Yes. So the very first step is creating a solid foundation.

     

    I work with hundreds of business owners a year and they, most of them just get into it. They just get into business. You just started doing it. There was no business plan. There was no page today. Your business is not registered. You don’t know which state you’re at should pay taxes. And like they’re all over the place. So I’m going to help you right now,

     

    create a foundation, a solid foundation. You need a business plan or some type of strategic plan, right? We’re known in our industry for strategic planning. That’s our jam. We do strategic planning from the top to the bottom of your organization. I have a top down approach. You need a plan. The very first step of creating your foundation, whether you are a new business established business,

     

    you’ve been in business 15 years, every single year, you should have a plan. And that plan should start with your vision. What is your vision for your company for this year short term and long term, right? Where do you want to grow this year? What do you want to accomplish this year? What do you want to improve this year?

     

    What do you want to be this year? What is your vision? Create a vision and stick to it because you are the leader of your organization and your team is going to follow you in your leadership style. They need to understand your vision. They need to understand where you’re trying to go. I had a meeting this morning with my marketing strategies that I just hired.

     

    And I sent her my strategic plan and she was like, oh my God, I’ve never had this happen before. Right. Never had a strategic plan. It lists our goals, our objectives, everything. I want her to have clear direction on what I need her to do for my company. I absolutely love that. Okay. I totally geek out on that whole entire thing.

     

    As you know, like we do strategic planning when it comes to drill out Venus suite of offers. And we were talking about this behind the scenes too, but like the whole financial side of it is so big and there’s so much more of a process that people don’t even talk about. And I’m not an expert in that I don’t, you know, build out their,

     

    their financial plans. And so that’s why, like, I’m just geeking out on the whole strategic plan thing. So let me ask you a question here. And this is, I think a lot of our listeners, we have businesses that are scaling, who are listeners. We have brand new businesses when we are talking about guilt or like, this is a problem.

     

    Like when is it usually with, and sadly, this is the case. Although it shouldn’t be entrepreneurs, aren’t very proactive on the things that, you know, we really just don’t want to do that. Isn’t fun. It doesn’t feel like we’re creating anything. So obviously they need to do this in the very beginning. Every business should be doing this in the very beginning,

     

    but honestly, how many businesses do you guys have coming at you that have been in business for a long time? And they don’t have any of this? I’ll say about 60% because, and the reason why they don’t have it in a place, like I said, when they start off, it just started doing business. There isn’t a roadmap in place.

     

    You just started doing business because you are good at it. Or you don’t really think it through or plan it out. And typically when you start to hurt in business or something goes wrong or not making the money yourselves or not increasing in your conversion rates are low. There’s a problem somewhere. And you need to just pause, pause so we can figure out what’s not working where the issues are and create a plan to fix that issue or implement some type of solution that will fix that issue.

     

    But if we don’t know what the problem, if you don’t have visibility on the problem, and you’re just trying to figure it out, that you’re going to continue to build yourself in a hole. So you need to just stop and figure out what’s going wrong. I’ll use myself as an example. I struggled with creating content because as an accountant, when I first started my business,

     

    I sounded really technical. My language was very technical and my content was not combining. I hired a content strategist. I was like, because look, I have tried Facebook. I’ve tried Pinterest, I’ve tried this. I’ve tried that. And I’m just not seeing the conversions or the view. I’m making the money. That’s not the problem. It’s the view.

     

    And she was like, oh, this is the issue. And this is the issue. But I had to hire an expert to tell me where the issue was. And I was like, oh, okay. So now we have a map in place. Now she’s like this. We start here to